Student Course Book- Automation

Automation College
Experion PKS:
Fundamentals - Control Execution
Environment Controller & ACE
Implementation
EXP-2001 R400 Student Guide
Rev 05.0
04/2012
Book 1 of 1
Notices
While this information is presented in good faith and believed to be accurate, Honeywell assumes
no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this courseware. The courseware is presented
on an as-is basis. Honeywell disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a
particular purpose, and makes no express warranties except as may be stated in its written
agreement with and for its customer.
In no event is Honeywell liable to anyone for any indirect, special or consequential damages even
if Honeywell is informed of the possibility of these damages. The information and specifications in
this courseware are subject to change without notice.
No part of this courseware may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means. It is
intended for the use of the original purchaser only. Copying, duplicating, selling or otherwise
distributing the courseware is a violation of law. The materials and workbooks comprising the
courseware may not, in whole or part, be copied, photocopied, reproduced, translated or reduced
to any electronic medium or machine-readable form without prior consent in writing from
Honeywell.
This courseware is the confidential and proprietary information of Honeywell. The courseware may
only be used by the person who attended the Honeywell class. The courseware may only be used
in conjunction with a Honeywell system at the company that paid for the class. Only Honeywell
may use the courseware for training purposes.
This class has special equipment configurations that are appropriate only for training and should
not be used for any other purpose.
Experion, Da Vinci, IntelliMap, MXOpen, MXProLine, TotalPlant, PlantScape, TDC 3000,
Uniformance, and Universal Control Network are registered trademarks of Honeywell International.
These commodities, technology or software were exported from the United States in accordance
with the Export Administration Regulations. Division contrary to U.S. law prohibited.
Copyright 2012 Honeywell Inc.
Honeywell International, Inc.

Automation College
Global Learning Services
Program Objectives
EXP2001R400 - EPKS CEE R400
Tab
1
Lesson
Orientation and Course Introduction
C200/C200E Controller Architecture
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Control Builder Introduction
C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts
C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts
Control Builder Import / Export Procedure
Controller Hardware Configuration
10
Performance Calculations and Monitoring
11
Process Simulation for Lab Exercise
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
Objectives
Course Introduction
Describe the C200/C200E Controller Architecture
Describe the C200/C200E Controller Racks and
Redundancy
Describe the C200/C200E I/O Modules
Describe the Main Features of the Series C System
Describe the Architecture of Series C System
Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and
Options
Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series C
System
Verify Series C Hardware Connections
Describe the Functionality of Control Builder
Use Compare Parameters Options
Use Control Builder Search
Describe How to Locate CB Concepts in KB
Open and Operate Control Builder
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E
Hardware and I/O
Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration
Describe the Import/Export Procedure in Control
Builder
Instructions for: Configure Controller Hardware
Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in
SIM-C200E
Import the Remaining Series A IO Modules into the
SCE
Configure C300 Controller and Series C IOM in
SIM-C300
Import the Remaining Series C IO in to SIM-C300
Describe Fiber Optic Extender and Its Connection
Rules
Describe the Control Firewall Connections in the
Series C System
Define a Typical Series C Configuration
Describe Performance Calculations
Page: 1 of 3
04/04/12
Program Objectives
12
EXCEL Simulation
13
Data Acquisition Control Module
14
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
15
ERDB Administration and Other Tools
16
Checkpoints
17
PID Control Module
18
PID with Split Range Control Module
19
Cascade PID Control Module
20
Cascade PID with Two Secondaries
21
Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication
22
Device Control Module
23
Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks
24
Database Search
Identify the Debutanizer Lab Sequence

Describe the EXCEL Simulation Used for Labs
Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules
Instructions for: Data Acquisition Control Module
Configure Series A IO Channel
Configure Series C IO Channel
Configure the Data Acquisition Control Module
Describe Bulk Build Functionality
Describe Bulk Edit Parameters Functionality
Describe the Block Name References in CM and
SCM
Export/Import a Control Module
Describe ERDB Administration
Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder
Perform Checkpoint Save
Perform Checkpoint Restore
Describe PV Tracking and Initialization
Fundamentals
Configure a PID Control Module
Calculate Performance Statistics of the
Configuration Performed (C200 & C300)
Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range
Outputs
Configure a Cascade PID Control Module
Configure a Cascade PID CM with Two
Secondaries
Describe Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication
Options
Configure a Control Loop for OP Reversal
Indications
Configure a Control Loop for Red Tag Indication
Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List
Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic
Configure a Device Control Module - with Interlock
Describe Auxiliary Function Blocks
Describe MATH Function Blocks
Use Rolling Average Function Block
Use Counter Function Block
Page: 2 of 3
04/04/12
Program Objectives
25
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
26
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
27
Sequential Control Module - Lab
28
Interactive Instructions
29
SCM Abnormal Handlers
30
Final Project
31
PMIO
32
Appendix
Describe Search Functionality

Perform Parameter Search
Perform Where Used Search
Describe the Configuration of SCMs
Configure a Sequential Control Module
Identify SCM Programming Techniques
Explain the Operation of SCMs
Add Function Blocks for SCM Program Control
Specify SCM Recipe Values and Invoke Transition
Configure an SCM Abort Sequence
Use a Step to Start Another SCM
Use Recipe Values to Set Minimum Flow
Interface an SCM with a Graphic Textbox
Describe Interactive Instructions
Configure Interactive Instructions
Configure an SCM Abort Handler
Configure an SCM Interrupt Handler
Configure an SCM Check Handler
Complete the Final Project - 20
Identify PMIO Hardware
Describe the C200/C200E Hardware Interface to
the PMIO
Describe the I/O Card File
Describe How to Configure PMIO Hardware
Describe How to Configure PMIO Channel Blocks
in CMs
Describe PMIO Configuration in a C300 System
Configure an I/O Link Module (IOLIM) for C200E
Configure Digital, Analog and Hart IOPs
Assign, Load, and Activate PMIO for C200E
Assign, Load, and Activate PMIO for C300
Configure a Continuous Control Strategy with
PMIO
Load, Activate, and Operate CMs with PMIO
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
Describe Device Control Blocks
Describe the HPM Functions Duplicated in CEE
Describe Power Generation Function Blocks
Describe the HART Functionality in C200/C200E
Operations
Control Module Reference
Guide to Debutanizer Model for C200E/C300 Labs
Page: 3 of 3
04/04/12
Course Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Course Introduction
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
Introduction to the course
Navigating the self-paced computer-based lessons
Course Introduction
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Purpose of This Course
Experion PKS Control Execution

Environment C200, C200E, C300
and ACE course will provide you
with the ability to:
Plan the C200, C200E and C300
controller
Human Interface
Console Operations
Fault Tolerant Ethernet

LAN
Process
Server
ACE
C300
ESV-LCN
Connected
Configure C200, C200E and C300

hardware, control modules and
sequential control modules
Safety
Manager
ControlNet
NIM
C200/ C200E
Build control strategies on the C200,

C200E, C300 and ACE
TPS, TDC2000, TDC3000

PM I/O
HART
Course Introduction
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Who Should Attend
Experion System implementers who are responsible for designing and

configuring the system:
System engineers or application engineers who configure, add to or change
the C200, C200E, C300 or ACE controller configuration
Maintenance engineers or technicians who add new control loops or
troubleshoot existing loops
Others, whose job functions include performing these tasks
Course Introduction
4/13/2012
1
Honeywell
What You Will Learn

In this course, you will learn how to:
the role of the major Experion PKS hardware and software

Recognize
components and learn how data flows through the C200,C200E and C300
controller
Configure control modules that incorporate data acquisition, regulatory
control and logic
Configure sequential control modules (SCMs) used to control process
sequences such as startup, shutdown and batch operations

Create parallel steps in an SCM for parallel branching
Configure interactive instruction that allows a seamless combination of
operator-guided manual intervention and automatic control in SCMs
Configure additional I/O functionality for the PMIO
Troubleshoot typical errors in configuration

Course Introduction
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Course Organization
The Experion PKS Control

Execution Environment C200,
C200E, C300 and ACE course is
divided into two sections:
1.
2.
The basic concepts and strategies

needed, to develop guidelines for
effective and consistent system
planning
Self-paced computer-based
lessons or instructor-delivered
workshops
Human Interface
Console Operations
Fault Tolerant Ethernet

LAN
Process
Server
C300
ESV-LCN
Connected
Safety
Manager
ControlNet
NIM
C200/C200E
A hands-on workshop in which you

will build and configure the Experion
PKS C200, C200E and C300
controller
Hands-on lab exercises with
step-by-step instructions
Assessments to reinforce
concepts learned
ACE
TPS, TDC2000,
TDC3000
PM I/O
HART
Course Introduction
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
Introduction to the course
Navigating the self-paced computer-based lessons
Course Introduction
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Lesson Window
Navigation bar
Course Introduction
4/13/2012
1
Lesson window - Tabs
Honeywell
Course Introduction
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Pausing and Playing the Lesson
Click Play to resume
Click Pause to stop the lesson

10
Course Introduction
4/13/2012
Moving Backward and Forward in the lesson
Honeywell
Click slide title
Previous screen
Next screen
11
Course Introduction
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Conclusion
EXP2001 CEE Introduction and Navigation

Overview
Completion
Certificate
Proceed to the first lesson in your course material

12
Course Introduction
4/13/2012
Describe the C200/C200E Controller

Architecture

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
This lesson introduces you to the Experion PKS C200 and C200E
controller architecture.
At the conclusion of this lesson,
you will be able to:
Identify the high-level
components and connections
Experion
Server
ACE
FTE
Explain the basic purpose

of the components and
connections
Identify C200 and C200E
ControlNet
Process
C300
Controllers
I/O Options
Rail I/O
Series A
Rack
I/O
Series
A
PM
I/O
Fiber Optic
Isolation
HART
GI/IS Rail I/O
Series H

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Architecture Overview
Cluster 2
Cluster 3
FTE
Control Net
Peer to Peer (within cluster)
Cluster 1

4/13/2012
Types of IO:
Series A Chassis IO (Local or Remote CNI)
Rail IO: Series A, Series H (CNI)
PMIO (IOLIM)
Foundation Fieldbus (FIM)
HART (Series A Chassis IO & PMIO)
Profibus (PBIM)
DeviceNet (DNB)
Honeywell
C200 / C200E Architecture

ACE
Experion Server
FTE
Process
Controllers
ControlNet
I/O Options
Rack I/O
Series A
Rail I/O
Series A
C300
PM I/O
Fiber Optic
Isolation
HART
GI/IS Rail I/O

Series H
Can be redundant:
Server
C200 & C200E
FIM
IOLIM & PMIO
CNI (redun ctlr chassis)

4/13/2012
C200E is a newer controller in the Experion family with larger memory
The architecture of the C200E is similar to the C200 controller

It supports all C200 functions and features
It has 16 MB of User Memory
It supports some additional feature like
Experion Batch Manager
Whole Array Transfer
Custom Data Blocks (up to 200)
New Function Blocks
User Memory Specifications
Rolling Average (RollAvg)
Item / Controller
C200
C200E
Counter (CTUD)
User memory
4 MB
16MB
It does not support
Maximum number of
1023
4095
Custom Algorithm Block
tagged blocks
PCDI
Maximum No of
Component blocks per

CM
Firmware for C200 is frozen at R311
Primary
100

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Interoperability, Redundancy, and Migration

C200
100
ON-Process Migration
C200
Secondary
C200E
C200E
C200
C200E
C200E
Primary
C200E
Secondary
C200
Primary
C200E
OFF-Process Migration
Secondary
C200
C200E
Primary
C200E
C200
Secondary

4/13/2012
Honeywell
C200E
Honeywell
Question 1: Redundant Components

All of these can be redundant except:
A) C200/C200E processors
B) C200/C200E Fieldbus interface modules
Experion
Server
C) C200/C200E PM I/O link modules
FTE
D) C200/C200E Rack I/O

E) C200/C200E PM I/O
ACE
Process
Controllers
I/O Options
ControlNet
C300
Rail I/O
Series A
Rack
I/O
Series
A
PM
I/O
Fiber Optic
Isolation
HART
The
Your
correct
answer:
answer
is:
Correct!
Incorrect.
C200
C200
Rack
Rack
I/OI/O
cannot
cannot
be
YouYou
must
did answer
not
answer
the question
this question
before
redundant.
Incorrect
Correct
You be
-answered
-redundant.
Click
Click
anywhere
anywhere
this correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
continuing
completely
Click anywhere to continue.
GI/IS Rail I/O

Series H
Submit

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Summary
Clear
Key concepts to take away from this lesson are:
The ACE communicates to the Experion Server over FTE

The C200/C200E communicates to the Experion Server over Ethernet, FTE or
ControlNet
C200/C200Es, C300s, and ACE nodes on the same Experion Server can
communicate Peer-to-Peer
Three main types of I/O:

PMIO, Rail I/O, and Chassis I/O
The C200E Controller has more memory than the C200

4/13/2012
Completion
Certificate
Proceed to the next lesson in your course material.


4/13/2012
Honeywell
This page intentionally left blank
10

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Conclusion
Describe the C200/C200E Controller Racks

and Redundancy
Describe the C200/C200E Controller Racks and Redundancy
4/13/2012
11
Honeywell
Introduction
In this lesson, you will learn how the C200/C200E controller is

networked to the server and to remote I/O racks in redundant and nonredundant configurations.
At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:
Describe the C200/C200E control processor, communication and
redundancy modules
CP or CPM Control Processor Module
CNI ControlNet Interface
FTEB Fault Tolerant Ethernet Bridge
RM Redundancy Module
Explain the C200/C200E network connections and addressing
Honeywell
C C CC
NC P C NCNC
I N MP I NI N
I M I I
R
MR
M
Honeywell
Honeywell
C
N
I
AAADAADD
I O I OO I O I
12
4/13/2012
C200/C200E Hardware
C200/C200E Network Connections and Addressing
4/13/2012
13
Honeywell
C200 Control Processor (CP)

100MHz Power PC 603E processor with 8 MB RAM
4 MB (of 8 MB RAM) available for user built control strategies
4 MB Flash ROM for storing program

Lithium battery (or optional rechargeable battery extension module)
Can support up to 8 I/O chassis and 64 IOMs
OK
Controller can be redundant or non-redundant
Double-wide module -- occupies 2 slots on CP rack
14
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
Honeywell
C200E Control Processor (CP)

150MHz Power PC 603R processor with 32 MB RAM
16 MB (of 32 MB RAM) available for user built control strategies
8 MB Flash ROM for storing program

Lithium Battery (or Optional Rechargeable Battery Extension Module)
Can support up to 8 I/O Chassis and 64 IOMs
OK
Controller can be Redundant or Non-redundant
Double-wide Module -- occupies 2 slots on the CP Rack
4/13/2012
15
Honeywell
ControlNet Interface (CNI)
Provides the interface to the supervisory network (supervisory CNI)

Facilitates Peer-to-Peer communication
Enables remote I/O communication (downlink CNI)
Each downlink CNI can support up to 24 remote IOMs
4 downlink CNIs can be connected to one controller
NET
Each CNI must have a unique MAC ID on the

same network
16
4/13/2012
The Device Index

(generally, the last
octet of the IP address)
is set here
FTEB
FTE
CNI
ControlNet
17
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Redundancy Module (RM)

Placed in controller chassis to support redundant controllers
RM must be in the same position in both racks
Both RMs are connected by an optical cable
Switchover between redundant controllers is bumpless
Note: If controller is redundant, then all IOMs must be remote
Redundancy Cable (Fiber Optic)
18
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Fault Tolerant Ethernet Bridge (FTEB)
Honeywell
Question 1: C200/C200E Control Processor
Which of these statements about the control processor (CP) is false?

A) It can support up to 8 I/O chassis and 64 IOMs
B) It is a double-wide module that occupies 2 rack slots
OK
C) It can be redundant
D) It provides an interface to the supervisory network
Yourcorrect
The
answer:
answer is:
You
You
Incorrect
Correct
did
must
You
notanswer
-answer
answered
-Click
Clickthe
anywhere
anywhere
this
question
this
question
correctly!
to
tobefore
continue
continue
completely
continuing
Good
Incorrect.
job! The false statement is "It provides an
interface to the supervisory network." The interface
to the supervisory network is provided by either the
CNI
CNI card
card or
or the
the Fault
Fault Tolerant
Tolerant Ethernet
Ethernet Bridge
Bridge (FTEB).
(FTEB)
Submit
Clear
19
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
C200/C200E Hardware
C200/C200E Network Connections and Addressing
20
10
4/13/2012
TC-CCR013-ControlNet Interface
(CNI), Redundant
Media
TC-PRS021-- C200
Control Processor
(Optional) TC-CCR013-CNI to connect to other

I/O racks
TC-FXX102 -- 10-slot rack
Controller
Chassis
TC-FPCXX2-120/240 VAC
Power Supply
Series A IO can be
in a non-redundant
controller chassis
LAN Connection
Ethernet, TCPIP,etc.
I/O modules and

terminal blocks
Taps -- 9904-TPS, R,
YS, and YR (4 kinds)
ControlNet Cable (TC- KCCxxx) -- Supervisory
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
N
e
t
Terminators-TC-TCXBNC
TC-PCIC01 -- ControlNet
Communication Interface
Module for PC (redundant
media) (in server)
TC-CCR013 -- CNI,
Redundant Media
Server
(stations not
shown)
Additional
Remote I/O
I/O modules and
terminal blocks
4/13/2012
21
Honeywell
Redundant Controller
TC-PRS021 -- C200
Control Processor
TC-CCR013 -- CNI,
Redundant Media
TC-CCR013 -- CNI to
connect to I/O racks
TC-FXX072 7-slot rack

TC-PRR021 -Redundancy
Module
Redundant Chassis
Identical Configuration
Module for module
TC- FXX072
7 SLOT RACK
TC-FPCXX2 -120/240 VAC

Power Supply
-GN KRRxx1 Redundancy

Cable (Fiber Optic)
ControlNet Cable
-- I/O Comm
ControlNet Cable (TC -KCCxxx ) -- Supervisory

Terminators -TC-TCXBNC
NO IOMs PERMITTED IN CONTROLLER
NO IOMs
PERMITTED
IN CONTROLLER
CHASSIS
FOR REDUNDANT
CHASSIS
FOR REDUNDANT
CONFIGURATION!!
CONFIGURATION!!
(IOLIM and
FIM are exceptions)
to
Server
to IO
Chassis
22
11
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Non-redundant Controller
Honeywell
PCIC must be 23
(24 for redundancy)
Supervisory CNIs must be odd 1-19
IO CNets should leave no gap
Use even and odd numbers
All CNets must have a CNI = 1
(network update time)
03
01
02
04
CNI
CNI
CNI
CNI
C200/
C200E
01
CNI
Address Settings - Non-redundant C200/C200E
Server
03
05
CNI
CNI
C200/
C200E
PCIC
23
4/13/2012
23
23 & 24 for Servers
CNIs in C200 chassis must be the Honeywell

same odd number
Address Settings Redundant C200/C200E
CNI
CNI
CNI
C200/
C200E
PCIC
ServerB
01
05
CNI
C200/
C200E
CNI
CNI
01
03
CNI
05
ServerA
PCIC
04
CNI
01
Second one powered on uses virtual (+1) address

IO CNet Assign 3 to a CNI in a remote chassis
During a failover, it controls Network Update Time
IO chassis are not redundant, so use odd & even
No gaps
RM
01
RM
24
03
CNI
CNI
C200/
C200E
23
07
24
12
4/13/2012
01
01
03
05
CNI
01
05
RM
CNI
CNI
FTEB
C200/
C200E
ServerB
CNI
04
02
Switch
RM
CNI
CNI
FTEB
C200/
C200E
ServerA
03
Switch
CNI
FTEB
C200/
C200E
07
4/13/2012
25
Honeywell
Question 2: MAC Addresses
While configuring a ControlNet-connected Control Processor (CP), which

MAC address is entered as the supervisory MAC address?
A) MAC address of the PCIC card
ServerB
B) Device index of the FTEB card
PCIC
C) MAC address of the CNI card connected

to the server
03
The
answer is:
Yourcorrect
answer:
Correct!
Incorrect.
The MAC
Theaddress
MAC
of the of
CNI
the
card
CNIconnected
card
You
must
answer
theaddress
question
before
Correct
anywhere
to
You
did
not
this
question
completely
You-answer
answered
this
correctly!
Incorrect
-Click
Click
anywhere
tocontinue
continue
to
connected
the server
to
should
the
server
be
entered
should
as
be
the
entered
supervisory
as the
continuing
supervisory
MAC address.
MAC address.
01
CNI
23
CNI
C200/
C200E
D) MAC address of the CNI card connected

to the I/O chassis
Supervisory CNet
I/O CNet
CNI
Submit
Clear
26
13
4/13/2012
Honeywell
FTEB
Honeywell
Summary
When you connect the C200/C200E controller to the server and to

remote I/O racks in non-redundant and redundant configurations,
remember:
The double-wide control processor (CP) supports up to 8 I/O chassis and 64
IOMs.
Interface (CNI) modules provide interfaces to the I/O ControlNet
ControlNet
and the Supervisory ControlNet.
Redundant controllers require all IOMs be configured remotely.

All devices on the same network must have unique MAC addresses.
Redundant CNI cards must be addressed with the same odd number.
Redundant FTEBs must be addressed differently with the primary having an
odd number and the secondary having the next highest even number.
4/13/2012
27
Honeywell
Conclusion
Describe the C200 Controller Racks and Redundancy
Completion
Certificate

28
14
4/13/2012
29

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
In this lesson you will learn about the standard C200/C200E input/output
(I/O) modules and their applications.
List the standard I/O types that are compatible with the Experion system
Identify the application for each type of I/O module
Rail I/O
Series A
GI/IS Rail I/O

Series H
30
15
PM I/O

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Chassis - Series A Input/Output Modules

Chassis I/O (also referred to as Series A I/O) has the following
attributes:
Compact Size may reside in either the controller rack or remote I/O rack
Diagnostic and non-diagnostic modules available (DI & DO modules)
IOM configurable through Control Builder
Removable wiring hood
Can be removed and replaced under power
All modules have a form factor of 5 X 5
Redundancy not supported
Module Types:
HART / Non-HART Analog Input

HART / Non-HART Analog Output
Digital Input (with and without Diagnostics)
Digital Output (with and without Diagnostics)
Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD) Input
Thermocouple Input
31

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Series A Rail I/O

Modular connections slide rail
8 terminal bases can be
connected to a single gateway
Gateway
Terminal Base
Gateway provides link to the

ControlNet
DIN Rail
-1 2
+ +
Analog I/O, digital I/O,

thermocouple and RTD
Redundancy is not
supported.
IOM types:
AI- Analog Input
AO- Analog Output
DI- Digital Input
DO- Digital Output
32
16

4/13/2012
Galvanically isolated
Intrinsically safe
Server
Supervisory ControlNet
Redundancy is not
supported.
Controller
CNI
Module
I/O ControlNet
Repeater/
Adapter
E
COM
C o n rt o N
l e tR e p e a
t d
A
re a p e
t r
Repeater/
Adapter
Fiber Modules
E
T C -P B F O 0 1
MO D
C o n rt o N
l e
F tb
i e r Mo u
dl e
T C -P M F O 0 1
C o n rt o N
l e
F tb
i e r Mo u
dl e
T C -P M F O 0 1
P W R
COM
Ch a
n1
Cha
n2
Ch a
n1
Ch a
n 1 Ch a
n2
C o n rt o N
l e tR e p e a
t d
A
r a p te r
e
T C -P B F O 0 1
X m ti
Ex
R e cv
X m ti
R e cv
C o n rt o lN e
F tb
i e r Mo u
dl e
T C -P M F O 0 1
X m ti
R e cv
Ch a
n1
Ch a
n1
i e r Mo u
dl e
x C o n rt o lN eF tb
T C -P M F O 0 1
Ch a
n2
R e cv
Fiber
Optic
Cable
E x C o n rt o N
l e tF b
i e r Mo u
dl e
T C -P M F O 0 1
Ch a
n2
Ch a
n1Cha
n2
+V-V+V-V
X m ti
PW R
+ V-V+ V-V
M OD
i e r Mo u
d l e
x C o n rt o lN e tF b
T C -P M F O 0 1
PW R
R e cv
T C -P B F O 0 1
+V-V+V-V
COM
Fiber Modules
C o n rt o lN e tR e p e a
t d
A
r a p te r
e
MO D
Cha
n2
R e cv
X m ti
R e cv
X m ti
R e cv
X m ti
R e cv
X m ti
COM
C o n rt o lN e tR e p e a
t d
A
r ape
e
t r
T C -P B F O 0 1
X m ti
R e cv
X m ti
R e cv
E x C o n rt o lN e tF b
i e r Mo u
dl e
T CP
- M F O0 1
MO D
X m ti
R e cv
Ch a
n 1 Ch a
n2
Ch a
n 1
NonHazardous
Area
Hazardous
Area
E x C o n rt o lN e
F tb
i e r Mo u
dl e
T C -P M F O 0 1
PW R
X m ti
Ch a
n2
+V-V+ V-V
R e cv
X m ti
R e cv
X m ti
R e cv
X m ti
R e cv
X m ti
Rail I/O Modules - Series H

Ex
T C -P G C N 1 1
I/O ControlNet
Gateway
-+
12
+
V+V- V+V-
33

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Process Manager I/O (PM I/O)

Requires a PM I/O Link Interface Module
(IOLIM) in the same rack as the
C200/C200E
Redundant IOLIMs are supported with
redundant C200/C200Es
PM I/O can be redundant
PM I/O includes AI, AO, DI, DO, RTD, T/C,
DI SOE
PM I/O requires a separate board to accept
field wiring. This board is called a Field
Termination Assembly (FTA).
PM I/O
PM I/O can be configured remotely up to

8km using an fiber optic IOLINK Extender
34
17

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Series H Rail I/O
Honeywell
Serial Interface Module
NET
OK
NET
Serial Interface Module
Honeywell
SIM FTA
Power Adapter
ADAPTER
SERIAL
INTERFACE
FTA
MODBUS
(16 Array
Channels)
SERIAL
INTERFACE
FTA
A/B
(16 Array
Channels)
Modbus
Compatible
Subsystem
Allen-Bradley
Compatible
Subsystem

4/13/2012
35
Honeywell
Question 1: I/O Application

Which I/O module can be used in a hazardous environment?
A) Chassis I/O
B) Serial Interface
NET
OK
NET
C) Series H I/O
Honeywell

Ex
TC-PGCN11
Gateway
-+
1 2
+
V+V- V+V-
Yourcorrect
The
answer:
answer is:
Incorrect.
Correct!
Series
Series
HHI/O
I/O
modules
modules
are
are
specifically
specifically
You must
answer
the
question
before
Correct
- -Click
anywhere
totocontinue
You Incorrect
did
You
not
answer
answered
Click
this
anywhere
this
question
correctly!
completely
continue
designed
for
unsafe
environments.
continuing
Submit
36
18
Clear

4/13/2012
Which I/O module will support redundancy?

A) Chassis I/O
NET
OK
NET
B) PM I/O
Honeywell
C) Series H I/O
Ex
TC-PGCN11
Gateway
-+
1 2
+
V+V- V+V-
PM I/O
Yourcorrect
The
answer:
answer is:
You
must- Click
answer
the question
before
Correct
to
continue
You
Incorrect
did
You
not
answered
-modules
Clickanywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
continue
completely
Yes!
PM
I/O
modules
are
the
only
standard
No. PM I/Oanswer
are
the
only
standard
continuing
I/O modules that are available in a redundant
configuration.
Submit
37
Clear

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Summary
The standard I/O types compatible with the Experion system are:
Series A I/O modules, which can be installed in the same chassis
asChassis
the C200/C200E (if the C200/C200E is not redundant) or a remote I/O
chassis.
A Rail I/O modules, which include analog I/O, digital I/O,

Series
thermocouples, and RTD.
H Rail I/O modules, which are intrinsically safe for use in hazardous
Series
environments.
PM I/O modules which include AI, AO, DI, DO, RTD, T/C, and DI SOE.
Interface modules which interface to Allen-Bradley and Modbus
Serial
subsystems.
38
19

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 2: I/O Redundancy
Honeywell
Conclusion
Completion
Certificate

39

4/13/2012
Honeywell
40
20

4/13/2012
Describe the Main Features of the Series C

System

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
Series C Deliverables
Key features of Series C hardware
Performance targets

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Products and Functions delivered under
the Series C Umbrella include:
Series C I/O
Series C FIM
Profibus Gateway Module (PGM)
C300 Controller
Control Firewall
Related Deliverables include:

FTE Bridge firmware that supports C300
connections to selected Series A I/O
Allows FTE Bridge firmware to be
upgraded from a R300 or later system
The C300 Firmware should match the
release of the Experion Server
Power System
Honeywell

4/13/2012
Products delivered in Series C Release

C300 Controller
50 ms and 20 ms
Initial release C300 20 ms supported
for Turbo machinery Controls
Series C I/O
Analog Input HART, Non-HART
Analog Output HART, Non-HART
Digital Input & DI-SOE
Digital Output
Low Level Mux Input
Speed Protection Module (SPM)
Only with C300 20 ms
Servo Valve Position Module (SVPM)
Only with C300 20 ms
Fieldbus Interface Module (FIM4, FIM8)
Control Firewall
Power System

4/13/2012
Honeywell
I/O options for C300
Series C I/O
AI, AO - HART & Non-HART
DI, DO, LLMUX, DISOE
Series C Fieldbus Interface
FIM4, FIM8
PMIO
AI, AO, DI, DO, RTD, T/C, DI SOE
FTEB connected Series A I/O
FTEB connections to AB PLCs

Using a bridge chassis with a FTEB and
downlink CNI

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Non-HART Series C IO Modules

Non-HART versions of both the AI and AO
These modules use the AI-HL and AO block
templates
IO Unit Consumption remains the same as
the HART AI and HART AO
IOM Model
Names
IOM Block Name
Description
Number of
Channels
Cx-PAIX01
AI-HL
High Level Analog Input
16
Cx-PAOX01
AO
Analog Output
16

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 1: Series C Deliverables
Which of these statements about the Series C deliverables is false?

A) Series C deliverables include Series C I/O, C300,
Series C FIM and Control Firewall
B) Series C deliverables include a new Power System
C) New FTE Bridge firmware is required but cannot
be upgraded from a R310 system
Correct!
Incorrect.
The
false
The false
statement
is " New
is " New
FTE Bridge
FTE
The
Your
correct
answer:
answer
is: statement
firmware
Bridge firmware
is required
is required
but it cannot
but itbe
cannot
upgraded
be
You must answer the question before
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not
-answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
upgraded
from
from
aanywhere
R300
a R300
system."
system."
continuing
Submit
Clear

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics

Performance targets

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Packaging - Overview
Series C is the term used to describe the new

styling for the C300 controller and associated
modules
The Series C hardware was designed to be
space efficient
Designed Vertical
No electronic card files
Zero Footprint power system does not impact
module space
Designed to offer >30% reductions in space
Combines I/O Processor and Field Terminations

into one Assembly
Fewer components providing higher MTBF
and Availability

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Key Attributes
Environmental ratings
Temperature: 0 -60 Deg C

EMI/RFI:15 V/M External to cabinet with doors closed
Vibration: Frequency 10 to 60 Hz, Acceleration 0.5 g max, Displacement 0.1
inch
Class 1 Div 2/Zone 2 interface & mounting support
Approvals Support (CE, FM, CSA, ATEX, etc.)

No plans for UL certification of complete system
Corrosion protected models

All Series C components can be mixed and matched in cabinet
Electronics mounted to IOTA
Module Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)
Reduces footprint
Packaged cabinet solution

Similar to TPS Process Manager today
10

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Key Attributes
Designed Vertical
The modules are set at an 18 degree
angle for greater heat dissipation
Reduces hot spots
More Efficient Field Wiring
Top/Bottom Wiring Entry
More Natural Terminations
No Severe Wire Bends
Space Efficient Design

Comparable to highest density current
competitive offerings
Modular Approach
Removable Terminal Blocks
11

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Mechanical Keying
The Series C IO Modules all have the same
form factor. To prevent insertion of the wrong
module into the wrong IOTA, the modules are
equipped with tabs or keys which correspond to
slots on the IOTA.
Keys
Key
Slots
12

4/13/2012
Honeywell
New Terminology
IOTA Support
IOTA Carrier
IOTA (Input/Output Termination Assembly)
IOM (Input/Output Module)
13

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Main Components
Mounting concept:
Single cabinet side for electronics
and terminations
Cable tray mounted carrier/IOTA with:
Replaceable Module
Power and Communication
Connectors
Field Wiring Connections
Vertical stacking of elements

Natural flow of field wiring
Channel mount
Channel is like PM FTA channel
Channel is not the same as FTA and
cannot be used for Series C mounting
14

4/13/2012
Honeywell
New Cabinet Design

Power
Supply
Area
I/O Rail
Area
Batteries/Battery
Charger
15

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 2: Packaging
What factors contribute to the Series C space-efficient design?
A) Designed Vertical
B) No electronic card files
C) Power system does not occupy footprint
D) All of the above
Your
The
correct
answer:
answer
Incorrect!
Correct!
All
All
of
ofthe
theis:
above
abovestatements
statementsare
aretrue
trueand
and
make
Series
C a more
space efficient
You
must
answer
the question
before design.
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Submit
16
Clear

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 3: Terminology
Which of the following is not a Series C hardware terminology?
A) IOTA Support
B) IOTA Carrier
C) IOTA
D) IOM
E) CPM
Incorrect.
Correct! The
Theterm
term"CPM"
"CPM"isisnot
notaaSeries
SeriesCC
Yourcorrect
The
answer:
answer is:
hardware terminology and is used when
You must
answer
the
question
before
referring
toanywhere
a C200
controller.
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not
-answer
answered
-Click
Click
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Submit
17
Clear

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
Performance targets
18

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Performance Targets
FEATURE
C300 (20ms)
C300 (50ms)
65
330 (200)
Fault-Tolerant Ethernet
FTE Node s per Community
Non-FTE Node s per Community
200
ACE
No. ACE per Server
Controller
No. Controllers per Server (C200 or C300)
Latency
20
250 ms
100 ms
Analog
Digital
Notes:
1. 330 nodes per community if no FTEBs are present; 200 nodes per community with FTEBs.
19

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Limitations
The following is not supported with C300:
Series C FIM (FIM4)

- OK w/o C300
Peer-to-Peer communications with FTEB-based IOLIMs

Series C and PM I/O cannot be mixed on same I/O Link
Series A FIM (FIM2)

- Requires C200 (CPM)
The following architectures are not supported:

C200/C200E Peer-to-Peer communication with Series C FIM4/FIM8
modules
C300 Peer-to-Peer communications with Series A FIM (FIM2) modules
Peer-to-Peer
OK
PM I/O
OK
Series C
I/O
H
L
A
I
Honeywell
OK
NO
NO
FIM
I
O I
LM
F
I
M
OK
NO
C300
F C
T P
E M
B
20
10

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 4: Rules
Which of the following statements is true about a Series C system?

A) Peer-to-peer communication with FTEB based
IOLIMs is not supported
B) Series C I/O and PM I/O cannot be mixed on the

same I/O Link
C) C200 Peer-to-peer communications with Series C
FIM modules is not supported
D) C300 Peer-to-peer communications with FTEBbased (Series A) FIM modules is not supported
E) All of the above
The
Your
correct
answer:
answer
Incorrect.
Correct!
All
All
of
ofthe
theis:
above
abovestatements
statements
You
must
answer
the question
before
are
true
about
the Series
C system.
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Submit
21
Clear

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Summary
C hardware includes:
Series
Series C I/O (HART and Non-HART AI and AO, DI, DO, LLMUX, DISOE)
Series C FIM (FIM4, FIM8)

Profibus Gateway Module
C300 Controller
Control Firewall
C is a space efficient design that combines I/O processor and

Series
field termination into one assembly.
C electronics are mounted to IOTAs reducing footprint and
Series
supporting module removal and insertion under power (RIUP).
C300 controller supports Series C, Series A, and PM I/O, Series C
interface, PGM, and FTEB connections to AB PLCs via
Fieldbus
Downlink CNI.
C300 controllers are supported per server.
20
C300 Peer-to-Peer communications with FTEB-based IOLIMs is not
supported.
Series C and PM I/O cannot be mixed on the same I/O link.
22
11

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Conclusion
Describe the main features of the Series C system
Completion
Certificate

23

4/13/2012
Honeywell
24
12

4/13/2012
25

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Experion Platform Architecture

Advanced Enterprise Wide
Applications
Business FLEX
Workcenter
POMS, OptiVISION
Firewall
Casual User
Secure Read Only
Process Display
Web Server
eServer
Plant Wide
Data
Warehouse
PHD
Integrated
Physical
Security
Enterprise
Building
Integrator
Desktop
Access
for Business
Applications
Web Browsers
Business Network
Plant Asset
Management
Asset Manager
Remote Operations
Experion Station
Multivariable Control Video as a Process Sensor

Digital Video Manager
and Optimization
Profit Suite
Plant Simulation
UniSim
Video Ethernet
Advanced Applications Network

Integrated
Supervisory Control
ACE
Precision Measurement
Redundant
and Control
Global Database & Historian
Quality Control System
Experion Server
Web-based Human Interface

Experion Station
ASM Operator Effectiveness
Ergonomic
Operator Consoles
Icon Series
Focus of this Presentation

Supervisory Control Network
Regulatory, Logic
Sequential & Model
Based Controls
C300/C200 & Profit Loop
Wireless
Access
Field Mobility
Mobile PKS
Field Rounds
Automation
IntelaTrac PKS
Local Control Network
SIL 3 Safety System

Safety Manager
Redundant and/or
Remote I/O
Wireless
Transmitters
26
13
Basic
Process
Controller
Manager
Investment Protection
for TPS/TDC
Experion on LCN

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Series C Architecture
AB PLCs
Point to point data using
exchange blocks
In this release,
all Series A IOMs are
supported.
27

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Profibus Gateway Module Architecture

Experion Server
FTE
C200
Process
Controllers
C300
PGM
Rack I/O
Series A
Profibus
I/O Options
28
14
SST Card

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Series C Profibus Gateway Module (PGM) is used to

connect Profibus devices to a C300 controller
Profibus Configuration Tool is integrated into Control

Builder
New Profibus Device & Channel Blocks in C300
29
Each C300 Controller supports connections to 2 PGMs

Each PGM can be connected to a single C300 Controller
Each PGM supports 2 Profibus Network Links (PBLink)
Each PGM link supports up to 124 Profibus devices
(slaves)
Uses Profibus DP protocol to communicate with
devices
PGMs can optionally be Redundant
Redundant PGMs are on separate IOTAs
New PDA protocol supports IO Data Communication
between C300 and PGM

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 1: Architecture
Which of the following statements is not true about the Series C Architecture?
A) Series C FIM is connected to L1 or L2 switch
B) Serial Interface, Pulse Input, Device Net Interface
and Profibus Interface Series A I/O's are connected
to Control Firewall using FTEB
C) Allen Bradely PLCs can also be connected to a rack,
and then to the Control Firewall using an FTEB
D) All of the above
Incorrect.
Correct! The
Thefalse
falsestatement
statementisis""Series
SeriesCCFIM
FIMisis
connected to L1 or L2 Cisco switch". The Series C
Yourcorrect
The
answer:
answer is:
FIM is the Fieldbus interface module which
You
must answer
the question
before
connects
to
the
Control
Firewall
via FTE.
YouIncorrect
Correct
did
You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Click
anywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Submit
30
15
Clear

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Summary
Control Firewalls are connected to Level 1 or Level 2 switches

The C300 Controller is connected to the Control Firewall using FTE
The Series C FIMs (4 & 8) are the Fieldbus interfaces. They also
connect to the Control Firewall via FTE
PGM is the Profibus interface. This module also connects to the
The
Control Firewall via FTE
A Rack IO connects to the C300 through the Control Firewall
Series
using an FTEB
This rack is connected to the Control Firewall using an FTEB and via FTE
Bradley PLCs can also be connected to a Rack, and then to the

Allen
Control Firewall using an FTEB
31

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Conclusion
Completion
Certificate

32
16

4/13/2012
Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and

Options
33
Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options

4/13/2012
Honeywell
C300 Controller Supported I/O

Flexible I/O support:
The C300 can support a number of IO modules
all of which can be mixed on the same C300.
These IO modules can be any mix of:
PMIO
Series C I/O
Series A Chassis I/O through the FTEB
module
Series C FIMs
The C300 can support 64 I/O units
The C300 is equipped with 2 IOLINK (IOL)
interfaces to connect to Series C and / or PM
I/O.
Each IOL can support 40 I/O units
IOL
Connection
FTE
Connection
34
17

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Types of Series C I/O Modules

Analog Input (AI) 16 Channels
A Channel is one
Input (or output)
circuit.
HART & non-HART
Analog Output (AO) 16 Channels

HART & non-HART
Digital Input (DI) 32 Channels 2 physical types

Low Voltage 24VDC Input
High Voltage 100VAC/120VAC/125VDC/240VAC
Digital Output (DO) 32 Channels

Optional Relay Extension Board
Sequence Of Events (SOE) 32 Channels

Low Level Analog Input (LL) 64 channels
Thermocouple and RTD
AI, AO, DI, DO and SOE are optionally redundant

LL Inputs are not available in redundant configurations
35

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Non-Redundant Series C I/O Module

IOM is physically placed on
an IOTA
The IOTA has all the wiring
and power connections
The IOM has the
electronics and diagnostics
I/O Link
Connection
I/O Module
Field
Termination
AI, AO and LL modules

mount on a 6 IOTA
DI/DO modules mount on a
9 IOTA
Calibration
Resistors /
Jumpers
36
18

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 1: Series C I/O Support
Which of the following statements is true about C300 I/O Support?

A) Supports 2 I/O Link interfaces
B) Supports mix and match of I/O types
C) 64 primary IO units per C300, 40 per I/O Link

D) HLAI, HLAO, DI, DO and LL Mux
are all supported type Series C I/O's
E) All of the above
The correct
Your
answer:
answer is:
Correct!
Incorrect.
All All
of the
of the
above
above
statements
statements
are
are
true
true
about
about
Series
Series
Cthis
C
I/O
I/O
support.
support.
You
Incorrect
Correct
did
You
not
-answer
answered
-Click
Click
anywhere
anywhere
this
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Submit
37
Clear

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Redundant Series C I/O Module

Same IO module as non-redundant
AI, AO, DI, DO modules mount on a
12 IOTA
I/O
Module
I/O Link
Connection
Field
Termination
I/O Termination
Assembly
Redundant IOM
38
19

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Diagnostic LEDs
Power and Status LEDs on the module itself

Provides display of any failure conditions
Power LED
Off or On (green)
For detailed information,

search KB for:
Series C I/O LED Descriptions
Status LED
Off, Green, Amber, Red
Steady, Flashing (1 sec), Flashing quickly (1/4 sec)
39

4/13/2012
Honeywell
HART Analog Input

16 Analog Channels
Supports Integrated HART
Communications
4 Analog Channels support
Voltage mode (device ground)
System ground, all channels
support voltage mode, Special
wiring for ground
Optionally Redundant
50msec Scan for 4-20ma input
4 configurable modems
250ms Loop Latency
40
20

4/13/2012
Honeywell
HART Analog Input Non Redundant
I/O Link
Connections
Differential
Voltage Input
Channels 13-16
I/O Link
Address
41

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 2: Series C I/O Support

Which of the these statements explains an IOTA?
A) The IOTA has all wiring and power connections
B) Power and Status LEDs are located on the IOTA
C) The same IOTA is used for non-redundant and
redundant IOM
Your
The
correct
answer:
answer
is: has
Correct!
Incorrect.
The
The
IOTA
IOTA
has
all the
all the
wiring
wiring
and
You must
answer
the question before
and
power
connections.
connections.
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not
-answer
answered
-power
Click
Click
anywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Submit
42
21
Clear

4/13/2012
Analog Input
I/O Module
Honeywell
IOM Addressing and IOLINK
I/O Link
Connections
IOM Address, Pre-define

Address jumpers are
available
43
Honeywell
HART Analog Input Wiring Options

Channels 1-12

4/13/2012
Channels 13-16
44
22

4/13/2012
Honeywell
HART Analog Input Redundant
I/O Link
Connections
Module
Fuse
I/O Link
Address
Analog Input
I/O Module
primary and
redundant
45
HART Analog Input Detail Displays
46
23

4/13/2012
Honeywell

4/13/2012
Honeywell
HART Analog Output

16 Analog Channels
Supports Integrated HART
Communications
250ms Loop Latency when
used with Series C HLAI
4 configurable modems
47

4/13/2012
Honeywell
HART Analog Output

Calibration
Voltage
Reference
I/O Link
Connections
I/O Link
Address
Analog Output
I/O Module
48
24

4/13/2012
Honeywell
HART Analog Output Detail Displays
49

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Non-HART Series C IO Modules

Non-HART versions of both the AI and AO
These modules use the AI-HL and AO block
templates
IOM Model
Names
IOM Block Name
Description
Number of
Channels
Cx-PAIX01
AI-HL
16
Cx-PAOX01
AO
Analog Output
16
50
25

4/13/2012
Honeywell
New Non-HART Series C IO Modules (R311.2 on)
These Non-HART versions of both the AI and AO

contain no Hart functionality and are different from the
CC-PAIX01 and CC-PAOX01
They use different IOTAs:

AI IOTA CC-TAIN01, CC-TAIN11 (red)
AO IOTA CC-TAON01, CC-TAON11 (red)
These modules use the AI-HL and AO block templates

IOM Model
Names
IOM Block Name
Description
Number of
Channels
CC-PAIN01
AI-HL
16
CC-PAON01
AO
Analog Output
16
51

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Low Level Inputs

64 Channel Low Level Multiplexer Analog Input
Thermocouple (T/C) and RTD
Uses only the New Solid State FTAs

No plans to support the FTAs requiring the Power Adapter
With the new Solid State FTAs:

OTD before propagation of PV every 1 sec
Does not require Power Adapter FTA
Can be used with existing UCN/xPM installations
With the existing FTAs:

OTD propagates every 30 sec
FTAs will require standard FTA Channel and cannot be mounted on

IOTA Carrier
52
26

4/13/2012
Honeywell
LLMUX Solutions
Standard Solution
LL IN-CABINET CONFIGURATION
Power
Status
51304465-xxx Internal Cabinet Cable
CU/CC-TAIM01
PMIO LLMUX
VL/BS
CC-PAIM01
6C
on
d
LL TCMUX IOTA
uc
t
or
Ca
b
le
He
a
Max. Length
1000 ft.
B-Size
FTA Assemblies must be

installed in a cabinet.
LLMUX Models
MU/MC-TAMT04
MU/MC-TAMR04
MU/MC-TAMT14
New FTAs Only (no Power Adapter)

53

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Digital Input
32 Channels
Two (2) Physical IOM Types
1. 24VDC
2. 100VAC/120VAC/125VDC/240VAC
Three (3) Physical IOTA Types

1. 24VDC
2. 120VAC/125VDC
3. 240VAC
100ms Loop Latency
54
27

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Digital Input, contd.

I/O Link
Connections
Digital Input
I/O Module
I/O Link
Address
55
Honeywell
Digital Input Detail Displays

4/13/2012
56
28

4/13/2012
Digital Input Sequence of Events Module (DISOE)
Honeywell
32 Channels
1ms Digital Input resolution for
SOE
Time Correlation with other SOE

modules
Within C300 view
Over either I/O Link
Works with PMIO SOE
Input Channel scanning

20ms (SOE mode)
5ms (Low Latency mode)
1ms (SOE)
Input channels are Isolated

Selection for Internal or External
excitation power
Uses Same IOTA As DI24V (TDIL01 & TDIL11)
57
Honeywell
Digital Input New DISOE Module
Existing DI Module
20ms scanning (Normal mode)
Open Wire Detection
5ms scanning (Low Latency mode)
Open Wire Detection disabled
New DISOE Module

DISOE Module CC-PDIS01
Uses Same IOTAs as DI
CC-TDIL01 & CC-TDIL11
All DI Functions PLUS
1ms SOE resolution
20ms scanning (SOE mode)
Same IOTA

4/13/2012
Open Wire Detection disabled
58
29

4/13/2012
Honeywell
24V Digital Input IOTA for DI & DISOE

CC-TDIL01
I/O Link
Connections
Digital Input
I/O Module
DISOE uses
the same
IOTAs as DI
(CC-TDIL01 &
CC-TDIL11)
I/O Link
Address
59
Honeywell
Digital Input Detail Displays

4/13/2012
60
30

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Digital Output
32 Channels
Same IOM used for 24VDC or
High Voltage Output
IOTA Types
Redundant and Non-redundant

24VDC Bussed Output
High Voltage Relay Output
100VAC / 120VAC / 240VAC /
125VDC / 48VDC
Utilizes Relay Extension Board
100ms Loop Latency
61

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Digital Output
I/O Link
Connections
I/O Link
Address
Digital Output
I/O Module
62
31

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Digital Output Module with relay extender

Relay Extension Panel
Digital Output IOTA
63
Honeywell
Digital Output Detail Displays

4/13/2012
64
32

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Series C I/O in Hazardous Areas
65
Honeywell worked with MTL to manufacture

an IOTA for use when wiring into hazardous
locations (C1D1 / Zone 1).
The IOTA will be larger than a standard
IOTA (approximately 9 wide)
1-, 2- and 4-channel isolators are available

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Series C I/O in Hazardous Areas, contd.
Standard
IOTA Footprint
Non-Redundant
IOTA + IOM
6.00
Redundant
IOTA + IOM
I/S
IOTA Footprint
66
33

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Series C I/O in Hazardous Areas

Cabinet Layout Wide Channel
Supports mixture of IS and general
purpose signals within same cabinet
Cables are segregated using hazardousarea trunking
High vertical packing density
67

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Process Manager I/O

No separate IOLIM needed, connects directly to IOLink
PM I/O includes AI, AO, DI, DO, RTD, T/C, DI SOE
PM I/O can be redundant
HLAI, HLAIHART, STIM, AO, AO16HART, DI, DISOE, DO
NOT: LLAI, LLMUX, and RHMUX
Direct connection
to C300 IOLINK
FTA for I/O

Remote I/O using Fiber Optic
PM I/O
68
34

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Honeywell DE Transmitters and C300
Support is provided for Honeywell DE-based smart transmitters in C300

via existing PMIO modules:
The (older) Smart Transmitter Interface (STI) module is not supported in

Experion
The Experion Platform provides full integration of all DE information
(diagnostics, configuration, etc.) within the standard system displays.
No additional Asset Management software (e.g., Asset Manager PKS or
Field Device Manager) is required to access the DE data.
69

4/13/2012
Honeywell
FTE Bridge in Series C

FTE Bridge, as part of a Series C system
allows:
A C300 Controller to use Series A chassis I/O
without the need for a C200/C200E
A C300 to communicate (Exchange Block
peer-to-peer) with Rockwell devices like PLC5
and CL5550 using a bridge chassis with a
FTEB and downlink CNI
The FTEB continues to operate at 10Mbps

after updating firmware to support C300
communication with Series A Chassis I/O
C200/C200E with FTEB can be used for
Peer to Peer with a C300 Controller
70
35

4/13/2012
Smart Transmitter Interface Multivariable (STI-MV)
Honeywell
Question 3: Series C I/O

Which of the following I/Os are available in
a Series C type?
A) HLAI, HLAO, Profibus I/O, LL Inputs
B) DI, DISOE, DO, HLAI, HLAO, LL Inputs
C) HLAI, HLAO, LL Inputs, Serial Interface
D) Serial Interface, DeviceNet, Pulse Input, HLAI
Incorrect.
Correct!
The
TheI/O's
I/O's
available
availableininaa
The
Your
correct
answer:
answer
is:
Series C type are DI, DO, HLAI,
YouIncorrect
Correct
did HLAO
You
not -answer
answered
-Click
ClickLL
anywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
and
Inputs.
continuing
Submit
71
Clear

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 4: FTEB in Series C
Which of the following scenarios are available for a FTEB to publish I/O
data to a C300?
A) FTEB in redundant chassis connected to C300
B) FTEB in a non-redundant chassis connected to
C300 via Control Firewall
C) FTEB in a non-redundant chassis connected to
C300 via L1 or L2 switch
Your
The
correct
answer:
answer
is:
Incorrect.
Correct!
The
The
valid
validscenario
scenariofor
forFTEB
FTEBto
topublish
publishI/O
I/O
data You
to C300
" FTEBthe
in aquestion
non redundant
mustisanswer
before I/O chassis
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
connected to
C300 via Control Firewall."
continuing
Submit
72
36
Clear

4/13/2012
Honeywell
SERIES C
I/O
Family
I/O Type
HLAI
HLAI w/ HART
LLAI
LLMUX
RHMUX
STI
STI-MV
AO8
AO16
AO16 w/ HART
Serial Device
Serial
Pulse
DI
DI-24V
DISOE
DO16
DO32
Fieldbus
C300
Support
C200/C200E
Support
xPM
Support
C300
Support
I/O Type
HLAI w/ HART
LLMUX64
AO16 w/ HART
DI24D32
DI32
DO24D32
DO32
Fieldbus
C200/C200E
Support
I/O
Family
RAILSERIES A
C200/C200E
Support
HLAI
DI24D
DI120A
LLAI-TC
LLAI-RTD
AO
DO24D
DO120A
DO-Relay
AO16 w/ HART
I/O
Family
xPM
Support
C300
Support
I/O Type
RAIL
SERIES H
PMIO
I/O
Family
I/O Type
C300
C200
xPM
Support Support Support
HLAI8
LLAI8
AO8
DI16
DO4
DI16
73

4/13/2012
Honeywell
I/O Compatibility Series A
CHASSIS SERIES A
I/O
Family
I/O Type
HLAI16
HLAI6
HLAI8 w/HART
LLAI-TC6
LLAI-RTD6
AO6V
AO6MA
AO8
AO8 w/HART
Pulse (612O)
DI120A16I
DI220A16I
DI120A8D
DI120A16
DI24D16I
DI24D16D
DI24D32
DO120/220A16I
DO120A8D
DO120/220A16
DO220A16-Relay
DO24D16I
DO24D16D
DO24D32
Serial
Fieldbus (FIM2)
Profibus DP
DeviceNet
xPM
Support
C300
Support
C200/C200E
Support
TC-IAH161
TC-IAH061
TC-HAI081
TC-IXL062
TC-IXR061
TC-OAV061
TC-OAH061
TC-OAV081
TC-HAO081
TC-MDP081
TC-IDK161
TC-IDW161
TC-IDX081
TC-IDA161
TC-IDJ161
TC-IDX161
TC-IDD321
TC-ODK161
TC-ODX081
TC-ODA161
TC-ORC161
TC-ODJ161
TC-ODX161
TC-ODD321
TC-MUX021
Model
Number
SST-PFBCLX
1756-DNB
74
37
xPM
Support

4/13/2012
C300 I/O Compatibility
Honeywell
Conclusion
Describe Series C Input/Output Modules and Options
Completion
Certificate

75

4/13/2012
Honeywell
76
38

4/13/2012
Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series

C System
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series C System
77
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Series C IO Topology Rules

I/O Topology Rules:
2 IO LINKS
PMIO and Series C I/O can be on the same C300
Connect to series A I/O using an FTEB
Connect to Allen Bradley PLCs using an FTEB
78
39
4/13/2012
Honeywell
C300 Topology Rules IO Capacity
A C300 can support a maximum of 64 IO Units (IOU).

Series C IO and PM IO count as 1 IOU each.
Series C IO and PMIO are connected to C300 using
IO LINKS.
Series A I/O also consume IOUs, shown later.
79
C300 Topology Rules IOLINK Capacity
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Each IO Link can support a maximum of 40 IOUs.

A C300 controller supports 2 IO LINKs.
An IO LINK can be configured for either Series C IO
(at 750 kb link speed) or PMIO (at 375 kb link speed).
An IO LINK cannot support both Series C IO and
PMIO on the same link.
80
40
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Series C IO and PMIO Mix
Link 1
750 kbps
40 PRI
Series C IOMs
40 RED
Series C IOMs
#2: PMIO
TOTAL 64 IOUs
Link 2
750 kbps
Link 1
375 kbps
24 PRI
Series C IOMs
24 RED
Series C IOMs
24 PRI
PM - IOPs
24 RED
PM - IOPs
#3: Series C +PMIO

TOTAL 64 IOUs
Link 1
750 kbps
40 PRI
Series C IOMs
40 RED
Series C IOMs
Link 2
375 kbps
40 PRI
PM - IOPs
40 RED
PM - IOPs
#4: Series C +PMIO

TOTAL 64 IOUs
Link 2
375 kbps
Link 1
375 kbps
24 PRI
PM - IOPs
24 RED
PM - IOPs
40 PRI
PM - IOPs
40 RED
PM - IOPs
Link 2
750 kbps
24 PRI
Series C IOMs
24 RED
Series C IOMs
4/13/2012
81
C300 Topology Rules FTEB Connections to CF9
Honeywell
A C300 can support up to 7 FTEBs for interfacing with

supported Chassis I/O or AB PLC interface.
FTEBs must be connected to the same Control Firewall
as the C300.
This limits the FTEBs to 6 per redundant C300
controller.
82
41
4/13/2012
#1: Series C I/O

TOTAL 64 IOUs
Honeywell
C300 Topology Rules Series A IOU Capacity
Each FTEB used to connect Series A IO can support up to 16

IOUs. The IOU count per module is:
Serial
Interface
8 per FTA
Profibus
Interface
DeviceNet Interface
Pulse Input
The FTEB used for Series A cannot be in a redundant

configuration.
4/13/2012
83
Honeywell
C300 Controller I/O Link Configurations

#5: Series C + PMIO + Series A
TOTAL 64 IOUs
C300
Capacity 3 MIX #3
Link 1
Link 2
750 kbps
375 kbps
24 PRI
Series C IOMs
24 PRI
PM-IOPs
24 RED
PM-IOPs
24 RED
Series C IOMs
FTE
16 Series A IO
Units w/FTEB
84
42
4/13/2012
Honeywell
C300 Topology Rules FTEB Limitations
Important limitations:
An FTEB connected chassis can allow connections
to only 1 C300 controller.
You cannot have any other C200/C200E, IO or CNI
downlink modules in the FTEB chassis to connect to
other IO chassis.
85
C300 Topology Rules FTEB I/F Capacity
4/13/2012
Honeywell
CNI, ENET or
DHRIO only
FTEBs can be used to connect AB PLCs for Peer to

Peer, using Exchange Blocks. No IOUs consumed.
A maximum of 32 exchange blocks, and a maximum
of 8 PLCs can be connected.
The interface uses Control Net to the AB PLCs and
allows only the CNI, ENET or DHRIO.
86
43
4/13/2012
C300 Topology Rules Series C FIM Usage
Honeywell
A Series C FIM can be used with or without the C300.

A FIM needs to connect to a C300 if a combined
control strategy is needed.
A FIM4 counts as 4 IOUs; A FIM8 counts as 8 IOUs
A C300 can support 15 FIM4s, or up to 8 FIM8s
A mix of FIM4s & FIM8s is supported as long as the
total number of H1 links does not exceed 64
4/13/2012
87
C300 Topology Rules Series C FIM Capacity
Honeywell
An Experion Server can support up to 125 FIMs.

A FIM supports 4 or 8 H1 links, with 16 devices per
link.
An Experion Server can support up to 12000
FieldBus devices!
88
44
4/13/2012
Honeywell
C300 Topology Rules PGM Connection and Capacity
It is not necessary to connect a PGM to the same

CF9 as the C300 (but is a good practice)
A C300 can support 2 PGMs.
A PGM supports two ProfiBus links
Each ProfiBus Link supports up to 124 devices
Each device supports up to 16 I/O modules
IOUs consumed by a PGM must be calculated
(# Digital IO Points / 384) + (# Analog IO Points / 24)
4/13/2012
89
Honeywell
Question 1: IO Topology Rules
Which of the following statements is not true for Series C IO Topology
Rules?
A) Series C, PM and Series C A IO on the same
IO Link
B) Series C and PM IO cannot be on the same IO Link
C) FTEB connected chassis can allow connections to
only 1 C300 controller
D) Each FTEB used to connect Series A IO can support
up to 16 IOUs
Incorrect. Series C, PM and Series A IO on the same
Correct! Series C, PM and Series A IO on the same IOLINK
IOLINK is not true for a Series C IO Topology. An IOLINK
is not true for a Series C IO Topology. An IOLINK cannot
cannot support both Series C IO and PMIO on the same
support
both
Seriesis:C IO and PMIO on the same link. An
Your
The
correct
answer:
answer
link.
An FTEB
connected to the same Control Firewall as
FTEB
connected
to the
same
Control
Firewall as the C300
You
must
answer
the
question
before
the
C300
can
publish
Series
A IO data to the
You
Incorrect
Correct
did
You
notcontroller
-answer
answered
-can
Click
Click
anywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
toA
continue
continue
completely
controller
publish
Series
IO data to the C300.
continuing
C300.
Submit
Clear
90
45
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 2: Topology Rules
A project is required to use Fieldbus only control strategy for 1500 FF
devices. How many C300 controllers are required?
A) 2 C300 Controllers + 24 FIM Modules
B) 1 C300 Controller + 48 FIM Modules
C) No C300 Controllers are required, only 24 Series C
FIM Modules
Yes!
No.
The
The correct
correct
statement
is
is "No
"No C300
C300 controllers
controllers are
are
The
Your
correct
answer:
answerstatement
is:
required, only 24 Series C FIM Modules". Since the
project requires only Fieldbus control strategy the C300
You must
answer
the question
controller
is not
required.
Each FIMbefore
Module has 4 FF links
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
and each link continuing
supports 16 FF devices. Hence 1 FIM
module can support a maximum of 64 (16*4) FF devices.
Hence only 24 (1500/64) Series C FIM Modules are
required.
Submit
Clear
4/13/2012
91
Honeywell
Question 3: Topology Rules
FTEBs can be used in the Series C topology under specific scenarios.
Which of these configurations is valid?
A) FTEB connected to AB PLC via Downlink CNI
B) FTEBs must be connected to the same Control
Firewall as the C300
C) An FTEB connected chassis can allow connections
to only 1 C300 controller
D) All of the above
Yourcorrect
The
answer:
answer is:
Correct!
Incorrect.
All All
of of
thethe
above
above
statements
statements
areare
correct
correct
for
You
must
answer
the
question
before
for
FTEBs
FTEBs
used
used
in
in
the
the
Series
Series
C
C
topology.
topology.
YouIncorrect
Correct
did
You
not
-answer
answered
-Click
Click
anywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Submit
Clear
92
46
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Summary
There are 2 IO LINKS per C300
A C300 can support a maximum of 64 IO Units (IOU).
A C300 can support up to 7 FTEBs
A Series C FIM can be used with or without the C300.
Mix and match of Series C I/O and PMIO is an option

Same IO LINK cannot support both Series C and PM IO
Each IO Link can support a maximum of 40 IOUs

Each FTEB used to connect Series A IO can support up to 16 IOUs
FTEBs must be connected to the same Control Firewall as the C300
FTEBs interface with Series A I/O or AB PLC interface
FTEBs cannot be in a redundant configuration
A C300 can support 15 FIMs.

An Experion Server can support up to 125 FIMs.
A C300 can support 2 PGMs.
4/13/2012
93
Honeywell
Conclusion
Describe the I/O Topology Rules for the Series C System
Completion
Certificate
Proceed to the next lesson in your course material

94
47
4/13/2012
This page was intentionally left blank.

HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Topic: C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Contents
Verify Series C Hardware Connections .................................................................................................3
4/13/2012


4/13/2012


Introduction
The following Lab will allow you to become more familiar with the Series C Hardware.
4/13/2012


Practice
Performance Review for C300 Cabinet
Please check off each item as you complete the task.

Your course manager may wish to observe you while you perform these tasks.
LEARN BY DOING
Step
Action
Go to the C300 cabinet, and locate the following items.
Locate the CF9 in the Cabinet.
Is uplink LED is blinking?
How many cables are connected to ports on the CF9?
How many LEDs are blinking on the CF9?
Locate the C300 Controller Module.
Locate the FTE Device Index rotary switches on C300 IOTA.
What is the Device Index set on rotary switches?
Is an IOLINK cable connected to the C300 IOTA?
10
On the CF9 IOTA, identify the Yellow & Green uplink cables.
11
On the C300 IOTA, identify the cables which are connected to the CF9.
12
Locate the reset power solder pads on the C300 IOTA.
13
Locate the FTE A and FTE B status LEDs on the C300 module.
14
Is the C300 module status LED steady or blinking?
15
If the status LED is blinking, why is it blinking?
16
Identify the Power supply + and - cable on the bus bar.
17
Locate the address jumpers for the IO modules.
18
What is the IOM number on the Analog input module?
19
What is the IOM number on Digital input module?
20
What is the IOM number on Digital output module?
21
What is the IOM number on Analog output module?

4/13/2012

4/30/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
In this lesson you will learn about the
purpose and use of the Control Builder
application.
At the conclusion of this lesson, you will
be able to:
Open and navigate Control Builder
Identify the toolbar icons and functionality
Explain the purpose of the tabs in the
tree windows
Describe the load functions available
from the Control Builder Project and
Monitoring tabs

4/30/2012
Honeywell
Topics
Starting Control Builder

Control Builder Functions
Control Builder Load Function

4/30/2012
Honeywell
Start Control Builder
Click to open
Configuration Studio

4/30/2012
Honeywell
Start Control Builder, contd.
Select the server.

Then, select the Connect button.
General rule:
Select the System.
Here we are selecting
the server.
Honeywell
User accounts

4/30/2012
Configuration Studio login is not required for integrated accounts or Users added
to Experion Install time groups
Windows user is part of

Experion groups
Windows user
created for
Windows login
Experion Install time groups include following
Product Administrators
Local Engineers
Local Supervisors
Local Operators
Local Ack View Only Users
Local View Only Users

4/30/2012
Honeywell
A logon window will appear only

when you have logged on to
Windows as a user who is not a
member of a pre-defined
Experion group
Change to
User Name: mngr

Password: mngr1
Domain: <Traditional Operator Security>
Careful, this user & password
may not work at your site.
In fact, you may not be required
to enter user name & password.
Click

4/30/2012
Honeywell
Select Control
Strategy
Select Configure Process
Control Strategies
Access level
This information is displayed
only if you connected to the
Server, not the System.
User name
Server name

4/30/2012
Honeywell
Topics

4/30/2012
Honeywell
Control Builder Toolbar
Not all toolbar icons will be available

until you open Control Builder items.
10

4/30/2012
Honeywell
Control Builder Toolbar, contd.
1 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
3 4 5
6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Open Tree Window

Close active Control Drawing
or Tree Window
Move to the Left
Move to the Right
Save the active Control Drawing
Delete the selected object
Copy selection and place on
clipboard
Paste clipboard contents
Print selected pages of active
document
Display program information
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
This is a good reference page,

you may want to flag it.
Display help information

Point Selection Command
Create a wire for connecting function
blocks
Create a Parameter Connector
Assign Modules to a Control
Execution Environment (CEE)
Module Containment
Load selected items
Upload selected items
Substitute Names
QVCS Manager
Toggle single item state
SCM Navigation
Fieldbus DD import
View error log
Change scale dimensions
25

4/30/2012
11
Control Builder Status Line
Honeywell
Security level
Experion PKS server name

currently running as primary
Primary when connected to ServerB
Backup when connected to ServerA
(should always be Primary)
Shows Sync when ERDBs on

ServerA and ServerB are
synchronized
12

4/30/2012
Honeywell
Control Builder System Preferences
To establish IP addresses using the Embedded FTE tab on System

Preferences dialog:
Click on the Tools System Preferences option to open Embedded
FTE Tab.
Click the Edit network parameters check

box to make address fields available for
editing.
13
Control Builder System Preferences

4/30/2012
Honeywell
Type applicable base address. Setting the Base IP

Address prompts a suggested Subnet Mask address.
Type applicable Subnet Mask address. An invalid

Subnet Mask address displays an error message.
Type applicable Default Gateway address.
Provide the procedure for establishing the NTP time

sources for the C300 and the Series C FIM. The FTE
Bridge Module does not use NTP.
Click OK, warning will be displayed that restart remote

Control builder session.
14

4/30/2012
Honeywell
Control Builder Tree Windows

1 2 3
1. Clicking the Open Tree button will open a tree

window. Clicking the button again will open a
second tree window.
2. Clicking the Close button will close the selected
window.
3. Clicking the Open Library button will

open the Library window
15

4/30/2012
Honeywell
Control Builder Tree Windows

Tabs appear at the bottom of each tree window.
16

4/30/2012
Honeywell
Control Builder Tabs
The Project Tab displays the CPM, IOMs, CMs and SCMs in the current
project.
The Project Tab is linked directly to the ERDB in the Experion Server.
17

4/30/2012
Honeywell
Control Builder Tabs, contd.

The Monitoring Tab:
Displays all objects loaded to the control
processor module (CPM)
Permits active modules to be viewed and
controlled during process operations
18

4/30/2012
Honeywell
Control Builder Monitoring Tab

To disable the online viewing of control
modules in the monitoring tab click:
Chart > Disable Chart Monitoring
The Control Module (CM) window must
be open to make the change
Selection are made per Control Module

Disabling Chart Monitoring only lasts as
long as the CM window is open
The next time the CM window is opened,
it will be re-enabled
Generally, Chart Monitoring should be

Enabled
When disabled, values shown on the
Monitoring Tab are from the ERDB (last
downloaded), not from the controller
19

4/30/2012
Honeywell
Control Builder Tabs
The Library Tab displays all available system function blocks grouped
into type categories.
20
10

4/30/2012
Honeywell
Question 1: Control Builder Functions

Control Builder is :
A) An online documentation tool for C200
controllers and Experion PKS servers
B) A tool used only for building graphics
C) A graphical tool used to design control
strategies for C200, C300, ACE and SCE
to save run time data
D) A graphical tool used to view plant graphics
Correct!
Incorrect.
Control
Control
builder
builder
is a isgraphical
a graphical
tooltool
used
Your
The
correct
answer:
answer
is:
to design
used tocontrol
designstrategies
control strategies
for C200,
for
C300,
C200,
ACE
C300,
and
ACE
SCE
and
and
SCE
save
and
run
save
time
run
data.
time
data.
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Submit
21
Clear

4/30/2012
Honeywell
Topics
22
11

4/30/2012
Honeywell
Controller
23

4/30/2012
Honeywell
Control Builder Load Function, contd.

Project / Monitor Tabs
Update
Server
RTDB
Checkpoint
File
Monitor
Tab
Project
Tab
Load
Windows
Upload
Load (reload)
Checkpoint
Restore from
Checkpoint
Control
Controller
Processor
24
12

4/30/2012
Honeywell
Question 2: Load Operation
During the load operation from the Control Builder project tab, control
strategies are downloaded:
A) Only to the C200 controller
B) To C200 memory, the monitor
tab and the server real time database
C) Only to the server real time database
D) Only to the C200 memory and monitor tab
The correct
Your
answer:
answer is:
Correct!
Incorrect.
During
During
the load
the
operation
operation
fromfrom
Control
Control
Builder
You must
answer
the load
question
before
You
Incorrect
Correct
did tab,
You
not
-answer
answered
-Click
Click
anywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
to
continue
continue
completely
project
Builder
project
control
tab,
strategies
control
strategies
are
downloaded
are downloaded
to C200
continuing
tomemory,
C200 memory,
the monitor
the monitor
tab andtab
theand
server
the server
real time
real
time
database.
database.
Submit
25
Clear

4/30/2012
Honeywell
Summary
Control Builder:
a graphical, object-oriented configuration environment in Configuration

IsStudio
used to design, implement and document control applications.
toolbar icons that become available when specific Control Builder items
Has
are opened.
Has tree window tabs to help you design control applications.
The Project tab displays the CPM, IOMs, CMs and SCMs in the current
project.
The Monitoring tab displays all objects that have been loaded to the
control processor module (CPM) and permits active modules to be
viewed and controlled during process.
The Library tab displays all available system CMs and function blocks
grouped into type categories that can be used to build control strategies.
Control strategies download to C200, C200E, C300 memory, the monitor tab
and
the server real time database.
26
13

4/30/2012
Honeywell
Conclusion
Completion
Certificate

27

4/30/2012
Honeywell
28
14

4/30/2012
29

4/30/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
In this lesson you will learn the purpose and use of the compare
parameters functions in Control Builder.
you will know how to:
Compare system parameters
30
15

4/30/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
The Compare Parameters Function:
Allows you to compare the parameters on function blocks in your ERDB with
parameters on the same function blocks loaded on your controller.
31

4/30/2012
Honeywell
Topics
Comparing System Parameters
32
16

4/30/2012
Honeywell
Using Compare Parameters
Tools > System Preferences
33

4/30/2012
Honeywell
Compare Parameters
CM_FV101RC loading from Project tab
Uncheck if PVHIALM is to remain at 87 -- be sure to perform an

Upload to Monitoring and an Update to Project!
This dialog box is displayed

at the time the download
operation is requested.
34
17

4/30/2012
Honeywell
Question 1: Comparing Parameters

When the Compare Parameters function is active:
A) The Compare Parameters checkbox in the
Tools > System Preferences window is checked
B) Control Builder will inform you of any parameter
discrepancies between the control module you are
loading and the control module which resides on the
controller
C) Control Builder will give you the option to keep
certain parameter values on the controller or
overwrite them with new values
D) All of the above
The correct
Your
answer:
answer is:
Yes!
No.You
All
Allmust
these
theseanswer
statements
statements
are
are correct
correct
when
when the
the
the question
before
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
Compare Parameters
function is active.
continuing
Submit
35
Clear

4/30/2012
Honeywell
Summary
The Compare Parameters function in Control Builder:
parameters from function blocks in your ERDB with parameters

Compares
from function blocks in your controller, giving you the opportunity to keep or
write over existing values.
36
18

4/30/2012
Honeywell
Conclusion
Identify Functionality of Compare Parameters
Completion
Certificate

37

4/30/2012
Honeywell
38
19

4/30/2012
39

4/30/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
In this section we will learn about Control Builder search enhancements

introduced in Experion R400
At the end of this module you will be able to perform the functions such
as
Navigation from hyperlinks
Search, Sort and Filter Tags
Search function blocks in chart
40
20

4/30/2012
Honeywell
Control Builder Navigation
Right-click a wire connector to locate the source and destination blocks

Locate From Param option source block
Locate to Param option destination block
Navigation is available for connecting wires and not for block pins
Destination
Block.Parameter will
be highlighted
Source
Block.Parameter
will be highlighted
Hover mouse over wire

connector to view tooltip
indicating source and
destination blocks
41

4/30/2012
Honeywell
Navigate to Block in Chart
Double-click block in
tree view
Right-click block in
tree view and select
Locate in Chart
42
21

4/30/2012
Honeywell
Navigation Using Hyperlinks

Parameter Connector
Cross Reference
SCM step output or condition
OR
Right
Click
43

4/30/2012
Honeywell
Selecting Hyperlink Color

The following parameters will be
displayed as hyperlinks
Hyperlink color set in

User Preferences will
override System
Preferences
Parameter connectors, Crossreferences, SCM expressions
User Preferences are tied

to the Windows logon.
Config Studio logon and
Signon Mgr logon do not
make any difference.
The hyperlink color can be

configured from System
Preferences or User Preferences
System Preferences
are copied to User
Preferences when a
new Windows user logs
on.
44
22

4/30/2012
Honeywell
Hyperlink Color
Project Mode
Configured hyperlink
text color displayed in
Project mode
Monitoring Mode
Hyperlinks displayed
in normal text color
in Monitoring mode
45

4/30/2012
Honeywell
Navigation Scenarios
Target Parameter
Chart Navigates to
In same SCM handler
Corresponding Block/Parameter is selected
In different handler within

same SCM
SCM Handler shall be invoked and corresponding block /

parameter is selected
In different SCM
Chart for the particular SCM is opened and corresponding

block / parameter is selected
In CM
Chart is opened for the CM and corresponding block /

parameter is selected
Directly belongs to a CM
Chart of the tagged module is opened
Alias in the same SCM
Configuration form is opened with the Alias tab active
DATA block parameter
DATA blocks properties is opened with the Formula

Parameters/Report Parameters tab active
Tagged block which does not

have a chart
Configuration form shall be opened for the tagged block.
Block which does not exist
Tag name is displayed as ??? and no hyperlink shall be

displayed
46
23

4/30/2012
Honeywell
Special Navigation Scenarios

Target Parameter
Chart Navigates to
OPC parameter
Configuration form of the OPC gateway shall be opened
Projected parameter
Configuration form for the CM/SCM/RCM shall be

opened with the Projected parameters tab select
Substitute Block
Substitute Name List popup shall be opened with the

Substitute Blocks tab active
Substitute Parameter
Substitute Name List popup shall be opened with the

Substitute Parameters tab active
47

4/30/2012
Honeywell
Search Tags Toolbar
Experion R400 provides a search toolbar to search for tags in Control

Builder
Project Window
Monitoring Window
Chart View
48
24

4/30/2012
Honeywell
Find Block in Chart
Enter the block name in the chart toolbar and click search option
Block will appear selected in chart
Block Names only.

Wildcards not allowed.
49

4/30/2012
Honeywell
Navigating Between Chart Pages
Select to close
the chart toolbar
Enter the page number

and press <Enter> key
or
button
Right-click chart empty

space and select Display
Search Bar
Page will be
visible in chart
view
50
25

4/30/2012
Honeywell
Navigating Between Chart Pages

Icon
Function
Navigate to the first page
Navigate to the previous page
Navigate to the next page
Navigate to the last page
51
Search Tags Toolbar Project, Monitoring Tab

4/30/2012
Honeywell
Search tags in Project tab
Select name of required strategy

Press Enter key or click and the
corresponding chart is opened
If user enters a tag name which

does not exist in the database,
an error message is displayed
If user enters a tag name that does

not have a chart
Enter initial
tag name
Configuration form is opened

Example, search for a controller in
Project mode, controller
configuration form is opened
52
26

4/30/2012
Honeywell
Control Builder List View
List View available in Control Builder to search, sort and filter tags
List View can be opened from both Project and Monitoring modes
Cells are not editable in List View
Filter row text is editable, for filtering text to be entered
List View can be filtered for to view details of a particular tag
53

4/30/2012
Honeywell
Open List View

Select the Project tree/Monitoring tree
Select View List View
List View will open for Project/Monitoring
mode depending on selected tree view
OR
Right-click empty space in tree view and

select List View
Button to open
List View
54
27

4/30/2012
Honeywell
Default Columns in List View
Default columns available in both Project and Monitoring List View
Columns
Description
Name
The name of the tag will be represented with an icon
Type
Represents type of module for example FTE ,CPM,CPM200s,IOLIMS,CEE,CM etc
Parent
Gives name of the parent block

Represents state of the block for example initial, loaded, changed (Project mode) or
active, inactive, error, database invalid (Monitoring mode)
State
Description
Gives description of the block
Parent Asset
Gives description of the parent asset associated with the block

Gives description of the date and time the last modification was made to the block's
configuration
Date Last Modified
55
List View Toolbar Assignment Parent, Column Organizer

4/30/2012
Honeywell
Used for navigation to

different controllers
Used to organize
the columns
Parent Item Name
Description
All Tags
Displays all strategies in the database. For example

controllers, CEEs, IOLINKs, CMs, SCM, RCM,
UCM, etc
Root
Displays elements directly below the root. For

example controllers, interface modules, unassigned
Controller
Displays all tagged blocks under the controller
Unassigned
Displays tagged blocks which are not assigned to

any particular controller
56
28

4/30/2012
Honeywell
List View Toolbar Buttons
Functions
Clear Filters
Copy Selected
Rows
Refresh
Icons
Description
Clears all filters applied on the individual columns in List view
Copies selected rows along with the currently displayed parameters
Updates List View contents with the latest changes
Opens the previously saved filters from any particular location
Save Filters
Used to save the filter to an particular location
Open Filters
Change Context
Last Update
User can switch from Project mode to monitoring mode or vice versa
Displays the date & time when the contents of the List view were last updated
57

4/30/2012
Honeywell
Summary
Hyperlinks are used to navigate to respective Control Strategies
List View is available in Control Builder to sort, Search and filter tags
Search Toolbar is added to search for tags in Control Builder
58
29

4/30/2012
Honeywell
Conclusion
Completion
Certificate

59

4/30/2012
Honeywell
60
30

4/30/2012
61

4/30/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
In this lesson you will learn to locate
information about Control Builder
components in Knowledge Builder.
At the conclusion of this lesson, you will
know how to:
Find function block information and
theory in Knowledge Builder
Find parameter information in
Knowledge Builder
62
31

4/30/2012
Honeywell
Knowledge Builder Location
63
Function Blocks in Knowledge Builder

4/30/2012
Honeywell
Experion R400 > Reference > Control Builder Components Theory >
Regulatory Control > Regulatory Control Blocks
64
32

4/30/2012
Honeywell
PID Block Theory
Experion PKS R400 > Reference > Control Builder Components Theory >
Regulatory Control > PID Block
PID
Theory
65

4/30/2012
Honeywell
Parameter Reference
Experion PKS R400 > Reference > Control Builder Parameter Reference
66
33

4/30/2012
Question 1: Knowledge Builder Parameter Information
Honeywell
Where can you find information in Knowledge Builder for the CVEUHI
parameter on a PID function block?
A) Experion PKS> Reference> Control Builder
Components Reference> CXXXX Parameters
B) Experion PKS> Reference> Control Builder
Components Theory> CXXXX Parameters
C) Experion PKS> Reference> Control Builder
Parameter Reference> CXXXX Parameters
D) None of the above
No.
The correct
path
to find information for the CVEUHI
The
Your
correct
answer:
answerpath
is: to
Yes!
No.
The
The correct
correct
path
to find
find information
information for
for the
the CVEUHI
CVEUHI
parameter
onanswer
a PIDA the
function
block
in Knowledge Builder is
You must
question
before
parameter
a
PIDA
function
block
in Knowledge Builder is
YouExperion
Incorrect
Correct
did You
noton
-answer
answered
-Click
Click
anywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
to
continue
continue
completely
PKS>
Reference>
Control
Builder
Parameter
Experion PKS>continuing
Reference> Control Builder Parameter
Reference> CXXXX Parameters
Reference> CXXXX Parameters
Submit
67
Clear

4/30/2012
Honeywell
Summary
Read Knowledge Builder to learn about the components youll use to

create control modules including:
Function block information and theory
(Experion PKS R400 > Reference > Control Builder Components Theory >
Regulatory Control)
Parameter information
(Experion
PKS R400 > Reference > Control Builder Parameter Reference)
68
34

4/30/2012
Honeywell
Conclusion
Describe How to Locate CB Information in KB
Completion
Certificate

69

4/30/2012
Honeywell
70
35

4/30/2012

Topic: Control Builder Introduction

Contents
Open and Operate Control Builder ........................................................................................................3
4/30/2012


4/30/2012


Practice
The Purpose of this lesson is to demonstrate opening and operating Control Builder. After you
complete this lesson you will be able to:
Identify the tabs used to make structural changes to an existing Control Module.
Identify the tabs used to change parameters online.
An Experion PKS Server
The server name for your system (E20ESV##_Server), where the ## symbols represent your
team number; will be supplied by your instructor.
Introduction
Control Builder is one of the Experion PKS Engineering Tools.
Controllers can connect to a Server over FTE or over ControlNet.
Control Builder can run on the Server or an Engineering Workstation. If controllers are
connected to the server over FTE, then a maximum of 12 Control Builder clients can
connect to a single Experion server. If controllers are connected to the server over
ControlNet, then a maximum of 4 Control Builder clients can connect to a single Experion
server.
The devices, as well as control strategies, are created in Control Builder and downloaded to
the C200 Controller, C200E Controller, C300 Controller or ACE and the Experion PKS
Server.
Configuration Studio is required to launch Control Builder.
In this course you will use the Manager (mngr) account to log into configuration studio.
The user name entered when logging on to Configuration Studio determines the access level
of the user in Control Builder.
View Only VIEW only
Ack Only View and alarm acknowledgement
OPER & SUPV Allow Operations
ENGR & MNGR Allow Configurations
The Experion PKS Operator profile can use a Windows account ID and password
(Integrated Accounts).
4/30/2012

Prerequisites

On a system with only one EPKS server, the Configuration Studio Connect window will
show both a System and a Server. Connecting to the System allows access to Enterprise
wide configuration, while connecting to the Server only allows access to server specific
configuration. Generally, it is best to connect to the system rather than the server.
Identify the System and Server from the icon, as shown below. The server is also
categorized as Experion PKS Server in the Type column of the Connect window.
System/Server
Icon
Purpose
System
Use Configuration Studio to connect to a

system to access the Enterprise Model
Database.
Server
Use Configuration Studio to connect to a

specific server.

4/30/2012

Step
Click Start > All Programs > Honeywell Experion PKS> Configuration Studio.
Action
4/30/2012


Step
2
Action
In the Connect window, from the Local Targets tab, select your Experion Server
(E20ESV##_Server).
(Note your server list may appear different than the one shown below)
ATTENTION
The display, as seen above might, be different on your
screen.
For the class, the Server Name is E20ESV##_Server,
where ## is the Student number.
Verify that the server name shown in the property
panel (in gray) is the same as the server name
selected in the list above.

4/30/2012

Step
3
Action
Click Connect.
4
ATTENTION
Depending on the credentials used to logon to
Windows, it may not be necessary to provide
additional credentials (as shown) here.
In the Logon to window, enter the following information:
User name: mngr
Password: mngr1
Domain: <Traditional Operator Security>
4/30/2012
Click OK.


Step
Action
In the Configuration Explorer tab, in the left-side pane, expand your server (click the
+ symbol next to the E20ESV##_Server ServerName), to expand the corresponding
tree.
ATTENTION
For the class, the Server Name is E20ESV##_Server,
where ## is the Student number.
Select Control Strategy.

4/30/2012

Step
Select Configure process control strategies.
Action
ATTENTION
The Control Builder application window will open.
4/30/2012


Step
9
Action
In the Control Builder application window, you will see a screen, as illustrated below:
Toolbar
Tree window
Your access level appears in the lower right corner as shown.
ATTENTION
The status line at the bottom of the Control Builder
application indicates:
1. Sync if the ERDBs are synchronized (only on
redundant servers. The example above is a
non-redundant server).
2. The ERDB to which Control Builder is
connected. This should always be Primary
which indicates that Control Builder is
connected to the B server (the primary ERDB
is always on the B server).
3. The Experion Server to which Control Builder
is connected.
4. The access level of the user.
10

4/30/2012

Step
10
Action
The toolbar gives you a graphical interface for accessing the different tools available in
Control Builder. Some of the tools can also be found in the dropdown menus.
The details of the toolbar are as follows:
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
27
1 Open Tree. Open Tree Window

2 Close. Closes the Tree Window that has focus in Control Builder
3 Open Library
4 Move to the Left
5 Move to the Right

6 Save. Saves the active Control Drawing
7 Delete. Deletes the selected Object
8 Copy. Copies the selection and places on the clipboard
9 Paste. Pastes the item from clipboard contents
10 Print. Prints the selected pages of active document
11 Displays Program information
12 Displays Help information
13 Point Selection Command
14 Wire Connector
15 Parameter Connector
16 Assign Module to Execution Environment
17 Module Containment
18 Load Parameters
19 Upload Parameters
20 Substitute Names
21 QVCS (Qualification and Version Control System)
22 Toggle single item state
23 SCM Navigation
24 Field Device Description Unit
25 Wireless Device Description Unit
26 View Error Log
27 Change Scale
4/30/2012

11

Using Tree Windows
Step
1
Action
If the tree windows are open, close them by clicking on the
corner of each window.
button on the right upper
ATTENTION
You can also close the Tree Windows by selecting the
tree window and then clicking the
toolbar.
12
button from the

4/30/2012

Step
Action
Select View > Project/Monitor Tree to open the first Project/Monitor tree view on the left
side of your screen. Repeat the same procedure to open a second Project/Monitor tree
view on the right hand side of the screen.
You can open a maximum of two Project/Monitor tree views at a time.
ATTENTION
Another way to open the Project/Monitor Tree Window
is to click the
button on the toolbar.
Select View > Library Tree to open the Library Tree Window. You can open only one
Library Tree View.
ATTENTION
Another way to open the Library Tree window is by
clicking the
4/30/2012
button from the toolbar

13

14
Step
Action
Click and Drag the divider bar to the right to increase the size of the Project-Assignment
window.

4/30/2012

Step
5
Action
There are 2 tabs in each Project/Monitor tree window: Project and Monitoring. Click
each tab to toggle between them.
Project Tab
The following tasks are performed in the Project tab:
4/30/2012
Create new CMs, SCMs and IOMs and define their parameters.
Design a Control Strategy through CMs and SCMs.
Save the Control Strategy.
Assign CMs and SCMs to the CEE (Control Execution Environment).
Load CMs and SCMs to the CPM (Control Processing Module).

15

Step
6
Action
Monitoring Tab
The following tasks are performed in the Monitoring tab:
16
Open CMs and SCMs for Online Monitoring.
Activate/Deactivate CMs and SCMs.
Change controller parameters and upload the changes.
Update changes to the Project database.
Change monitoring/configuration parameters on the faceplate of CM blocks.

4/30/2012

Step
7
Action
Monitoring Tab Color Codes for C200/C200E:
1
2 3 4
6 7
1. Project Tree (gray)

2. Loaded, not monitoring (gray with black arrow)
3. Communication failure (red with black exclamation point)
4. Active (green)
5. Failed (red with white exclamation point)
6. Loaded, but no database (yellow with black exclamation point)
7. Idle / Inactive (blue)

ATTENTION
Refer to Knowledge Builder for more information on
color codes:
Experion R400 > Configuration > Control Building
Users Guide > Creating a Control module >
Control Builder block icon descriptions
Monitoring Tab Color Codes for C300:
1. Project Tree (gray)

2. No Communication (red)
3. No Database (Yellow)
4. Run or OK (Green with dotted border)
5. Idle (blue)
6. Run soft fail or Ok soft fail (green with cross mark)
7. Idle soft fail (blue with cross mark)
ATTENTION
Refer to Knowledge Builder for more information on color codes:
Experion R400 > Configuration > C300 Controller Users Guide
>C300 Controller Operation > Control Builder block icon
descriptions
4/30/2012

17

Step
9
Action
The Library Tree window has just a single tab named Library.
Library Tab
18
Lists devices, IOMs, PM I/O, Rail I/O, and Function Blocks.
Click the + icon against an item in the Library Window to expand and view the
blocks.
Drag the blocks into a CM or SCM as appropriate, to form a control strategy.

4/30/2012
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
In this lesson you will learn to configure C200/C200E hardware and I/O
using Control Builder.
Identify C200/C200E hardware, slot numbers and addressing
Configure and download hardware configurations for these components
4/13/2012
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E

Hardware and I/O
Honeywell
Topics
Hardware and Slot Numbers
Configuring the FTEB, Controller, and CEE
Configuring IOMs
Loading the Controller, CEE, and IOMs
Activating a CEE
4/13/2012
Honeywell
C200/C200E Chassis Hardware

Below is an example C200/C200E chassis configured with:
1
2
3
4
10-slot chassis
5
6
7
8
Power supply
ControlNet Interface (CNI)
or FTE Bridge
Control Processor (C200/C200E)
IO Link Interface Module

Fieldbus Interface Module
Redundancy Module
CNI to Remote I/O
4/13/2012
Honeywell
C200/C200E I/O Slot Numbers
To determine the slot location of C200/C200E related hardware you

must:
Start counting at zero (do not count the power supply)
Count from left to right
Count both spaces if the module occupies two spaces
5
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
Configuring IOMs
Activating a CEE
4/13/2012
Power Supply
Fault Tolerant Ethernet Bridge (FTEB)
Honeywell
Single-wide chassis module

Connects to FTE cable A and B
Supports chassis redundancy
Can only be used for Supervisory
Control Network connection
ControlNet and downlink CNIs
required for all I/O communications
including peer-to-peer to AB devices
Rotary switch for FTE Node Number (1 to 99)
The last octet of the IP address of the FTEB can be set to higher than 99 by
configuring the Base IP address accordingly in System Preferences.
4/13/2012
Fault Tolerant Ethernet Bridge (FTEB), contd.
Honeywell
The FTEB can be used for FIM-only connections to the supervisory

network.
In the Project and Monitoring tabs in Control Builder you will see the
FTEB as the root for the CPM.
You will set up the FTEB using IP addresses.
An FTE community can only have 99 FTEBs so you are limited to 49
redundant pairs and 99 single FTEBs in one community.
The FTE connection to the FTEB is 10Mbps.
10Mbps is only supported in FTE for connection from an FTEB to a switch
and nowhere else
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Configuring a FTEB
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 1: FTEB Index Numbering

Which of the following is not a valid FTEB device index number?
A) 15
B) 99
C) 110
D) 1
TheIncorrect.
Your
correct
answer:
answer
is:
Correct.
110'
110'isis
not
notaavalid
validFTEB
FTEBindex
index
number.
The answer
last octet
the FTEBbefore
IP address
You must
theofquestion
You
Incorrect
Correct
did
You
not
answer
answered
Click
Click
anywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
to
continue
continue
completely
can be set to higher
than 99 by configuring the
continuing
base IP address accordingly in System
Preferences in Control Builder.
Submit
Clear
10
4/13/2012
Must match the hardware switches

found on top of the FTEB card.
Honeywell
Configuring a C200
Follow these steps to add a

new control processor
module (CPM) from the pulldown menus.
4/13/2012
11
Honeywell
Configuring a C200 CPM Main Tab ControlNet

Data entry details
will be provided in
the lab exercise
Tag Name & Item Name

ControlNet
Driver Name
CNI slot #
Slot number of CPM
MAC ID of CNI Card

connected to server
Alarm reporting by CEE
Check for the redundant controller and

then enter its name.
12
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Configuring a C200 CPM Main Tab Ethernet

Data entry details
will be provided in
the lab exercise
Ethernet Network
Driver Name
Slot Number
The This Controller is Redundant

option is selected when building the
FTEB
Redundant Controller &

Name
4/13/2012
13
Configuring a C200 Server History Tab
Honeywell
History parameters and control level required to operate this CPM
14
4/13/2012
When the Driver Name

selected is an FTEB:
Honeywell
Configuring a C200 Group and Trend Assignment
Point, group, trend and associated

displays (that reside on the server) are
defined on the Server Displays tab.
Select OK to close and save the new

controller.
4/13/2012
15
Honeywell
Question 2: Supervisory MAC Address for a CPM

When configuring a ControlNet connected
control processor module (CPM) in Control
Builder, which MAC address is entered as
the Supervisory MAC address?
A) The device index of FTEB card
B) The MAC address of the PCIC card
C) The MAC address of CNI card
connected to the I/O rack
D) The MAC address of CNI card
connected to server
Yourcorrect
The
answer:
answer is:
You must
answer
the question
beforeisisthe
Incorrect.
Correct!
The
The
Supervisory
Supervisory
MAC
MAC
address
theMAC
MAC
You
Incorrect
Correct
did You
not
-answer
answered
-Click
Click
anywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
toaddress
continue
continue
completely
continuing
address of the CNI
card connected to the server.
Submit
Clear
16
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Configuring a C200E
17
Honeywell
Configure C200E Main Tab
4/13/2012
18
4/13/2012
Follow the Step to configure

new C200E controller
C200E Configuration Simulation Tab
Honeywell
To create either a C200E or a SIM-C200E

File > New > Controllers > C200E Control Processor Module (16M)
Select the check box for

simulation Node Configuration
Select the check box , if the node

is connected to ControlNet
Network
4/13/2012
19
Initiating the Configuration of the CEE
Honeywell
The Control Processor Module (CPM) and its Control Execution

Environment (CEE) are configured but not yet downloaded.
Click the + sign to expand

the CPM in the Project tab.
Double-click the CEE to

open its configuration
form.
20
10
4/13/2012
CEE Main Tab Name, Base Execution Period
Honeywell
The Main tab configuration of the CEE block.
System assigned or user configured unique

name (consisting of up to 16 characters and
at least one letter A-Z)
4/13/2012
21
Main Tab C200 CEE Command State
Honeywell
The Main tab is used for the configuration of the CEEC200 block.
Select the command to change the
CEESTATE parameter; options are:
IDLE, COLDSTART, WARMSTART
Indicates the current state of the CEE
Select the user level required to

perform a coldstart or a warmstart
Select the user level required to

Idle the CEE
Determines whether program access is

allowed to command the CEE from Idle
to Run and from Run to Idle
22
11
4/13/2012
Indicates the base execution

period for the CEE block
- 5 ms (non-Redundant)
- 50 ms (non-Redundant or
Redundant)
Honeywell
Main Tab C200 Alarm Info
Indicates if an alarm has been

detected with this function block
Allows user to set the alarm reporting

function used when an alarm condition
is detected by the function block
4/13/2012
23
Main Tab C200E CEE Simulation, State, and Time Info
Honeywell
Select the CEE state after

a RAM retention restart
Options: Idle, LastCold,
LastWarm
Indicates Simulation State of

C200E controller in Monitoring
Shows the time zone offset value

for the controller location
Explained later
24
12
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Restart Initialization Delay
Integer configuration value establishes an initialization delay, in

seconds, to be applied to all CMs within the CEE following a restart
RSTRTINIDLY allows CMs within CEE to come into alignment with the
process following a RAM Retention Restart or a Checkpoint Restore
Default value is 10 seconds
When CEE restart occurs, CEE.RSTRTINIDLY and CM.RELOADINIDLY are
used to compute starting value of CM.CURRELINIDLY as follows
CM.CURRELINIDLY = CM.RELOADINIDLY + ( CEE.RSTRTINIDLY /
CM.PERIOD)
4/13/2012
25
Honeywell
Batch Tab
Applies to: C200, C200E, C300, ACE
Indicates the buffer size allocated for batch

events generated by SCM/RCM.
Options are:
None, Small, Medium, and Large
Small = 120 events

Medium = 240 events
Large = 720 events
This item can be

changed only from
the Project tab.
26
13
4/13/2012
Applies to: C200E, C300, ACE
Server History and Server Displays Tabs
Honeywell
Server History Tab -- Access Levels, History Configuration
27
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
Configuring IOMs

Activating a CEE
28
14
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Methods to Add Input/Output Modules (IOMs)

Three methods to add an IOM:
From the Library:
Drag and drop onto the CEE
Drag and drop onto a blank area
From the Menu:
File>New>I/O Modules>IOMODULE>
4/13/2012
29
Honeywell
Different Actions Based on Method Used

Method Used
Name New
Dialog?
Drop on CEE
Yes
No
Drop to Blank
Yes
Yes
Menu
No
Yes
Depending on the method

used to add the IOM, your
IOM may be automatically
assigned to your CEE, or it
may be put in Unassigned.

used to add the IOM, you
may or may not be presented
with this dialog box.
Put in
Unassigned?
30
15
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Configuring an IOM
Module slot number
MAC address of the remote

racks CNI card
0 if IOM is in CPM chassis
Double
Click
Slot number of the CNI in

the processor rack through
which this card will
communicate.
Zero if IOM is in CPM chassis
4/13/2012
31
Honeywell
Assigning IOMs
Required if the menu method
was used, or if the IOM was
dropped onto a blank area.
1b
3
1a
Assigned
to CEE
32
16
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 3: Configuring an IOM

Before loading an IOM, it must be:
A) Activated
B) Assigned
C) Renamed
D) Validated
Yourcorrect
The
answer:
answer is:
Incorrect.
Correct!
Before
you
you
can
can
load
load
IOMs,
they
theymust
mustbe
be
You
Incorrect
Correct
did You
notBefore
-answer
answered
-Click
Click
anywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
toIOMs,
continue
continue
completely
continuing
assigned to the Control Execution Environment.
Clear
33
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
Configuring IOMs
Activating a CEE
34
17
4/13/2012
Submit
Loading the Controller, CEE and IOMs
Honeywell
Right
Click
Not yet
loaded
Load:
C200 & CEE
Load with Contents:

C200 & CEE & IOMs
35
Loading the Controller, CEE and IOMs, contd.
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Verify that the

items to load are
checked.
Note:
You can decide to have the
modules go to the active state
automatically by clicking this
checkbox, with the Post Load State
selected, to be Active.
36
18
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
Configuring IOMs
4/13/2012
37
Honeywell
Activating a Control Strategy
Double-click CEE
This can be done only

from the monitoring
tab (not the Project tab).
Another method is to
right-click on the CEE
and select Change
State.
Select COLDSTART
or WARMSTART
38
19
4/13/2012
Activating a CEE
Honeywell
Activating a Control Strategy, contd.
Click Yes
Blue:
The object is not running (inactive)
Green:
Red:
The object is running (active)
Communication failure
4/13/2012
39
Honeywell
Summary
When configuring and loading C200/C200E hardware and I/O in Control Builder,
remember:
To determine the IOM slot number of hardware in the C200 chassis, start counting at
zero, but do not count the power supply, count from left to right and count both spaces
if the module occupies two spaces.
An FTEB Index number can not be set to higher than 99.
However, the last octet of the IP address can be higher than 99
The Supervisory MAC address of the CPM is the MAC address of the CNI card
connected to the server.
C200E has a separate Simulation Tab to configure a simulated C200E
Before loading the Control Processor Module (CPM), its Control Execution
Environment (CEE), and I/O modules (IOMs):
Configure the CPM, its CEE and I/O modules (IOMs)
Assign the IOMs to the CEE
40
20
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Conclusion
Describe the Configuration of C200 Hardware and I/O
Completion
Certificate
41
4/13/2012
Honeywell
42
21
4/13/2012


4/13/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
In this lesson you will learn to configure a C300 Controller and

Series C I/O.
PMIO configuration will be discussed in a separate lesson.
The steps for configuration are similar to the C200/C200E configuration:
Add a new Controller to the Project hierarchy
Control Builder adds the CEE and two IOLINK modules
Configure the Controller
Configure the CEE
Configure the IOLINKs (PMIO or Series C IO)
Configure the IOMs
Assign the IOMs to the IOLINKs
Load the Controller, CEE, IOLINKS, and the IOMs
Activate the CEE

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
Configuring the C300 and CEE

Configuring IOLINKs
Configuring IOMs
Loading the C300, IOLINKs, and IOMs
Activating the C300

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Configuring a Controller
Follow these steps to

add a new controller
from the pull-down
menus

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Configuring a Controller Main Tab

Data entry
details will be
provided in the
lab exercise.
Name
Check for
redundant controller
Device index
Number of C300
This number must
match the number of
the switches on the
C300 IOTA.
Select to
Configure a
SIM-C300
Enter details of Simulation

Environment Node

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Configuring a Controller Server History Tab
History parameters and control level required to operate this C300

4/13/2012
Configuring a Controller Group and Trend Assignment
Honeywell
Point, group, trend and associated

displays (residing on the server) are
defined on the Server Displays tab
Select OK to close and

save the new controller

4/13/2012
Honeywell
C300 View in Control Builder
C300, CEE, and

IOLINKs
Redundancy

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Configuring a CEE
For C300, the options for

Base Execution Period are:
50mS and 20mS
20mS is selected only
for the Turbo Machinery C300
Data entry details will

be provided in the Lab
exercise

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Main Tab C300 CEE RAM Retention

Main Tab Powerup Restart Settings
Shows the CEE state after

a RAM retention restart
Options: Idle, LastCold,
LastWarm, LastTimeout
Shows the power down timeout that indicates whether the

CEE block executes a warm or cold restart upon power up
Only used if LastTimeout was selected for the CEE State
Shows the time zone offset value

for the controller location
10

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 1: C300 Configuration
Which of the following statements is not true for C300 configuration?

A) Device Index number on the C300
IOTA needs to be specified
B) 2 IOLINKs are automatically created
C) Only one IOLINK is automatically created for
Series C I/O
D) 50ms Base Execution Period is supported for
non-redundant C300 configuration
The
answer is:
Yourcorrect
answer:
Incorrect.
falsethe
statement
"Only one
You mustThe
answer
questionisbefore
Incorrect
-Click
Click
anywhere
tocontinue
continue
You
did You
not
answer
answered
thisthis
question
correctly!
completely
Correct
-automatically
anywhere
to
Correct!
IOLINK
is
When
acontinuing
C300
controller
created
for
is created
Series C
in
Control
I/O".
I/O".When
When
Builder
aa C300
C300
2 IOLINKS
controller
controller
are is
automatically
is created
created in
in
added. are automatically
Control Builder 2 IOLINKS
added.
Submit
11
Clear

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
Configuring IOLINKs
Configuring IOMs
Activating the C300
12

4/13/2012
Honeywell
IOLINK Configuration Link 1
I/O family selection
I/O Link number 1 Cable - Gray
13

4/13/2012
Honeywell
IOLINK Configuration Link 2
I/O Link number 2 Cable - Violet
14

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Configuring C300 Hardware
The Control Processor Module (CPM) and its Control Execution

Environment (CEE) are now configured but not yet downloaded.
15

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 2: IOLINK Configuration
Which of the following items are specified during IOLINK configuration?

A) Series C or PM IO, one type on each IOLINK
B) Series A I/O type
C) Whether Series C and PM IO are to be used on
the same IOLINK
Yourcorrect
The
answer:
answer is:
Correct!
When
configuring
an
only
Incorrect.
When
configuring
anIOLINK
IOLINK
onlyone
one
You must
answer
the question
before
You
Incorrect
Correct
did
You
not
-answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
type of IO
family
can
becorrectly!
connected
to each
continuing
IOLINK i.e. Series C or PM IO, one type on each
link.
Submit
16
Clear

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
Configuring IOLINKs
Configuring IOMs
Activating the C300

4/13/2012
17
Honeywell
Methods to Add Input/Output Modules (IOMs)

Three methods to add an IOM:
From the Library:
Drag and drop onto an IOLINK
From the Menu:
File>New>I/O Modules>SERIES_C_IO
18

4/13/2012
Honeywell

Method Used
Name New
Dialog?
Put in
Unassigned?
Drop on IOLINK
Yes
No
Drop to Blank
Yes
Yes
Menu
No
Yes

used to add the IOM, your
IOM may be automatically
assigned to your IOLINK, or it

used to add the IOM, you
19

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Configuring an IOM
IOM number
Double
Click
This number must
match the number of
the jumper plug on
the IOTA
20
10

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Assigning IOMs
1b
3
1a
21

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
Configuring IOLINKs
Configuring IOMs
Activating the C300
22
11

4/13/2012
Assigned
to IOLink
Honeywell
Loading the Controller, CEE and IOMs

Click
Right-Click
Not yet
loaded
Load:
C300, CEE, IOLinks
Load with Contents:

C300, CEE, IOLinks, IOMs
23

4/13/2012
Loading the Controller, CEE and IOMs Post Load State
Honeywell
Verify that the items

to load are
checked.
Note:
You can decide to
have the modules go
to the run state
automatically by
clicking this checkbox
with the Post Load
State selected to be
Run.
24
12

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 3: IOP Configuration

Assigned Series C I/O modules appear under:
A) The Unassigned tree in Project tab
B) Their associated IOLINK tree in Project tab
C) Directly under the CEE tree in Project tab
The correct
Your
answer:answer is:
Correct! The assigned I/O modules appear
You must
answer
the question
before
Incorrect
-Click
Click
anywhere
to
continue
You
answered
correctly!
Incorrect.
assigned
I/O
modules
appear
Correct
-The
anywhere
continue
You
did
notthe
answer
thisthis
question
completely
under
IOLINK
tree
into
Project
tab.
continuing
under the IOLINK
tree in Project tab.
Submit
25

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
Configuring IOLINKs
Configuring IOMs
Loading the C300, IOLINKs and IOMs
Activating the C300
26
13

4/13/2012
Clear
Honeywell
Activating a Control Strategy
This can be done only

from the monitoring
tab (not the Project tab).
Another method is to
right-click on the CEE
and select Change
State.
Select WARMSTART
27

4/13/2012
Changing the State of a Controller Confirming Change
Honeywell
Click Yes
Blue: The object is not running (inactive)

Green: The object is running (active)
Red: Communication failure
28
14

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Summary
When you configure and load C300 hardware and I/O in Control Builder,
remember:
C IOM number is set on the IOTA of the corresponding IOM using a
Series
numbered jumper plug.
The device index of C300 can be found on the rotary switches located in
front of the C300 board.

Before loading the C300 controller, its Control Execution Environment (CEE)
and IOLINKs:
Configure the Controller, its CEE and IOLINKs
Define the I/O Family type on each IOLINK
Assign the IOMs to the respective IOLINKs
the C300 controller, its Control Execution Environment (CEE) and
Load
IOLINKs
Activate the C300 from the CEE.
29

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Conclusion
Completion
Certificate

30
15

4/13/2012

Describe the Import/Export Procedure in

Control Builder
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the Import/Export Procedure in Control Builder
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
In this lesson you will learn how to

import and export control strategy
configurations from one server to
another.
Describe how to export control
strategy configurations from a
Control Builder project.
Describe how to import control
strategy configurations into a
Control Builder project.
4/13/2012
Honeywell
The Export function lets you The exported portions or all of the
ERDB are stored in the Ixport folder at
export all or a portion of the
the directory location:
ERDB viewed in the Project
C:\Users\Public\Public Documents\Honeywell\
Tree to the Ixport folder or a
Experion PKS\Ixport
user-defined location.
Control Builder - Export
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Control Builder - Import/Export
CM, SCM and hardware configurations (IOMs) can be moved between

servers using the Import/Export function
Control Builder
(Server 1)
Control Builder
(Server 2)
Control
Strategy
Configuration
Control
Strategy
Configuration
Project
Tree
Ixport Directory
Import
Data
Export
Data
Controllers, CEEs,
IOLINKs should be
built from scratch,
not exported/imported.
Project
Tree
The servers must be

running the same
release.
4/13/2012
Honeywell
In Control Builder, select File > Export to call up the dialog box shown:
All items in current
project use selection
buttons (or use
<Ctl> + mouse
select or <Shift> +
mouse select to
export specific CMs
from the point
window)
All items in Current

project
Import\Export text
files target location
List of items to Export

based on selections
from window
(Export.sl)
Select to start export
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Exporting Data Dialog Box
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Control Builder - Import
In Control Builder, select File > Import to call up the dialog box shown:
Use selection buttons
(or use <Ctl> + mouse
select or <Shift> +
mouse select to import
specific CMs from the
Point window)
All items in Current

Import/Export text Files
location
List of items to Import

based on Selections from
Window (Import.sl)
Import\Export text Files

target location
Import and Assign
Select to start Import
The export function

automatically creates
an export.sl file.
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 1: Importing and Exporting
Which of the following statements best describes the import/export function?

A) Only the hardware configuration
can be moved between servers
B) CMs, SCMs and the hardware
configuration can be copied and
restored to another server
C) Only CMs can be moved between
servers
Yourcorrect
answer:
The
answer is:
You
mustCMs,
answer
theand
question
before
Correct!
CMs,
SCMs
and
the
the
hardware
hardware
Correct
anywhere
to
Incorrect
-Click
ClickSCMs
anywhere
tocontinue
continue
YouIncorrect.
did You
not -answer
answered
thisthis
question
correctly!
completely
continuing
configuration can
be copied and restored to
another server.
Submit
Clear
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Summary
The Import/Export function in Control Builder:
you to copy CM, SCM and hardware configurations from one

Allows
servers ERDB to another servers ERDB
The export server and the import server must be running the same
release
Controllers should be built from scratch, not exported / imported
Includes CEE and IOLinks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Conclusion
Describe the Import/Export Procedure in Control Builder
Completion
Certificate
Proceed to the Configure C200 Hardware in a Simulation Control

Environment (SCE) and Import the Remaining I/O Modules into the SCE
lab exercises
10
4/13/2012

Topic: Controller Hardware Configuration

Contents
Instructions for: Configure Controller Hardware ....................................................................................3
Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in SIM-C200E ............................................................5
Import the Remaining Series A IO Modules into the SCE ...................................................................29
Configure C300 Controller and Series C IOM in SIM-C300 ................................................................37
Import the Remaining Series C IO in to SIM-C300 .............................................................................49
4/13/2012


4/13/2012


Introduction
This portion of the lab describes how to follow the Controller Hardware Configuration lab.
Procedure
Step
1
Action
Select ONLY one of the following:
Read the IMPORTANT information below.
In class, students can choose to configure hardware and points for either a C200E, or a
C300. It is not possible for students to complete labs for both. Therefore, each student
must decide whether they will configure hardware and points for a C200E, or a C300.
There are several reasons that only one or the other can be done: Time allocated to the
course (1 week), Tag names cannot be duplicated on a server, the AC simulator Excel
spread sheet, the AC HMI Web pre-built displays, etc.
Please select whether you will be performing labs for the C200E (and Series A I/O
modules) or for C300 (and Series C I/O Modules). Select only one of the following:
_______
C200E (and Series A I/O modules)
_______
C300 (and Series C I/O Modules)
If you selected:
C200E (and Series A I/O modules):
Complete ONLY the following portions of this lab (the first two sections):
Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in SIM-C200E
Import the Remaining Series A IO Modules into the SCE

C300 (and Series C I/O Modules):
Complete ONLY the following portions of this lab (the second two sections):
Configure C300 Controller and Series C IOM in SIM-C300
Import the Remaining Series C IO Modules into the SCE
4/13/2012



4/13/2012


Practice
Introduction
In this lab, you will learn to create a SIM-C200E. You will also learn that an associated Control
Execution Environment (CEE) block represents an installed SIM-C200E controller in the Project
Tree. The CEE supports execution of Control Modules (CMs) for simulating control applications.
The CEE runs in the SCE controller as a software layer built on top of the control software
infrastructure.
Objective
Configure a SIM-C200E (Simulation Control Environment) Controller in Control Builder
Configure a CEE in Control Builder
Configure Input Output Modules. (3 Analog Input modules, 2 Analog Output Modules, 1
Digital Input Module, 2 Digital Output modules)
Prerequisites
Experion PKS Server setup and configured to run SCE controller
Note:
You must note the names, for the SIM-C200E, CMs, and FBs used in Control Modules and IOMs,
in your lab exercises. These are the names used, in the Excel tie back sheet, for simulation purpose.
4/13/2012


Complete the Following Steps in Control Builder

Create an SIM-C200E
Step
Action
Launch Control Builder Application from Configuration Studio
Add a new Simulation Controller

With the Project Tab selected, select File > New > Controllers > C200E
ATTENTION
C200E and SIM-C200E share the same template

4/13/2012

Step
3
Action
Enter the Data for each configuration parameter for Main tab
Name: SCE59 and Item Name: SCE59_item
The name can be up to 16 characters
Alarm Enabled: Ensure this checkbox is checked to enable alarming for this SCE
Let all other values on this tab remain at the defaults
Select Load to simulation Environment.
4/13/2012


Step
Action
6
ATTENTION
Enter the Host Name of your Experion Server
(E20ESVxx) and press Enter. The Host IP Address
should automatically be entered. If it is not, get the IP
address from your course manager.
Host Name Simulation node name

4/13/2012

Step
7
Action
Click the Server History Tab. Keep the default values on this tab
A) Control Level: The minimum control level (between 0 and 255) required to
perform supervisory control on this point. The default is 200. Keep the default.
B) History Configuration Grid: Supports the configuration of associated point

parameters for history collection. Leave it blank.
4/13/2012


Step
8
Action
Click the Server Displays Tab. Keep the default values.
A
B
A) The Point Detail Display is used to show detailed point information. If you leave the
value as (default), the standard detail display is used for the point type. You can
create your own point detail display and enter the display name here.
B) The Group Detail Display is used to display point information when the point is part
of a group. If you leave the value as (default), the standard group display is used.
Accept all the defaults on this tab
10
Click the OK button

4/13/2012

Step
10
Action
Click the PLUS sign + to the left of SCE59
Notice that SCE/CEESCEFB blocks are created in Project tab
ATTENTION
The Name of CEESIMC200FB_135, as shown in the above display,
may be different than your CEE.
Right-click your CEE and select Module Properties
11
4/13/2012

11

Step
12
Action
Change the Tag Name to CEESCEFB61 and the Item Name to CEESCEFB61_item
Click Help for additional details of each parameter
Click OK
This completes configuring the CEE for SCE Controller
13
14
15
12
In the Project Tree window, select SCE59.

Click the
button on the Control Builder toolbar to download the SCE59 controller
Click Continue in the Load window

4/13/2012

Step
16
Action
Click OK in the Load Dialog window
ATTENTION
If any error message displays while downloading,

contact your course manager.
4/13/2012

13

Step
17
Action
Choose one of the following options, depending on your preference:
1. Open two Project/Monitor tree windows. On one of the windows, select the
Project tab. On the other window, select the Monitoring tab
2. Open only one Project/Monitor tree window. Select the Project tab or the
Monitoring tab as needed
Option 1 is shown here:
Monitoring Window
14

4/13/2012

Step
18
Action
In the Monitoring Tree, expand all items
ATTENTION
The SCE59 block appears as a blue icon indicating it
is loaded to the database but not yet active.
The CEESCEFB61 block also appears in blue
indicating it is loaded into the database but not yet
active.
Right-click CEESCEFB61, and Select Module Properties
19
4/13/2012

15

Step
20
Action
Select WARMSTART from the drop down list for CEE Command
TIP
Performing a Warm start, all strategies retain old values (values prior
to controller power loss). This is also called RAM Retention Restart
(RRR). To perform a Warm Start, the battery must be in good
condition.
Performing a Cold start, all strategies are initiated with default values.
16
21
Select YES
22
Click OK
23
SCE59 and CEESCEFB61 should now be green (active).

4/13/2012

Configure C200E Racks and Rail I/Os

This section familiarizes you with the different types of available C200E IOMs (Input/Output
Modules). Configure IOMs according to the instructions in the following steps. Use the names
provided in the lab exercise for the I/O Modules.
Step
1
Action
Choose one of the following options, depending on your preference:
1. Open two Project/Monitor tree windows. On one of the windows, select the
Project tab. On the other window, select the Monitoring tab
2. Open only one Project/Monitor tree window. Select the Project tab or the
Monitoring tab as needed
Option 1 is shown here:
Project Tree
window
Monitoring Tree window
Library Tree window
4/13/2012
Return to the Project Tree Window.

17

Step
3
Action
Select File > New > I/O Modules > IOMODULE in the Control Builder menu.
This gives the list of all available C200E IO Modules
NOTE: The system being built will have architecture, as shown below.
Built
Manually
Imported
18

4/13/2012

Step
4
Action
Select TC-IAH061 Analog Input Module, 6 Channel, 10V/ 4-20mA, Isolated.
A
B
C
D
E
A) Change the Module Name to AI_3_4_4.

Enter the Item Name AI_3_4_4_Item
B) Enter Module Description as Isolated Analog I/P in Slot 3 CNI MAC 4.
C) Enter the IOM Slot Number as 3. This is the Physical slot number of the I/O
module being configured.
D) Enter the Remote IO Chassis MAC Address as 4. This is the MAC address of the
CNI Card from the I/O Rack where this IOM resides.
4/13/2012

E) Enter ControlNet Module Slot Number as 4. This is the slot number of the CNI
card in the control rack to which the I/O chassis communicates. This value is
zero for local IOMs.
19

Step
5
Action
Click the Server Displays tab and enter Group # as 100, Pos # as 1.
20
Click the point selection button in the Group Parameter column
In the Point Selection Window
Select the module AI_3_4_4
Select CEESTATE from the Parameters window
Click OK.

4/13/2012

Step
In the IOMODULE dialog box, click OK.
Action
4/13/2012

21

Step
8
Action
Expand the Unassigned section, to view the AI module.
The module appears in the Unassigned section, as shown below.
9
10
22
Select AI_3_4_4
Click the
controller.
button on the Control Builder toolbar to assign the IOM to the SCE59

4/13/2012

Step
Action
11
Select AI_3_4_4 from the Available Modules list, select CEESCEFB61 from the Assign
To list, and click the Assign button to assign this IOM to CEESCEFB61.
ATTENTION
Since you can have up to 20 controllers associated

with one Experion Server, there could have been
several controllers (each with its own CEE) listed, in
which case you would pick the CEE to which you were
assigning the IOM. In the lab exercise we are building
one C200E; therefore, only one CEE will be shown in
the Assign To list.
4/13/2012

23

24
Step
Action
12
AI_3_4_4 is assigned to CEESCEFB61, as shown below.
13
Click Close.
14
If required, expand SCE59 and CEESCEFB61 by clicking on the

project tab.

buttons in the
4/13/2012

Step
15
Action
Expand the I/O.
The AI_3_4_4 IOM can be seen under the tree of CEESCEFB61
4/13/2012

25

Step
16
26
Action
Add a Digital Input module.
Click File > New> I/O Modules > IOMODULE
Select the module TC-IDD321 Digital Input, 32 ch, 24V DC
Enter the Module Name as DI_10_4_4 under the main tab
Enter the Item Name as DI_10_4_4_Item
Enter the Module Description as Digital Input in Slot 10 CNI MAC 4

4/13/2012

Step
17
Enter the I/O Rack Addresses for this IOM, as follows:
IOM Slot Number as 10
Remote IO Chassis MAC Address as 4
Control Net Module Slot Number (connected to I/O Chassis) as 4
Select the Server Displays tab.
Enter the Group # as 100, Pos # as 6, Group Parameter as

DI_10_4_4.CEESTATE
Click OK
18
Action
4/13/2012

27

28
Step
Action
19
Click the OK button, and the module DI_10_4_4 will be added in the Unassigned list, as
shown below
20
Assign the DI_10_4_4 module to CEESCEFB61. Refer to the steps above, if any help is
required
21
Verify that the DI module is now assigned to the SCE59 controller, as shown above

4/13/2012


Practice
Objective
Import the remaining hardware modules
Observe the operation of the Import/Export function
Prerequisites
Experion PKS Server setup and configured to run an SCE controller
Introduction
To study the Import/Export facility of Control Builder, we will import the other IOMs into
the database. Using the Import/Export functionality, you can copy/paste items from one
project to other
A Project file can contain many items such as IOMs and CMs. From Control Builder you
can use the Import/ Export tool to copy part or all of one project to another
Import copies designated function blocks from the Import/Export files located in the
directory shown in the Import form to the Control Builder Project. In this lab we will Import
the remaining Input/Output modules into the Project. These IOMs are pre-configured,
already exported and located in the following directory:
C:\Users\Public\ Public Documents\Honeywell\Experion PKS\

Ixport\Student_DB\Series_A
4/13/2012

29

Complete the Following Steps Using Control Builder
Step
1
Action
In the Project window select File > Import to call up the import box.
Browse to: C:\Users\Public\ Public Documents\Honeywell\Experion PKS\

Ixport\Student_DB\Series_A and click OK in the Choose folder window.
After selecting a directory location, all the objects available for import are
displayed in the Object list box. The following Import dialog box example
contains only Control Modules (CMs)
ATTENTION
When the dialog box opens, the Project Tree window
closes automatically.
Your list may be different and contain additional items.
30

4/13/2012

Step
2
Action
Select only the following Blocks from the Object list:
1. AI_5_4_4
2. AI_8_4_4
3. AO_4_4_4
4. AO_7_4_4
5. DO_6_4_4
6. DO_9_4_4
Selection can be done with the <SHIFT> button or the <CTRL> button.
Keep the option Import CEE Assignments selected

ATTENTION
This option imports and assigns the above items to the CEESCEFB61.
If this option is not selected, then the imported function blocks are
imported as unassigned blocks. The assignment option can be used
because the items being imported are being assigned to the same
named SCE/CEE from which they were exported.
4/13/2012

31

Step
Action
Click the Import button. The following dialog box will appear, indicating the status of the
import.
ATTENTION
After a successful Import, this dialog box closes.
32

4/13/2012

Step
4
Action
Open the Project Tree window, if not already open.
1. After importing all required modules, the I/O listed will appear similar to the
illustration below
5
6
Click the
button and download all the I/O modules.
Click Continue in the Load window.
Press and hold the <CTRL> key and select all the I/O modules one by one.
4/13/2012

33

34
Step
Action
Verify that the checkboxes, shown below, are selected.
Click OK to start the download.
10
Click the Monitoring tab and verify that all the IOs are loaded and active (green).

4/13/2012

Step
Action
11
Start Station if not already open.
12
To call the Group display, press <F6> and enter 100 in the message zone.
13
Click OK.
1. The status of all IO modules is displayed.
4/13/2012

35

36

4/13/2012


Practice
Introduction
In this lab, you will learn how to configure a simulated C300, referred to as a SIM-C300. The SIMC300 supports full simulation of the C300 controller including load and execution of all function
blocks supported by the C300 controller, a CEE executing with the same base execution cycles,
blocks executing with the same block execution period selections, and interaction with Series C I/O
and PM I/O.
Objective
Configure a SIM-C300 Controller in Control Builder
Configure a SIM-C300 CEE in Control Builder
Configure the 2 IOLINKs
Configure Series C IOM
Download and activate the SIM-C300, CEE, and IOM
Verify online SIM-C300 controller in Control Builder
Verify online SIM-C300 CEE Statistics in Control Builder
4/13/2012

37

Procedure
Complete the Following Steps in Control Builder
Add a New SIM-C300 Controller
Step
Action
Open the Control Builder if not opened.
Click FileNew Controllers C300 Controller (2 I/O Links)
ATTENTION
C300 and SIM-C300 share the same template
38

4/13/2012

Step
3
Action
Enter the Data for each configuration parameter as shown below.
The figure shows the configuration for SIM-C300 controller.

Name Enter the name as SIM_C300
Item Name - Enter SIM_C300Item
Select the check box option Load to simulation Environment
Host Name Simulation node name
ATTENTION
4/13/2012

Enter the Host Name of your Experion Server and

press Enter. The Host IP Address should
automatically be entered. If it is not, get the IP
address from your course manager.
39

Step
Action
Keep all the other settings as default.
Click the OK.
6
ATTENTION
The following Form Validation error is expected. For
a SIM C300, a device index is not necessary, and was
not entered. On a real C300, it would have been
necessary to enter a device index.
Click Close on Form Validation screen
40
Double click the CEE to open Module Properties.

4/13/2012

Step
Action
Change the name to SIM_CEEC300, and change the Item Name to SIM_CEEC300Item.
Keep all the other settings as default and Click OK
Double click the first IOLINK to open Module Properties.
4/13/2012

41

Step
10
Action
Change the name to Series_C_IOLINK, and change the Item Name to
Series_C_IOLINKItem.
Select the I/O family as SERIES _C_IO_TYPE. Keep all other settings as default and
Click OK.
11
Double click second IOLINK to open Module Properties.
12
Change the name to PMIO_IOLINK, and change the Item Name to PMIO_IOLINKItem.
Select the IO family as PM_IO_TYPE. Keep all other settings as default and Click OK.
ATTENTION
This PMIO Link configuration is required to be done in
class for PM IOP configuration on the last day of this
course as part of optional PMIO Lesson.
42

4/13/2012

Step
Action
Configure IO Modules for Series C IO.

Click File New I/O Modules Series_C _IO AI-HL High Level Analog Input
13
4/13/2012

43

Step
14
Action
Tag Name Enter the name as C_AI_1
Item Name - Enter C_AI_1_Item
IOM Number - 1.
Keep all other settings as default and click OK.

15
Configure a Series C type Digital Input module- DI-HV- High Voltage digital Input, 32
channels
Tag Name Enter the name as C_DI_6
Item Name - Enter C_DI_6_Item
IOM Number 6
Keep all other settings as default and click OK.
16
Assign C_AI_1 and C_DI_6 to Series_C_IOLINK.
17
Select SIM_C300 in Project tree.
18
44
Click on
icon on the control builder tool bar to download the SIM-C300.
19
Click Continue, and click OK in the Load Dialog window.
20
Click the Monitoring tab and note that SIM_C300 blocks appear with S and it is blue
indicating that it is loaded, but is not active.

4/13/2012

Step
Action
21
Right-click SIM_CEEC300 and select Change State. This will open Request Value
Change dialog box
22
Select the CEE Command WARMSTART, and select Yes when prompted for Change
Online Value
4/13/2012

45

Step
Action
23
ATTENTION
The IOLINKs do not contain IOMs, so you have to load
IOMs separately.
Click on one of the IOMs in the Project window and click on the
Builder tool bar to download the IOM.
46
icon on the Control
24
Download both C_AI_1 and C_DI_6
25
Click the Monitoring tab. IOMs appear in blue indicating as loaded and inactive

4/13/2012

Step
Action
26
Right-click on each IOM and select Activate Selected Item(s). Select Yes when
prompted for change state.
27
The IOMs are green indicating that they are active.
28
The SIM C300 configuration is complete.
4/13/2012

47

48

4/13/2012


Practice
Objective
Import the remaining hardware modules.
Observe the operation of the Import/Export function.
Prerequisites
Experion PKS Server setup and configured to run an C300/SIM C300 controller.
Introduction
To study the Import/Export facility of Control Builder, we will import the other IOMs to
create in the database. Using the Import/Export functionality, you can copy/paste items from
one project to other.
A Project file can contain many items such as IOMs and CMs. From Control Builder you
can use the Import/ Export tool to copy part or all of one project to another.
Import copies designated function blocks from the Import/Export files located in the
directory shown in the Import form to the Control Builder Project. In this lab we will Import
the remaining Input/Output modules into the Project. These IOMs are pre-configured,
already exported and located in the following directory:
C:\Users\Public\Public Documents\Honeywell\Experion PKS\

IXPORT\Student_DB\Series_C
4/13/2012

49

Complete the Following Steps Using Control Builder
Step
1
Action
In the Project window select File > Import to call up the import box.
Browse to: C:\Users\Public\Public Documents\Honeywell\Experion PKS\

After browsing to the directory location, all the objects available for import are
displayed in the Object list box.
ATTENTION
When the dialog box opens, the Project Tree window
closes automatically.
Your list may be different and contain additional items.
50

4/13/2012

Step
2
Action
Select only the following Blocks from the Object list:
C_AI_2
C_AI_3
C_AO_4
C_AO_5
C_DO_7
C_DO_8
Selection can be done with the <SHIFT> button or the <CTRL> button.
Keep the option Import CEE Assignments selected

ATTENTION
This option imports and assigns the above items to the

SIM_CEEC300. If this option is not selected, then the
imported function blocks are imported as unassigned
blocks. The assignment option can be used because the
items being imported are being assigned to the same
named SCE/CEE from where they were exported.
4/13/2012

51

Step
Action
Click the Import button. The following dialog box will appear, indicating the status of the
import.
ATTENTION
After a successful Import, this dialog box closes.
52

4/13/2012

Step
4
Action
Open the Project Tree window, if not already open.
1. After importing all required modules, the I/O listed will appear similar to the
illustration below
5
6
Click the
button and download all the I/O modules to the database.
Click Continue in the Load window.
Press and hold the <CTRL> key and select all the I/O modules which have not yet been
downloaded.
4/13/2012

53

54
Step
Action
Verify that the checkboxes, shown below, are selected.
Click OK to start the download.
10
Click Continue if a Warning message is displayed.
11
Click the Monitoring tab and verify that all the IOs are loaded and active (green).

4/13/2012
Describe Fiber Optic Extender and Its

Connection Rules
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe Fiber Optic Extender and Its Connection Rules
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
Overview
Series C I/O Link Fiber Optic Extender Module
Topology Series C IOM, PM IOP
Topology Type Daisy Chain, Star, Tree
Distance Limitation
Cabinet Layout
Specifications
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Overview
The C300 controller can now be connected remotely to Series C I/O or

PMIO through the use of an I/O Link Fiber Optic Extender (FOE)
module.
The same FOE cannot be used for Series C and PMIO connections
concurrently
Each FOE can connect to two remote sites:
Two fiber optic ports sets, FO1 and FO2
Ports have both receive (Rx) and transmit (Tx)
Mounting options:
IOTA
Din Rail
Stand Alone
Series C I/O Link Fiber Optic Extender Module

24V DC
4/13/2012
Honeywell
IOLINK cable
COMMON
Carrier
Mounting
Screws
Fiber Optic
Extender IOTA
Fuse
LED Indicators
FOE to IOTA
Mounting Screw
FOE to IOTA
power
connection
Fiber Optic
ports
I/O Link
Connector
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topology Series C IOM

IO Link
Cable
IOM
C300
Remote
Site A
1.5 Km Max.
1.5 Km
Max.
Fiber Optic
Cable
Remote
Site B
IOM
4 KM Max. (requires
IOLE every 1.5 km)
1.5 max between FOE with Standard Cable

Possible Configurations are:
Star
Daisy chain
Series C IOM
Tree (Star + Daisy chain)
Series C IOM
Series C IOM
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topology PM IOP
IO Link
Cable
1.5 Km Max.
C300
1.5 Km
Max.
Fiber Optic
Cable
8 Km Max.
(requires
IOLE every
1.5 Km)
PM IOP
With IOLink Extender IOP
PM IOP
With IOLink Extender IOP
IOLink Extender
pair MC-IOLX02
Remote Site B
Remote Site A
1.5 Km
Max.
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topology Type Daisy Chain
IOM
C300
IO Link
Cable
Main
Location
Remote
Site 1
Remote
Site 2
FOE
Fiber Optic
Cable
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topology Type Star
IO Link
Cable
FOE
Main
Location
Fiber Optic
Cable
Remote
Site 3
Remote
Site 1
IOM
Remote
Site 2
Remote
Site 4
It is possible to have multiple fiber-optic extenders in any location, provided distance

limitations are observed and no more than 40 IOMs are on a single I/O Link.
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topology Type Tree

IO Link
Cable
C300
FOE
Fiber1
Fiber2
Fiber3
Fiber1
IOM
Fiber2
Fiber3
IOM
Main
Location
Remote
Site 1
Remote
Site 2
Fiber Optic
Cable
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Distance Limitations with Series C

Main
Location
Remote
Site#1
d1
C300
IOM
IOM
d2
Remote
Site#3
Remote
Site#2
d4
Remote
Site#4
d3
IOM
IOM
IOM
Maximum distance of any single fiber-optic segment must be less than 1.5 km:
Maximum distance of any single leg must be less than 4.0 km. In above figure:
d1, d2, d3, d4 <= 1.5 km
0.25 + d1 + 0.25 <= 4.0 km

0.25 + d2 + 0.25 + d3 + 0.25 + d4 + 0.25 <= 4.0 km
10
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Distance Limitations with Series C Example 1

Main
Location
Remote
Site#1
d1 = 1.5 km
C300
IOM
IOM
d2 = 1.0 km
Remote
Site#2
d3 =
1.0 km
Remote
Site#3
IOM
Remote
Site#4
d4 =
1 km
IOM
IOM
The connections shown in figure above will work because:

d1(1.5), d2(1.0), d3 (1.0), d4(1.0) <= 1.5 km
0.25 + d1(1.5) + 0.25 = 2.0 <= 4.0 km
0.25 + d2(1.0) + 0.25 + d3(1.0) + 0.25 + d4(1.0) + 0.25 = 4.0 <= 4.0 km
4/13/2012
11
Honeywell
Distance Limitations with Series C Example 2

Main
Location
Remote
Site#1
d1 = 2.0 km
C300
IOM
IOM
d2 = 1.5 km
Remote
Site#2
d3 =
1.5 km
Remote
Site#3
IOM
d4 =
1 km
Remote
Site#4
IOM
IOM
The connections shown in above figure will not work because:

d1(2.0) which is not <= 1.5 km
0.25 + d2(1.5) + 0.25 + d3(1.5) + 0.25 + d4(1.0) + 0.25 = 5.0 km
which is not <= 4.0 km
12
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Cabinet Layout
C300
Controller
FOE can use

either Violet
or Grey IOL
Control
Firewall
FOE A
I/O Link
Extender for
Link A
Digital Input
Card
FOE B
I/O Link
Extender for
Link B
13
Honeywell
Specifications
Power Supply Options
Distance
4/13/2012
20 to 30V @ 200mA
Segment distance between FOE:
With Standard Cable: 1.5 Km
With Premium Cable: 2.0 Km
Total maximum IOLink length
Series C IO: 4 Km
PM IO: 8 Km
Propagation delay: Each FOE fiber optic converter subtracts a certain value from the
total IOLink length.
Series C IO: 0.25 Km per FOE
PM IO: 0.5 Km per FOE
Fiber-Optic
Fiber type: Multimode
Fiber core diameter: 62.5 mm
Fiber cladding diameter: 125 mm
Fiber connectors: ST type
Power budget: 8 db min, 15 db typical
14
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Describe the Fiber Optic Extender and Its Connection

Rules
Completion
Certificate

15
4/13/2012
Honeywell
16
4/13/2012
Describe the Control Firewall Connections in

the Series C System
Describe
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International
Inc. the Control Firewall Connections in the Series C System
17
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Overview
Topology rules pertaining to the Control Firewall
Overview of FTE limits
Describe
18
4/13/2012
C300 Topology Rules Control Firewall
Honeywell
C300, Series C FIMs must be connected to the Control

Firewall.
The C300 and any FTEBs assigned to it must be on the same
control firewall.
No other device, such as FTEB for C200, Ethernet PLCs,
Stations or Servers can connect to the Control Firewall with the
exception of devices qualified for Peer Control Data Interface
like Safety Manager and Modbus Gateways (Explained in
Advance Course).
Describe
19
C300 Topology Rules Control Firewall
4/13/2012
Honeywell
The Control Firewall is connected by uplink to a L1 or

L2 switch. Connections can be Fiber Optic or STP
Cable.
Fiber Optic: 2 KM multi mode or 15 KM single mode.
STP cable: CAT 5 up to 100 M.
Control Firewalls cannot be cascaded.
Describe
20
10
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Wiring Detail Series C Control Firewall

Fiber Uplink
STP Uplink
FTE Yellow/A
FTE Green/B
Describe
21
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Series C Control Firewall
100Base-FX
Uplink
(Media Converter
not shown)
10/100Base-TX
Ports
Control Firewall
Module
100Base-TX
Uplink
Describe
22
11
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Series C Control Firewall Module
Diagnostic LEDs
24VDC Power Present
Status/Alarm LED (bicolor blink when the alarm
occurs)
Activity LEDs for all ports
Activity LEDs
for Ports
Describe
23
How Many FTE Nodes Do You Have?
4/13/2012
Honeywell
An FTE Community can have no more than 330 FTE Nodes calculated
as follows:
Max. 125 Redundant FIMs per Server = 125 x 2 = 250
Max. 20 Redundant C300s per Server = 20 x 2 = 40
Max. 2 Redundant PGMs per Server = 2 x 2 = 4
Max. 40 Stations = 40
Max. 1 Redundant Server Pair = 2
Max. 7 ACE = 7
GRAND TOTAL: 343
If any FTEBs are present in the Community, the limit is 200 FTE Nodes.
Embedded FTE which is used in the C300, Series C FIM, and PGM is
at the MAC layer; therefore, yellow and green have same IP address.
Starting in R400, Servers and Workstations require only one IP address.
Describe
24
12
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 1: Control Firewall
Which of the following is not a valid connection to a Control Firewall?

A) Series C FIM
B) C300 Controller
C) FTEB for specific Series A IO
D) FTEB for C200
Incorrect.
Correct! FTEB
FTEBfor
forC200
C200controller
controllerisisnot
notaavalid
validdevice
deviceto
to
connect to Control Firewall. No device such as FTEB for
C200, Ethernet PLCs, Stations or Servers, can connect to
Yourcorrect
The
answer:
answer is:
the Control Firewall
Correct
Incorrect
You
Youmust
did
- Click
not
-answer
Click
answer
anywhere
anywhere
thethis
question
to
before
You answered this correctly!
question
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Click
anywhere to continue.
Submit
Clear
Describe
4/13/2012
25
Honeywell
Summary
C300 and Series C FIM must be connected to the Control Firewall.
No other device, such as FTEB for C200, Ethernet PLCs, Stations or

Servers can connect to the Control Firewall (with the exception of devices
qualified for Peer Control Data Interface like Safety Manager and Modbus
Gateways to be explained in the Advance Course).
C300 and FTEB (for specific Series A IO and AB devices) associated to
it must be on the same Control Firewall.
The Control Firewall is connected by uplink to a L1 or L2 switch.
Control Firewalls cannot be cascaded.
Describe
26
13
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Describe the Control Firewall connections in the

Series C System
Completion
Certificate

Describe
27
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Describe
28
14
4/13/2012
29

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Putting the Pieces Together

RED
CF9
Series C IO
C300
FIM
RED
FIM
PMIO
Series A IO
30
15

4/13/2012
C300 Controller I/O Link Configurations
Honeywell
IOLINK 1 and 2
FTE Yellow and Green
31

4/13/2012
Honeywell
How a Cabinet is Wired

Typical
I/O Link
Cable
32
16

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Series C C300 Controller

IOTA
I/O Link # 1
FTE Device
index
C300 Controller
Module
I/O Link # 2
FTE
Battery connection
from power system
GPS Time Sync Input

(Future)
Private path
redundancy (shielded
Twisted pair)
33

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Wiring Detail Series C FIM
FTE Yellow/A
FTE Green/B
Fieldbus Links
Connection to
Fieldbus power
supply
34
17

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Wiring Detail Series C Analog Input
IOLINK
Input Signal wiring
Shield Terminations
35

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 1: Connectivity
A C300 Controller has PM IO connected to both IO LINKs. Some of the

data is obtained from a remote monitoring system 5 km from the C300
cabinet. Which of the following is the correct option?
A) Extend the PM IO using IO Link Extender
B) Series C FIM
C) Series C IO
Correct!
Incorrect.
To get
Todata
getis:
from
data the
fromremote
the remote
vibrating
Your
The
correct
answer:
answer
vibrating
monitoring
monitoring
system
extend
system
the
extend
PM IO
the
using
PM IO
You must
answer
the question
before
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
notusing
-answer
answered
-Click
Click
anywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
to
continue
continue
completely
Link
IO Link
Extender.
Extender.
continuing
Submit
36
18
Clear

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Summary
C300 controllers, Series C FIM, and FTEB for Series A IO are
connected to the Control Firewall.
Series C and PM IO are connected to the C300 controller by the two IO
LINKs on the C300 Controller IOTA.

Series C and PM IO cannot be mixed on the same IOLINK
Remote PMIO is implemented using the PM IO Link Extender.
C300 can be associated to Series A IO directly via FTEB.
37

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Conclusion
Completion
Certificate

38
19

4/13/2012


4/13/2012
Honeywell
Overview
Each controller can be configured and used differently Ex:
Base execution period of the CEE
Number, type, execution period of CMs
Number, size of SCMs
Controller configuration determines its:

Processor loading
Memory used
Controller performance is expressed in units:

C200 & C200E:
Processing Units (PU)
Memory Units (MU)
C300 Execution Units (XU)
Control XU same idea (and sometimes referred to) as PU
Communication XU (peer-to-peer, display communication)
IO XU (IOLink sometimes referred to as Link Units)
Memory Units (MU) (C200/C200E/C300)

4/13/2012
10
Honeywell
Processing Unit (PU)
The measure of a controllers capacity to execute control strategies

Quantifies the amount of processing time necessary to complete a logic
execution
Items consuming PUs include: CMs, SCMs, Series A IOMs

Series C IOMs and PMIO do NOT consume PUs
PU specifications are defined based on a typical Control module types

Example:
A typical regulatory control (PID) CM consumes about 3 PUs
A Redundant C200s capacity is 1600 PUs
Approximately 530 Reg. Ctl CMs (executing once per second)

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Execution Unit (XU)
Because a single Processing Unit specification is not possible for a

C300 controller:
The concept of an Execution Unit (XU) is introduced to model how a C300
controllers processing power is spent.
Execution Unit (XU) is specific to the C300 controller and is required

because the C300 controller performs multiple functions such as:
Control CPU time used to execute control strategies (similar to PUs of a
C200).
IO CPU time used to support and communicate with IO on the two IO Links
and with ControlNet-resident Series A IO which is connected via FTEB
modules.
Communication CPU time used for communicating with peer nodes (e.g.
C300s, C200s, ACEs, FIM4s, etc.) and displays.
Execution Unit (XU) is a measure of C300 processing capability per

second:
1 XU of a C300 is logically equal to 1 PU of a C200/ACE.

4/13/2012
Honeywell
C300 Communication XU
Execution Units (XU) required to support the specified communications

are calculated automatically from the following inputs:
Number of Peer Connections (node type is not critical) nodes considered
as peers include C300, C200/C200E, ACE, FIM4
Number of Console Stations associated with Experion Server/cluster
Number of Parameters per second for display throughput
Number of Messages per second
Number of Messages/second is calculated from the number of
Exchange blocks, Push block stores, and SCM block stores that initiate
and respond to requests.

4/13/2012
Honeywell
C200 & C200E Resource Usage
Base represents Overhead processing done by the controller

Free is the recommended unused CPU capability
40% for 50ms C200/E, 60% for 5ms C200 (N/A for C200E)
Spend the CPU resources available in each C200 / C200E

Depending on requirements
16000 MU
100%
Free
PU Capacities:
50ms non-redundant 3600 PUs
50ms redundant 1600 PUs
5ms non-redundant 2400 PUs
C200 Only
4000 MU
Control
PUs
For user
Base
0%
C200E

4/13/2012
10
C200
Honeywell
C300 Resource Usage

XU indicates the processing
power of the C300
Control (Control XU)
IO (IO XU)
Communication (Comm XU)
100%
Free
Comm
16000 MU
Control
Decide how to Spend the

CPU and memory resources
available in each C300
Controller
5500
XUs
For user
IO
Depending on requirements
Base
0%

4/13/2012
Honeywell
PU and MU Table for C200/C200E

Typical Module Types
Processing Resource
Consumption (per module)
Memory
Resource
Usage
50/5 ms CEE
Non-Red
(PU/Module
Execution)
50ms CEE
Non-Red
(PU/Module
Execution)
50/5 ms CEE
Non-Red
(MU/Mod)
Typical IO Module (Average consumption

of available IOMs)
0.3
0.19
0.6
Analog Data Acquisition Module
2.9
3.8
7.4
Small Analog Data Acquisition Module
0.47
0.43
1.0
Regulatory Control Module
2.8
2.8
3.9
Auxiliary Function Module
4.2
5.1
13.1
Digital Data Acquisition Module
1.2
1.2
3.1
1.3
1.3
3.1
Logic Control Module
1.0
1.0
3.5
SCM
2.0
3.0
28.9
Small Digital Data Acquisition Module
0.22
0.14
0.6

4/13/2012
Honeywell
PU and MU Table for C300

Typical Module Types
Processing Resource
Consumption (per
module)
Memory
Resource
Usage
50ms C300
(PU/Module
Execution)
50 C300
(MU/Mod)
Typical IO Module (Average consumption of

available IOMs)
0.2
0.5
Analog Data Acquisition Module
4.2
7.3
Small Analog Data Acquisition Module
0.5
1.0
Regulatory Control Module
3.1
3.9
Auxiliary Function Module
0.7
6.4
Digital Data Acquisition Module
1.3
2.0
1.2
2.5
Logic Control Module
1.4
3.9
SCM
5.0
27.9
Small Digital Data Acquisition Module
0.2
0.5
Honeywell
PU and MU Calculation Example

4/13/2012
Processing Units (for a C200/Control XU for C300)

For a given Control Module
PU = (PU per cycle) / (cycle time, Sec)

Total for Complete Control Strategy
Total PUs = (No. of modules) x (Module PU) / (execution period, Sec) for each CM
Memory Unit
Processing Unit and Memory Unit calculation example for:
Memory Unit = (No. of modules) x ( Module MU)
Regulatory Control Modules = 2

Execution Period = 0.5 sec
Typical calculation for Regulatory Control module
(1 CM,1 AI Channel, 1 Data acquisition, 1 PID, 1 AO channel, 6 Logic)
PU
MU
Total PU
Total MU
C200/C200E
2.8
3.9
(2) x (2.8) / (0.5) = 11.2
(2) x (3.9) = 7.8
C300
3.1
3.9
(2) x (3.1) / (0.5) = 12.4
(2) x (3.9) = 7.8
10

4/13/2012
10
Honeywell
Correlation of PU/XU and % CPU loading
The following table shows an estimate of the number of PUs / XUs that will
cause 1% CPU loading
Correlation Table for 1% CPU loading
Controller
Number of PUs/XUs(~)
C200 (Non-Redundant)
50-60
C200 (Redundant)
20-30
C300
80-90
Note: All the values listed are approximate
Example: For a C300, control strategy using 2000 PU will amount to a % CPU
usage of 22.22%
Calculated by formula 2000 PU /90 = 22..22%, seen at CPUCYCLEAVG[40]
Free CPU would be approximately 77% (100% 22.22%), seen at CPUFREEAVG
11

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Monitor CPU % Loading
XU of C300 and PU of C200/C200E/C300 are not shown directly

Inferred in terms of CPU Usage and CPU Free
Recommended CPU free: C300: 20%, C200: 50ms: 40%, 5ms: 60%)
Displayed on faceplate of C200/C200E/C300 controller within Station

Within Control Builder for C300, this same information is on the statistics tab
of the controller template
For a C200/C200E this information is available on the statistics tab of
the CEE template
Minimum CPU Free (%)
Indicates minimum value recorded, since the controller power up or a last

statistics reset
12

4/13/2012
Honeywell
C300 CPU Free Alarms
If the average free CPU available is lower than the limits (below), then
the following alarms are initiated
CPU Free Low
Threshold defaults to 20% and is user configurable
On the C300 properties Main tab
An alarm is generated when CPU Free is less than the threshold
Displayed on the System Alarm Summary
Priority - LOW
CPU Free Low Low

Threshold is fixed at 10% and is not user configurable
An alarm is generated when CPU Free is less than 10%
Displayed on the System Alarm Summary
Priority HIGH
13
Honeywell
Execution Cycles (Phases)

Execution period and phase = execution cycle
CEE

4/13/2012
CM
PHASE (cycle)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
37 38 39
1850
1950
1900
2000
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600
TIME (ms)
This CEE base execution

period has 40 timing cycles
(phases) of 50 ms each
Example:
A CM with a one second execution period (1000 ms) and a phase of

0 would execute at phase 0 and again at phase 20
14

4/13/2012
10
Honeywell
CPU Loading Tab Cycle Loading Table
The CPU Loading tab is one of two tabs containing CPU statistics used
for maintenance and performance monitoring of the CEE
View the average CPU (CPUCYCLEAVG) and maximum CPU
(CPUCYCLEMAX) usage for a given control cycle (0 -39)
Cycle 40 is the overall average (or max)
Data shown is since last power up (or manual statistics reset)

Shows the historical
maximum of Central
Processor Unit (CPU)
processing power used
per cycle
Average percentage of
Central Processing Unit
(CPU) processing
power used per cycle
Data is shown only

when accessed from
the monitoring tab
15

4/13/2012
Honeywell
CPU Loading Tab Parameters
Recommendations for C200s and C300s with 50 ms execution period

Parameter
CPUCYCLEAVG[40]
CPUCYCLEAVG[0..39]
CPUCYCLEMAX[40]
CPUCYCLEMAX[0..39]
Description
Recommended
Average CPU used across all 40 CEE

execution cycles
<60%
Average CPU used for individual cycles

Units are percent of 50 ms cycle. Index
corresponds to the cycle (phase)
number.
<60%
Maximum of CPU used for all 40 CEE

execution cycles
<85%
Historical maximum of the CPU used by

each execution cycle. Units are percent
of 50 ms cycle. Index corresponds to the
cycle (phase) number.
<85%
For C200 5ms, CPU Cycle average values should be less than 40%
For C300 20ms, CPU Cycle average values should be less than 50%
More details: Experion PKS Control Builder Components Theory manual
16

4/13/2012
Honeywell
CPU Overrun
An overrun occurs when any container blocks assigned to a cycle fail to

execute within the cycle
Indicates the CPU is scheduled to perform more tasks than can be
completed within a base cycle
Overruns are diagnostic events reported by the CEE as CPU cycle

overruns
Getting an overrun occasionally (may not be bad)
Ex: an overrun occurred when downloading a large number of CMs
Getting overruns periodically (this is bad)

The CPU is routinely deferring execution 1 (or more) CMs to the next cycle
Needs to be fixed
Note the cycle numbers
Load balance
Possibly remove control
Data is shown only
strategies (CMs, SCMs, etc.)
when accessed from
the monitoring tab
from the CEE
17

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Cycle Overrun Alarm Conditions
The conditions for reporting and clearing overrun alarms are

summarized below.
A CEE configuration that causes regular overruns should be changed by
reducing the total load or rebalancing the load across timing cycles.
If Controller is . . .
CEE reports alarm if . . .
CPM (50 ms
BASEPERIOD)
Two consecutive intervals of Four consecutive

2000 milliseconds have at
intervals of 2000
least one cycle overrun.
milliseconds have no
cycle overruns.
ACE (500 ms
BASEPERIOD)
Two consecutive intervals of Four consecutive

intervals of 20 seconds
20 seconds have at least
one cycle overrun.
have no cycle overruns.
18

4/13/2012
10
CEE clears alarm if . . .
Honeywell
Load Balancing
Procedure by which overruns are eliminated or minimized by

automatically assigning scheduling parameters to container blocks.
Scheduling parameters
Period - The amount of time between two consecutive executions of a CM or
SCM block
Phase - Determines the set of cycles in which a container block executes
Execution Order - The time sequence in which container blocks execute
19

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Memory Units
Memory Unit (MU)
The units used to define the amount of memory used by control strategies
(CMs, SCMs, etc.)
The Memory tab indicates

Total user memory
Currently used memory
Currently Free memory
C200E,
C300
C200
Data is shown only

when accessed from
the Monitoring tab.
Total User Memory Units in Kb

Currently Used Memory
Currently Free Memory
20
10

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Memory usage exceeds limits

Memory usage exceeds limits
Currently Free Memory becomes negative.
Diagnostic alarm generated
Priority - Low
21
Main Tab C300 Memory Exceeded Alarm

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Memory Exceeded Alarm is
generated if Currently Free
Memory is less than zero
(indicates a negative value)
Enable Memory Limit

Exceeded Alarm
If, during any 2-second interval, the maximum
count of redundancy bytes transferred each
cycle from primary to secondary C300 reaches
this value, a high-priority alarm is reported by the
CEE block
22
11

4/13/2012
10
Honeywell
EXECTIMER
Execution Timer Block (EXECTIMER)
Used to measure execution timing of Control Modules, SCMs, RCMs, UCMs

Used to measure the timing of individual basic blocks or groups of basic
blocks within Control module
Used to measure the execution time for Control Strategy to be reused
Supported controllers
C200E, C300, ACE, with their simulation environments and C300 20 ms
23
EXECTIMER Configuration and Limitations

4/13/2012
Honeywell
EXECTIMER is used by creating two

instances
One instance marks beginning of
time interval
Other instance marks the end of a
time interval
Connect the output parameter of

beginning EXECTIMER to input
parameter of end EXECTIMER
Limitations: EXECTIMER cannot be

used for any of the following
purposes
Measuring timing effects between
Different execution Environments
Execution Environment and IO
Execution Environment and OPC
gateway or OPC server
24
12

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Summary
A Processing Unit (PU) is defined as a platform independent entity

which quantifies the amount of processing time necessary to perform a
specific control processing task in a C200 or C200E.
An Execution Unit (XU) represents the same amount of processing
resources in a C300.
The amount of I/O Link bandwidth available for I/O scanning per second
is divided into 1000 units called Link Units (LU).
A Memory Unit (MU) represents 1 kilobyte or 1024 bytes.
C200 has 4000 MUs
C200E, C300 have 16000 MUs
EXECTIMER blocks are used to measure execution time of basic blocks

or groups of blocks
25

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Conclusion
Completion
Certificate

26
13

4/13/2012
10

11

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
This lesson introduces you to the control modules you will build later in
the course using Control Builder.

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Data Acquisition TI20
Honeywell
PID FC01

4/13/2012

4/13/2012
11
Honeywell
PID Split Range Outputs PC16
Honeywell
Cascade PID LC14 and FC17

4/13/2012

4/13/2012
Cascade PID with 2 Secondaries LC 14 , FC17 and FC18

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Device Control - Pumps
Honeywell

4/13/2012
11
Honeywell
Device Control - Fans

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Conclusion
Completion
Certificate

10

4/13/2012

12
Describe the EXCEL Simulation Used for

Labs
EXCEL Simulation

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
In this lesson, you will learn how

the Excel Data Exchange program,
a licensed Honeywell option, works
with the Excel simulation
spreadsheet and process simulator
used in this course.

Identify the two function block
parameters available only in the
simulated control execution (SCE)
environment
Identify the three simulation modes
available in the SCE environment
Explain the purpose of closing and
reopening the spreadsheet after
configuring and loading new tags
to the system
EXCEL Simulation

4/13/2012
Honeywell
SIMVALUE and SIMMODE

SIMVALUE AND
SIMMODE are only
available for the SCE
environment.
SIMMODE provides three
modes:
NONE
DIRECTSUB
SIMVALSUB
SIMVALUE substitutes
the PV when the simmode
is in SIMVALSUB
EXCEL Simulation

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Simulation Spreadsheet
EULO
Tag
Function block
parameter
=G7
EUHI
Mode
select
Not<EULO
Not>EUHI
OP
Result of
two left
columns
The new PV
OP/100SPAN+EULO
Current
mode
Mode change
permit
Excel must be open with the simulation spreadsheet loaded

EXCEL Simulation

4/13/2012
Some of these tags will be built as a part of the lab and some imported.
There are tags configured in the spreadsheet which do not exist in the
Experion server at the start of the class.
EXCEL Simulation

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Enabling Excel Simulation
To make Excel Spreadsheet Write enabled , uncheck Disable Writes

Via the Network API option
EXCEL Simulation

4/13/2012
12
Honeywell
Simulation Spreadsheet
Honeywell
Conclusion
Describe the Excel Simulation Used for Labs
Completion
Certificate

EXCEL Simulation

4/13/2012
Honeywell
EXCEL Simulation

4/13/2012
13
Describe the Procedure to Build Control

Modules

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
In this lesson you will learn about
Experion control modules.
Build and edit control modules
Load, activate and monitor
control modules
Insert an OLE object in a control
module

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
Building and Editing Control Modules

Loading, Activating and Monitoring Control Modules
Inserting an OLE Object in a Control Module

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Methods to Add a New Control Module (CM)

Three methods to add a CM:
From the Library:
Drag and drop onto a CEE
From the Menu:
File>New>Control Module

4/13/2012
Honeywell

Name New
Dialog?
Put in
Unassigned?
Drop on CEE
Yes
No
Drop to Blank
Yes
Yes
Menu
No
Yes

used to add the CM, your
CM may be automatically
assigned to your CEE, or it

used to add the CM, you
13
Method Used

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Assigning Control Modules to a CEE

1b
3
1a
2
Assigned
to CEE

4/13/2012
Opening Chart View to Configure a Control Module
Honeywell
Double
Click
When the File Method is
used to add a new Control
Module, the Chart View
window is automatically
opened.

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Add Function Blocks

Add Function Blocks from the library to the CM
Add them in the order in which they should execute
Ex: AI, DACA, PIDA, AO
Series A
TIP:
After adding function blocks,
save your CM. This allows
the point picker to display
the new function blocks.
1
Series C
4

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Provide Automatic ORDERINCM
Displays Order in CM on the top left corner of all applicable Function Blocks
by default
Reduces engineering efforts required earlier in exposing this parameter on
Function Blocks
Series A IO channel function
blocks have an ORDERINCM,
Series C IO channel function
blocks do not.
Display Order in CM
option is selected
Function Block Execution Order in the CM
10

4/13/2012
Honeywell

4/13/2012
13
System Preferences within Control Builder has an option to display

Order in CM on Function Blocks
Adding IO Channel Function Blocks to the Control Module
Honeywell
A IO channel can be added to the CM by either dragging it from an IOM

in the Project tab, or by dragging it from the Library
When added from an IOM in Project, the channel is automatically assigned
to a specific channel on a specific IOM
Only available
for SeriesC
channels
Drag and
Drop
Drag and
Drop
This method is available

for all channel types.
The channel must be
manually assigned
later.
11
Manually Assigning a SeriesC Channel

4/13/2012
Honeywell
12

4/13/2012
Adding and Manually Assigning a Series A Channel
Honeywell
13
Drag &
Drop
Double
Click
13
Configure the CM and Each Function Block

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Double click on a blank space to configure the properties of the CM

Double click on each function block to configure its properties
The properties of the CM will be covered in coming slides
14

4/13/2012
Displaying the Control Modules Properties
15
Name and item name
Parent asset
Execution period

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Configuring a CM Main Tab
Honeywell
CEE base execution

period = 50 ms
50 ms to 2 sec
Default = 1 sec
CEE base execution

period = 5 ms
5 ms to 200 ms
Default = 200 ms
Execution order in CEE

and Execution Phase
16

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Configuring a CM Execution Cycle

Execution period and phase = execution cycle
13
This CEE base execution

period has 40 timing phases
(cycles) of 50 ms each
PHASE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
37 38 39
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600
TIME (ms)
1850
1950
1900
2000
Examples:
A CM with a one second execution period (1000 ms) and a phase of
0 would execute at phase 0 and again at phase 20
A CM with an execution period of 200 milliseconds and a phase of 1
will execute in cycles 1, 5, 9, ... 37
17

4/13/2012
Honeywell
CPU Loading
CEE
detail
display
18

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 1 : CM Period and Phase

Together, the CM execution period and phase define the:
A) Execution cycle
B) Execution phase hour
C) Execution phase minute
D) Execution order
Your answer:
You did not answer this question

You answered
this correctly!
Correct - Click anywhere
to
completely
Youanywhere
must
answer
Incorrect
Click
to the question
continue
before continuing
The correct answer
is:
continue
Submit
19
Clear

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Reload Initialization
Reload Initialization
parameters on the CM
provide additional
control over the
behavior of CMs
In Execution Cycles
These parameters are
supported by
C300
C200E
ACE
Details on the next

slide
20
10

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Reload Initialization Parameters
Initialization delay (integer value to define number of CM execution cycles)

When CM is reloaded, and the RELOADINIDLY is set to non-zero value
CM parameters are not visible to local and peer pull clients
Local and Peer pull clients hold last fetched output until initialization
delay has expired
Default value is 2 execution cycles
Depending on CM configuration, user can assign more than 2 execution
cycles
CURRELINIDLY
Indicates the count of execution cycles before initialization delay expires

When a CM is reloaded
CURRELINIDLY is set to RELOADINIDLY
When a CM is activated
CURRELINIDLY will begin countdown to zero
When CURRELINIDLY is zero
Local and Peer pull clients can view parameters from the reloaded CM
21

4/13/2012
Connecting Function Blocks with the Wiring Tool
Honeywell
Not yet
connected
22
11

4/13/2012
13
RELOADINIDLY
Honeywell
Example Analog CM CM, Blocks, Par. Conn, XRef, etc.

Analog Loop CM
1
5
2
3
23

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Example CM Device Control

Device Control CM
Expanded to
show
function
blocks
Inputs
Outputs
Logic/interlocks
24
12

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Permissive/Interlocks
13
Device Control Detail Display
2-state
25

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 2: Execution Order in a CM

Which of these is a definition of
the Execution Order in a CM?
A) All function blocks with the same
execution order in multiple CMs
are executed in parallel
B) The execution cycle of the CM
in the CEE
C) The execution phase of the
function block in the CEE
D) The sequential execution order
of function blocks in a CM
The correct
Your
answer:
answer is:
No. "Execution
Yes!
No.
"Execution Order
Order in
in aa CM"
CM" is
is the
the sequential
sequential
execution
order
ofthis
function
blocks
in aa CM.
CM.
YouIncorrect
Correct
did
You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Click
anywhere
anywhere
this
question
correctly!
to
toblocks
continue
continue
completely
execution
order
of
function
in
continuing
Click anywhere
anywhere to
to continue.
continue.
Click
Submit
26
13
Clear

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics

27

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Initiating Load of CMs
1
3
Right-click
28
14

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Loading CMs First Time
13
Check the appropriate

boxes
29

4/13/2012
Loading CMs Which Had Previously Been Downloaded
Honeywell
If a CM had previously been downloaded, it must be inactivated prior to

being re-loaded
Can be done manually from the Monitoring tab BEFORE the load is initiated
Can be done as part of the load process by selecting the checkbox
Before inactivating a CM,

MAKE SURE:
Operations personnel are aware
Process is in the proper state
30
15

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Activating/Inactivating CMs
Right-click
31

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Monitoring CMs Scale Factor

Monitoring/Chart Visualization
Scale Factor
Icon
32
16

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 3: Loading Control Modules

Which of the following is not a way to load a control module?
A) Select the corresponding CM in the
Project tab and then select
Controller > Load
13
B) Select the CM in the Project

tab and select the down arrow
C) Select the CM in the
Monitoring tab and select the
down arrow
D) Left-click the CM in the
Project tab and select Load
Yourcorrect
The
answer:
answer is:
You
You
Incorrect
Correct
did
must
not-answer
-Click
answer
Clickanywhere
anywhere
the
thisquestion
question
to
to
You answered this correctly!
before
completely
continue
continuing
Submit
33
Clear

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
34
17

4/13/2012
Inserting an OLE Object in a CM Ex: Word Document
35

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Viewing the OLE Object
Honeywell
36
18

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Summary
A new CM is automatically assigned a unique, sequential name.

The execution phase and period of the CM defines the execution cycle.
Cycle overruns can occur when the scheduled processing for a cycle does
not
finish by the start of the next cycle.
blocks execute in ascending order beginning with the block having
Function
the lowest execution order value.
You can load a CM from the Project tree using the Control Builder Controller
menu.
You can view an activated CM in the Monitoring tree of Control Builder or in
the
associated detail display in Station.
37

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Conclusion
Completion
Certificate

38
19

4/13/2012
13
When building, loading, activating and monitoring a CM in Control

Builder, remember:

Topic: Data Acquisition Control Module

Contents
Instructions for: Data Acquisition Control Module .................................................................................3
Configure Series C IO Channel ...........................................................................................................19

Configure the Data Acquisition Control Module ..................................................................................33
4/13/2012

13
Configure Series A IO Channel .............................................................................................................5

4/13/2012


Introduction
This portion of the lab describes how to follow the Data Acquisition Control Module lab.
Procedure
Step
1
Action
13
Select ONLY one of the following:

Read the IMPORTANT information below.
Please select whether you will be performing labs for the C200E (and Series A I/O
modules) or for C300 (and Series C I/O Modules). Select only one of the following:
_______
C200E (and Series A I/O modules)
_______
C300 (and Series C I/O Modules)
If you selected:
C200E (and Series A I/O modules):
Complete ONLY the following portions of this lab (the first and third sections):
C300 (and Series C I/O Modules):
Complete ONLY the following portions of this lab (the second and third sections):
4/13/2012



4/13/2012


Practice
Configure a Control Module (CM)
Understand the naming of the Control Module and the function blocks within the Control
Module
Configure an indicator Control Module for an analog input point
13
Objective
Prerequisites
Experion PKS Server or Client machine with Experion PKS Engineering Tools loaded
Debutanizer_123 graphic loaded on the server (This is required at a later time to check the
control strategy.)
SIM-C200E/C200E controller and IOMs configured
Excel Data Exchange configured and loaded with the simulation spreadsheet
Introduction
To create a Control Strategy, you must first create a Control Module, and then insert and connect
function blocks into the Control Module. The point 11_TI20 is built in this lab. 11_TI20 will have
alarming and be in a group and detail display. 11_TI20 will also be historized.
The Control Module is built, loaded and activated. The CM is linked to a Microsoft Excel
worksheet for process simulation. The remaining Control Modules of a similar type are then
imported into the project.
4/13/2012


Step
1
Action
Read the attention box.
ATTENTION
This section should be done only by students who
have selected C200E (and Series A I/O Modules).
Open Control Builder through Configuration Studio.
Open one or two Project/Monitor tree windows as desired.
Project Tree window
Monitoring
Tree window
Library Tree
window
Open the Excel spread sheet by double-clicking on:

C:\Users\Student\Documents\Tie_back_NEW.xls
(or by double clicking the shortcut on the desktop if it is available).

4/13/2012

Step
From Control Builder, expand System in the Library tab, as shown below:
13
Action
4/13/2012


Step
5
Action
Select and drag the CONTROLMODULE into a blank area in the Project tree.
A dialog box, as seen below, will appear.
ATTENTION
If you have a problem finding blank space which will
allow you to drop the CM, collapse the trees in the
Project window.
It is important to use the CM names given in this
document, because they are used in the Excel
simulation.

4/13/2012

Step
6
Action
Enter the following information:
Destination Tagnames:
11_TI20 (name of the new CM)
Destination Item Names:
11_TI20_Item.
13
Click Finish.
ATTENTION
In this tagname, the character after the letter T is the
letter I.
When adding a new CM, Control Builder numbers the
CM sequentially, by default. You can assign any 16character unique Project name to the CM.
It is important to use the CM names, given in this
simulation.
The Source Names contain random numbers
generated by Control Builder. Therefore, the ones in
this picture may be different than yours.
4/13/2012


10
Step
Action
Verify 11_TI20 is added to the Unassigned section in the Project Tree window.
Configure the parameters for 11_TI20.
Right-click 11_TI20
Select Module Properties

4/13/2012

Step
Enter parameter details, in the Main tab, as given below.

Name:
11_TI20 (Maximum 16 characters allowed)
Description:
T-100 Bottom (Maximum 24 characters allowed)
Parent Asset:
Level_C11.
Eng Units:
Deg C (Maximum 16 characters allowed)
13
Action
ATTENTION
If you want help on any of the parameters in this form,
press <F1> or click the Help button located at the
bottom of the form.
4/13/2012

11

Step
10
Action
Click the Server Displays tab, and enter the display details, as shown below.
ATTENTION
This lab uses the standard Honeywell analog point detail and group
display for the point 11_TI20 in Station.
12
11
Click OK.
12
Assign the CM to the Controller CEESCEFB61.

on the toolbar to open the
With 11_TI20 selected, click the Assign Button

Execution Environment Assignment screen
If not already highlighted, select 11_TI20 in the CM/SCMs tab.
Select CEESCEFB61 in the Assign To window
Click the Assign Button

4/13/2012

Step
Assigned Modules will show 11_TI20.
13
13
Action
Click the Close Button.

14
4/13/2012
11_TI20 is assigned to CEESCEFB61, as indicated below.

13

Add Function Blocks to a CM

Use the IOMs, configured in the lab Configure C200E Hardware, here.
Step
1
Action
Double click 11_TI20 in the Project Tree window to open the chart view.
ATTENTION
Your screen may vary from the example shown.
14

4/13/2012

Step
Add Function Blocks to CM 11_TI20.
Click the Library Tree window
Expand the IOCHANNEL, by clicking the + sign adjacent to it
Select the AICHANNEL block
13
Action
3
4
4/13/2012
Drag and drop the AICHANNEL to the 11_TI20 chart view.

Click the
icon on the toolbar to Save your CM to the Project database.

15

Step
5
Action
Configure AI Channel parameters.
16
Double-click on the AICHANNELA to open the Block Properties
Enter the following details, as given below:

Channel Name:
TI
Module Name:
AI_8_4_4

4/13/2012

Step
7
Action
Enter the following details as given below:
Select Channel Number: 1
13
Click the Assign Channel Block button.
ATTENTION
The Module Type displays automatically when
selecting the module name.
11_TI20.TI is assigned to the channel number 1 of AI_8_4_4, as seen in the Channel
Number/Channel Name list.
8
4/13/2012
Click OK.

17

Step
Action
9
ATTENTION
You have completed this section of the lab. Go to the
third section of this lab which is titled Configure the
Data Acquition Control Module.
Do NOT perform the section titled Configure Series C
I/O Channel.
10
18
Save and close 11_TI20.

4/13/2012


Practice
Module
Configure an indicator Control Module for an analog input point
Refer Guide to Debutanizer model for C200/C300 Labs section in Appendix for IO
channel assignment.
13
Objective
Prerequisites
control strategy.)
SIM-C300/C300 Controller and IOMs configured
Introduction
4/13/2012

19

Step
1
Action
ATTENTION
This section should be done only by students who
have selected C300 (and Series C I/O Modules).
Project Tree window
Monitoring
Tree window
Library Tree
window
Open the Excel spread sheet by double-clicking on:

C:\Users\Student\Documents\Tie_back_NEW.xls
(or by double clicking the shortcut on the desktop if it is available).
20

4/13/2012

Step
From Control Builder expand System in the Library tab, as indicated.
13
Action
4/13/2012

21

Step
5
Action
Select and drag the CONTROLMODULE into a blank area in the Project tree.
A dialog box, as seen below, will appear.
ATTENTION
If you have a problem finding blank space which will
allow you to drop the CM, collapse the trees in the
Project window.
It is important to use the CM names given in this
simulation.
22

4/13/2012

Step
6
Action
Enter the following information:
11_TI20 (name of the new CM)
Destination Item Names:
11_TI20_Item.
13
Click Finish.
ATTENTION
In this tagname, the character after the letter T is the letter I.
When adding a new CM, Control Builder numbers the CM
sequentially, by default. You can assign any 16-character
unique Project name to the CM.
It is important to use the CM names, given in this document,
because they are used in the Excel simulation.
The Source Names contain random numbers generated by
Control Builder. Therefore, the ones in this picture may be
different than yours.
4/13/2012

23

24
Step
Action
Verify 11_TI20 is added to the Unassigned section in the Project Tree window.
Configure the parameters for 11_TI20.
Right-click 11_TI20

4/13/2012

Step
Enter parameter details, in the Main tab, as given below.

Name:
11_TI20 (Maximum 16 characters allowed)
Description:
T-100 Bottom (Maximum 24 characters allowed)
Parent Asset:
Level_C11.
Eng Units:
Deg C (Maximum 16 characters allowed)
13
Action
ATTENTION
If you want help on any of the parameters in this form,
press <F1> or click the Help button located at the
bottom of the form.
4/13/2012

25

Step
10
Action
Click the Server Displays tab, and enter the display details, as shown below.
ATTENTION
This lab uses the standard Honeywell analog point detail and group
display for the point 11_TI20 in Station.
26
11
Click OK.
12
Assign the CM to the Controller SIM_CEEC300.

on the toolbar to open the
With 11_TI20 selected, click the Assign Button

Execution Environment Assignment screen
If not already highlighted, select 11_TI20 in the CM/SCMs tab.
Select SIM_CEEC300 in the Assign To window
Click the Assign Button

4/13/2012

Step
Assigned Modules will show 11_TI20.
13
13
Action
Click the Close Button.

14
4/13/2012
11_TI20 is assigned to SIM_CEEC300, as indicated below.

27


Use the IOMs, configured in the lab Configure C300/SIM C300 Hardware, here.
Step
1
Action
Double click 11_TI20 in the Project Tree window to open the chart view.
ATTENTION
Your screen may vary from the example shown.
28

4/13/2012

Step
Add Function Blocks to CM 11_TI20.
Select the Series_C_IOLINK Link
Expand the C_AI_3, by clicking the + sign adjacent to it
Select the AICHANNEL_01 block
13
Action
ATTENTION
You can add Series C IO function blocks to a CM in two ways:
1. The Project Tree method.
2. The Library Tree method (Covered in Describe C300 and
Series C IO configuration Presentation)
We will use the Project Tree method. This method uses the
fact that Series C IO modules contain their own configuration
databases. Therefore when you add an IOM, its configuration
parameters are available from project.
In this case, select the first AI channel from your AI IOM.
Refer Guide to Debutanizer model for C200/C300 Labs
section in Appendix for IO channel assignment
4/13/2012

29

Step
3
4
Action
Drag and drop the AICHANNEL_01 onto 11_TI20 chart view.
Click the
Configure AI Channel parameters.
Double click on the AICHANNEL_01 from the chart view of 11_TI20.
Enter the following details, as given below:

Channel Name:
TI
ATTENTION
IO Channel is automatically assigned to the IOM when you drag and
drop it from the IOLINK.
30

4/13/2012

Step
7
Action
Click on the Configuration tab and enter the Channel PV Ranges details as given
below:
PV Extended High Range:
267.54
PV High Range:
260
PV Low Range:
PV Extended Low Range:
-7.54
13
ATTENTION
In all Labs, you need to configure the Channel PV
Range parameters for all Analog Input Channel
blocks; it should match with DACA block Process
Variable details.
Click OK
8
Save and close 11_TI20.
9
TIP
In the future, when building Control Modules, follow the
steps above.
4/13/2012

31

32

4/13/2012


Practice
Configure a Data Acquisition Control Module (CM)
Module
13
Objective
Prerequisites
control strategy.)
SIM C200E/C200E, or C300/SIM-C300 Controller and IOMs configured
Introduction
4/13/2012

33


Use the IOMs, configured in the lab Controller Hardware Configuration, here.
Step
1
Action
ATTENTION
This section should be done ALL students (C200E &
C300).
Open Control Builder and open 11_TI20 to the chart view.
Add a DACA Function Block to CM 11_TI20.
Click the Library Tree window
Expand the DATAACQ, by clicking the + sign adjacent to it
Select the DATAACQ block
Drag and drop the DATAACQ block on the 11_TI20 chart view.
ATTENTION
For more information on adding function blocks to a
CM, refer to the Control Building Guide in Knowledge
Builder along the path,
users Guide > Creating a Control Module >
Creating an Instance of a Basic Function Block.
34

4/13/2012

Step
Maximize the chart view by clicking the
icon.
13
Action
4/13/2012

35

Step
5
Action
Arrange the blocks as shown below.
ATTENTION
In this lab the screen capture is shown for
SIMC200E/C200E, if you are using SIMC300/C300 the
AI channel will be different from Series A.
36

4/13/2012

Step
Click the
13
Action
Double-click the Data Acquisition Block that was just added to the CM.
Enter the following information :

Name:
DACA
Description:
T-100 Bottoms
Engr Units:
Deg C
ATTENTION
This block must be named DACA so that the
Honeywell supplied analog point detail display will
function properly when called from Station.
4/13/2012

37

Step
9
10
38
Action
Enter the Process Variable details, as given below:
PVEU Range Hi:
260
PVEU Range Lo:
PV Extended Hi Limit:
267.54
PV Extended Lo Limit: -7.54
Low Signal Cut Off:
NaN
Enable Clamping Option.

4/13/2012

Step
Action
11
ATTENTION
13
The PV High must set before the PV High High will

appear.
Configure Alarms for the CM.
12
4/13/2012
Click the Alarms Tab of the DACA Block
Enter the information as given below :

Trip Point
Priority
PV High High
260
URGENT
PV High
234
HIGH
PV Low
13
LOW
Click OK.

39

Connect Function Blocks

After adding the Function Blocks, connect them together to form a control strategy. Connect Blocks
together anytime, before or after configuring block parameters.
Step
1
Action
Select Chart > Insert > Wire or click
icon in the toolbar.
Cursor changes to PLUS + sign inside the Project chart window
Click the PV Pin of AICHANNEL block (TI)
ATTENTION
Note the change in color for the PV pin of block TI.
This indicates the block pin is selected.
40

4/13/2012

Step
Click the P1 pin of DATAACQ Block DACA.
13
Action
Connection
established
4/13/2012
Save the CM by clicking the
icon on the toolbar.

41

Step
4
42
Action
To show the cross reference connections made between function blocks:
Click Tools > System Preferences to open the window, as shown in the display
below
Select the Display Cross-References checkbox under the General tab.
Click OK

4/13/2012

Step
Click OK. (Your dialog box may not look exactly like this one.)
13
Action
4/13/2012

43

Step
6
Action
The display below shows cross references.
TIP
This cross reference may not be shown on a C300
Control Module
44

4/13/2012

Step
History collection.
Double-click CM 11_TI20 in the white space to open the configuration form
Click the Server History tab. Verify that the Control Level is 200
13
Action
4/13/2012
Select the parameters for historization.
Click the blank Row 1 under the Parameter column in the History
Configuration table
Click the Point selection button
to open the Point Selection form

45

Step
9
Action
The Point Selection form appears, as shown below.
Select Point 11_TI20 DACA, as indicated below.
Select parameter PV from the Parameters of 11_TI20.DACA list.
Click OK to close the Point Selection form.
10
46
11_TI20.DACA.PV appears in the History Configuration table.
Select the FAST and STD history checkboxes

4/13/2012

Step
11
Action
Click the Server Displays tab and enter the following information, to add the CM to a
Trend and Group.
13
Number of trends
to be entered
Enter Trend #, Pen

color, Parameter and
Description.
Enter Group #, Position

of the tag in the group,
Parameter and
Description.
ATTENTION
You can also do this, by entering the trend/group
number and the pen/ position, in the trend and group
window, after building the control strategy in the CM.
12
4/13/2012
Click OK to close the Control Module Properties window.

47

Step
13
Action
Save the CM 11_TI20 and close the chart window.
14
48
This CM now appears with the symbol

been loaded to the controller
indicating that the CM has not yet
Download this CM.
Select 11_TI20
Click the
Select Continue in the Load Box
button on the toolbar

4/13/2012

Step
Action
15
Select the Automatically change All control elements to the state selected in Post
Load State after load is completed. The Post Load State is selected as ACTIVE by
default.
Click the OK button.
13
16
A Load dialog box appears, as shown below, that automatically closes on a successful
download.
ATTENTION
In the Project window, notice there is no
front of 11_TI20.
4/13/2012

sign in
49

Step
17
Action
Click the Monitoring Tree window to verify that 11_TI20 is green, which means it is
active.
1
2
18
If active (green) skip the next step

If inactive (blue) perform the next step
Activate the CM. To activate a CM, right-click and select Activate > Selected Items
or select 11_TI20, and click the Toggle State button on the toolbar.
The following screen appears
Click Yes.
2
19
50
Notice 11_TI20 is now green
Open Station, if not already open.

4/13/2012

Step
Call up Debutanizer_123 on Station, as shown below.
13
20
Action
The 11_TI20 point is at the bottom of the T-100 tower.
In this example, the temperature shown is approximately 85.00 DegC.

If you click the parameter block in your graphic, point parameter, details appear in the
message zone: E20ESV##_Server:11_TI20.DACA.PV with real-time value and the CM
description.
ATTENTION
If you do not see the value for 11_TI20 varying, then
close and open the Tie_back_new.xls file.
Use this file for simulation purpose.
E20ESV##_Server is the server alias name defined
for this class. In real environment this will be a different
name specific to your site requirements.
The ## is the student number
4/13/2012

51

Step
Action
21
ATTENTION
The actual value may be different on your screen.
If the 11_TI20 CM is inactive, the value in the
parameter box is NaN.
If a point is not properly built and you select the

parameter block, the following message appears in the
message zone: Selected object not found.
If the point is not loaded and you select the parameter
block, the following message appears:
11_TI20.DACA.PV=??().
52

4/13/2012
14

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
In this lesson, you will learn to use the Bulk Build tool in
Control Builder.
At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to describe how to

quickly build multiple control modules of the same type using the
Bulk Build tool.

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
Bulk Build Procedure Overview

Bulk Build Procedure

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Overview of the Bulk Build Procedure

1
Create
Typical(s)
Select Typical(s)
Tool: Create Bulk Build List
For each typical:

Determine the number of &
the names of the copies
4
For each typical:
Select the parameters to
be changed on the copies
5
Create the Bulk Build file
.mdb, .csv, .xls
Edit the Bulk Build file

parameters to change on
the copies
7
Read the Bulk Build file
Tool: Read Bulk Build List
Build Copies

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Features of the Bulk Build Tool
Bulk Build:
Productivity tool used to generate large quantities of control strategies
outside of Control Builder
This tool is a licensed option
Bulk Build supports the following components:

Control modules
Sequential control modules
14
Fieldbus devices
I/O modules
User templates (instances of templates and templates themselves)

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
Bulk Build Procedure Overview
Bulk Build Procedure

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Create the Bulk Build List

Tools > Bulk Build > Create Bulk Build List
Invoke Create
Bulk Build List

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Select a Typical Control Strategy
Set copy name

and count
Select a typical
control strategy

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Set the Number and Names of the Copies

Use Alpha Sequence
Add letter to each
block name
Ex: PIC0102A, B
Selected Typical
Add Underscore
Separator
Ex: PIC0102_X
Number of copies to create
Base Name
14
Add Leading Zeros

Ex: PIC0102001, 002
(cannot be used with
Use Alpha Sequence)
Add prefix or suffix,

then start number and
increment amount

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Number of Copies is Updated
Result is updated
Select block
parameter for
Bulk Build list
10

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Select Parameters
Select block
Parameters of
selected block
Parameters selected
for typical control
strategy
11

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Number of Parameters is Updated
Result is updated
12

4/13/2012
Honeywell
14
Modify Parameters in Excel
Make modifications
as desired in the
required CM

4/13/2012
13
Honeywell
Open the Read Bulk Build List Tool

Tools > Bulk Build > Read Bulk Build List
Invoke Read
Bulk Build List
14

4/13/2012
Read Excel File and Validate Control Strategies
Select to replace
existing, when desired
Validation ensures that

the Typicals being copied
are present and are
structurally consistent
with the spreadsheet
Select Validate
15

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Validation Report
Honeywell
16

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Build Control Strategies
Validated.
Build OK.
14
Build and Assign OK.
Select Build
17

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Build Report
View report
after Bulk Build
18

4/13/2012
Honeywell
New CMs
New CMs available

in the Project
19

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 1: Bulk Build Tool

Use the Bulk Build tool to:
A) Create EB files for C200/C300
control modules
B) Generate large quantities of
control strategies outside Control
Builder
C) Export control modules to other
ERDBs
D) All of the above
Yourcorrect
The
answer:
answer is:
Incorrect.
Correct!
The
Bulk
Bulk
Build
Build
tool
tool
is
iscontinue
used
used
to
togenerate
generate
You
Incorrect
Correct
did You
notThe
-answer
answered
-Click
Click
anywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
to
continue
completely
continuing
multiple control strategies outside Control Builder.
Submit
20
10
Clear

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Summary
The Bulk Build tool:
multiple copies of a typical control strategy to an Excel spreadsheet

Exports
where each copy can be modified.
the edited Excel spreadsheet back into Control Builder which applies
Imports
the normal configuration checks and creates the individual control strategies.
Supports the following components

Control modules
14
Sequential control modules

Fieldbus devices
I/O modules
User templates (instances of templates and templates themselves)
21

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Conclusion
Completion
Certificate

22
11

4/13/2012
23

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
In this lesson you will learn how to use the bulk edit parameters tool in
Control Builder.
you will know how to
use the tool to:
Export tags and parameters from
a Control Builder project to an
Excel spreadsheet
Modify the parameters in an
Excel spreadsheet
Read the parameters into a
Control Builder project
24
12

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Create Bulk Edit List

Bulk Edit Parameters
Utility which allows you to change the value of multiple parameters in a

single operation by importing a prepared list of edits
14
Tools > Bulk Edit Parameters > Create Bulk Edit List
25

4/13/2012
Honeywell
The Show All Points button is used to populate the "Available Points"
selection list with the names of all points in the database.
26
13

4/13/2012
Select the Parameters Which Will be Changed
Honeywell
Select the points and parameters
All parameters that

exist on any selected
block in the Available
Points field will appear
in the Available
Parameters field.
The selected points
The parameter(s)
to be modified
27

4/13/2012
Honeywell

Build the Excel file
Browse to
desired
output path
Select the output

file type
Name the
output file
Save
28
14

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Edit Parameters
Open the created BulkEdit.xls file in Excel
14
Edit the parameters

as necessary
Do not change or
add tag names.
Keep columns in order.
Use the single quote

before numbers 100
29
Honeywell
Read Bulk Edit List
Select Update
Monitor or Project

4/13/2012
30
15
Select Start

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 1: Bulk Edit Parameters Tool

Use the bulk edit parameters tool:
A) As an online tool to activate or inactivate multiple

control modules at once
B) To copy the control module to the monitoring tab
C) To export selected control modules
D) To change selected parameters in selected control
modules
Yourcorrect
The
answer:
answer
Incorrect.
Correct!
The
Bulk
Bulk
Edit
Editis:
Parameters
Parameters
tool
tool
isisused
usedto
tochange
change
YouThe
must
answer
the question
before
You
Incorrect
Correct
did You
not
-answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
selected
parameters
in
selected
control modules.
continuing
Submit
31
Clear

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Summary
You can use the Bulk Edit Parameters tool to:
tags and parameters from a Control Builder project to an Excel

Export
spreadsheet.
Modify the parameters in an Excel spreadsheet.

Do not change or add tag names
Keep columns in order
Use the single quote before numbers 100
Read the parameters into a Control Builder project.
32
16

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Conclusion
14
Completion
Certificate

33

4/13/2012
Honeywell
34
17

4/13/2012
Describe the Block Name References in CM

and SCM
35
Describe the Block Name References in CM and SCM

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
In this lesson, you will learn about:
Block name references in CMs and SCMs

Reference a parameter in CMs
Reference a parameter in SCMs
36
18

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Name References
Generally, name references take the following form:
CM_Name.BlockName.Parameter
EX: 11_PC15.PIDA.SP
SCM_Name.Parameter
Ex:
SCM_D100.ModeAttr
Name references exist in:

Parameter references
14
Expressions used in SCMs
Expressions used in Calc Blocks
37

4/13/2012
System Preferences Relative Reference Display Option
Honeywell
Tools>System Preferences
The Relative Reference
Display Option allows
references to be:
Full Name
Short Name
Enter less information
Use less area on
chart view
Fewer characters in
expressions
38
19

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Short Name Block Name References Control Modules
When Short Name is selected, the entries for name references depend
on the location of the reference relative to where the entry is made
Reference to a parameter on a block in another CM
Name References take the form: CM.Block.Parameter
Reference to a parameter on another block in the same CM
Name References take the form: Block.Parameter
Reference to a parameter on the same block
Name References take the form: Parameter
Only the parameter name must be entered
CM2
BLK2
CM1
BLK1
PARb
PARa
CM1.BLK1.PARa
BLK2.PARb
PARc
39
Short Name Block Name References SCMs
BLK3
PARc

4/13/2012
Honeywell
When an expression in an SCM includes a reference to another SCM,

the full name reference must be used even if Short Names is
selected
SCM_Name.Parameter
References to the same SCM use a $

$.Parameter
40
20

4/13/2012
Honeywell
14
Expression Example - SCM
41
Honeywell
Parameter Connector Example - CM

4/13/2012
42
21

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Parameter Reference Example - CM
Different Block
Same Block
43

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 1: Short Names

Which of the following statements is true about Short Names?
A) Optional setting
B) Applies to parameter connector and parameter
references
C) Applies to expression used in SCM and all Calc
Blocks
D) Reference to a container parameter will be displayed
as "$.parameter" in the expression present in the
step of a SCM
E) All of the above
No. The
The
No.
The
correct
answer
is
"All
of
the
above".
All
Yes!
correct
answer
is "All
"All of
of the
the above".
above". All
All
No.
correct
answer
The
correct
answer
is: is
Your
answer:
ofYou
these
statements
arequestion
correct about
about
Short
of
these
statements
are
correct
about
Short
of
these
statements
are
correct
must
answer the
beforeShort
Correct
Click
anywhere
to
continue
You
Incorrect
did You
not -answer
Click
anywhere
this
question
to
continue
completely
Names.
Names.
Names.
answered
this correctly!
continuing
Click anywhere
anywhere to
to continue.
continue.
Click
anywhere
to
continue.
Click
Submit
44
22
Clear

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Summary
The block name references function in CMs and SCMs allows you to:
14
Shorten parameter reference in CMs

Shorten parameter reference in SCMs
45

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Conclusion
Completion
Certificate
Proceed to the Configure the Data Acquisition Control Module

lab exercise and the lab exercises that follow it
46
23

4/13/2012

Topic: Productivity Tools in Control Builder

Contents
14
Export/Import a Control Module .............................................................................................................3
4/13/2012


4/13/2012


Practice
Objective
Use the Import and Export functionality of Control Builder to incorporate parts from one
Control Builder Project into another Project
Export the Control Module 11_TI20
Import Analog Indicator points
Use Bulk Edit Parameters to change parameter values

14
Prerequisites
Experion PKS Server or client machine loaded with Experion PKS Engineering Tools
11_TI20 CM configured in Control Builder
Exported files of the Analog Indicator CMs for SIM C200E available in the path:
C:\Users\Public\Public Documents\Honeywell\Experion PKS\
IXPORT\Student_DB\Series_A
Exported files of the Analog Indicator CMs for SIM C300 available in the path:
C:\ Users\Public\Public Documents\Honeywell\Experion PKS\
Control Builder running with at least one Project/Monitor tree window open
SIM_C200E/SIMC300 Controller and IOMs configured
Introduction
A Project file can contain many items, such as IOMs and CMs, for up to 20 controllers. From
Control Builder, use the Import/Export tool to copy some or all of one project to another.
Export - copies the designated portion of a project from Control Builder to a specified
directory
Import - copies the designated CMs into Control Builders Project Tab
4/13/2012


Procedure
Export Function Block Configuration
Step
1
Action
In Control Builder, click on the Project window then from the menu bar select File >
Export, to call up the dialog box, as shown below.
Select 11_TI20
ATTENTION
Your point list may be different. The point list contains
all items in the current project.

4/13/2012

Step
11_TI20 now appears in the Point Name field.
14
Action
Browse to the path of:

C:\Users\Public\Public Documents\Honeywell\Experion PKS\Ixport\Export
4/13/2012
Double-click Export and click OK


Step
3
Action
Click the Export Button.
The Exporting Data dialog box appears
ATTENTION
This dialog box automatically closes if there were no
errors during the export.
Open Windows Explorer and navigate to the exported CM location:
C:\ Users\Public\Public Documents\Honeywell\Experion PKS\Ixport\Export
The following files are generated:

Module Name.bcd (In this case, module name is 11_TI20.)
Module Name.cnf.xml
Export.sl
global.gui
global.snl.xml
The Export.sl is the successful list file. It contains a list of all the exported
objects
ATTENTION
Here, 11_TI20 was successfully exported. You can
import this CM to any other Project with the Import
facility.

4/13/2012

Import a Control Module

Import copies designated Control Modules from the Import/Export files located in the specified
directory (shown in the Import form) to a Control Builder Project.
In this lab, import the Analog Indicator points. These are pre-built CMs and already exported into
the following directory:
Exported files of the Analog Indicator CMs for SIM C200E available in the path:
C:\ Users\Public\Public Documents\Honeywell\Experion PKS\Ixport\Student_DB\Series_A
Exported files of the Analog Indicator CMs for SIM C300 available in the path:
C:\ Users\Public\Public Documents\Honeywell\Experion PKS\Ixport\Student_DB\Series_C
14
4/13/2012


Step
1
Action
From Control Builder, select File>Import to call up the dialog box, as shown below.
All items in
current
Import/
Export Text
Files
Selection tools
List of items
to import
based on
selections
from window
Import /
Export Text
Files
Location
Selection List
When
enabled,
select your
own list of
items to
import
Start Import
ATTENTION
When the above dialog box opens, the Project Tree
window automatically closes.

4/13/2012

Step
2
Action
Click the Browse button and change the Import path to the following folder:
IXPORT\Student_DB\Series_A (or _C)
TIP
Make sure Series_A (or _C) is in the Look in field
before clicking OK.
14
Click OK.
4/13/2012


Step
3
Action
Import the Analog Indicator points listed below.
Selection can be made with <SHIFT> select (for contiguous items) or <CTRL> select (for
noncontiguous items).
ATTENTION
Select only the following, from the list, to import:
11_PI14, 11_TI21, 11_TI22, 11_TI23, 11_TI24, 11_TI25, 11_TI26
and 11_TI40.
Maintain the Import CEE Assignments checkbox selection. This checkbox imports and
assigns the above CMs to the CEESCEFB61 (or SIM_CEEC300).
10
If this option is NOT selected, then the imported items are imported as
Unassigned

4/13/2012

Step
5
Action
Click the Import button.
The following dialog box appears:
14
ATTENTION
This dialog box automatically closes after a successful
Import.
4/13/2012

11

Step
6
Action
Open the Project Tree window and expand the Project.
12
CEESCEFB61 (or SIM_CEEC300) with all the imported CMs appears, as shown
below

4/13/2012

Use Bulk Edit Parameters
Step
1
Action
Open the Bulk Editor.
14
Click Tools > Bulk Edit Parameters > Create Bulk Edit List
4/13/2012

13

Step
2
14
Action
Click on Show All Points button.

4/13/2012

Step
3
Action
Select 11_TI21.DACA from the Available Points window then
button
Click the arrow
11_TI21.DACA now appears in the Selected Points window
14
Similarly, select 11_TI22.DACA, 11_TI23.DACA, 11_TI24.DACA and 11_TI26.DACA

and move them to the Selected Points window
ATTENTION
Press <CNTRL> key for selecting multiple points.
4/13/2012

15

Step
4
Action
In the Available Parameters window, find and select PVEUHI and PVEXHILM. Select
the arrow
button.
ATTENTION
Press <CNTRL> key for selecting multiple parameters.
For C300 students only (C200E students skip this step):

From Available Points, select and move the following to Selected Points:
11_TI21.TI, 11_TI22.TI, 11_TI23.TI, 11_TI24.TI, 11_TI26.TI
For C300 students only (C200E students skip this step):

From Available Parameters select and move the following to Selected Parameters:
PVEXEUHI
16

4/13/2012

Step
Click the Browse button for the Output Directory.
Select C:\Users\Student in the Browse for Folder window
Click OK
14
Action
Select Excel Spread Sheet [.xls] from the Select File Type pull down menu.
Click the Save button.
ATTENTION
If the file already exists in the folder, a prompt will appear
asking you to overwrite the existing file. Press YES.
4/13/2012

17

18
Step
Action
Click OK.
10
Close the Create Bulk Edit List window.

4/13/2012

Step
Open Windows Explorer and navigate to C:\Users\Student
Double click the BulkEdit.xls file
Result: Excel opens displaying the points as shown below
14
11
Action
Screen capture shown for SIMC300. You will see this only when using SIMC300
4/13/2012

19

Step
12
Action
In the PVEUHI column, select each 100 value and change it to 260
In the PVEXHILM, select each 100 value and change it to 260.
ATTENTION
Be sure to put the single quote before 260. This
tells Excel that this value is text.
For C300 students only:
Enter the PVEXEUHI as 260 for each Series C Analog
Input channel.
Screen capture shown for SIMC300. You will see this only when using SIMC300.
20

4/13/2012

Step
13
Action
Save and close the Excel spreadsheet.
14
Accept the default C:\Student file location.
4/13/2012

21

Step
14
Action
In Control Builder, select Tools > Bulk Edit Parameters > Read Bulk Edit List.
22
Result: the Read Bulk Edit List tool opens

4/13/2012

Step
15
Action
Click the Browse button.
From the C:\Users\Student, select the BulkEdit.xls file.
14
Click the Open button.
16
Select the Update Project option.

Click the Start button.
4/13/2012

23

Step
Action
17
Click the OK button to acknowledge the warning.
18
Close the Bulk Edit tool.
19
In Control Builder, verify that PVEUHI changed (to 260) for the five points above
(11_TI21, 11_TI22, 11_TI23, 11_TI24, 11_TI26).
ATTENTION
If necessary, open the Project Tree, and expand the
Project.
24

4/13/2012

Step
Select the 11_PI14, 11_TI21, 11_TI22, 11_TI23, 11_TI24, 11_TI25, 11_TI26, and
11_TI40 points.
14
20
Action
Click the Download button.

Click Continue on the Load dialog window.
Select the checkbox with Automatically change in the Load dialog box, and click OK
to begin the download.
After a successful download, go to the Monitoring Tree window, expand your SCE/CEE
and verify that the CMs are activated (green).
ATTENTION
Your Project screen may appear slightly different than
the example above.
4/13/2012

25

Step
Action
21
In Station, open the Debutanizer_123 graphic and verify that the downloaded points are
displaying values. If Debutanizer_123 is already displayed, refresh the display.
26
11_TI40, 11_TI21, and 11_TI23 are shown below

4/13/2012

Step
11_TI25, 11_TI24 and 11_TI21 are shown below
14
22
Action
11_TI22 is shown below
ATTENTION
Your displays may differ.
If values for 11_TI20 are not updating, close and reopen Tie_back_new.xls and verify the following is
selected:
Tools >
Microsoft Excel Data Exchange >
Recalculate Every 5 seconds
This file is used for simulation purposes.
4/13/2012

27

28

4/13/2012

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
In this lesson you will learn about the engineering repository database
(ERDB) and how to administer it.
Identify the purpose and location of the ERDB
Open the Database Administration (DBAdmin) tool for the ERDB
Describe the DBAdmin functions for the ERDB

4/13/2012
15
Honeywell
Topics
Introduction to the ERDB

Opening and Navigating the DBAdmin Tool for the ERDB

4/13/2012
Honeywell
ERDB Description
The ERDB:
Contains logic CMs/SCMs
from the C200 and C300
controllers
Is created and referenced
via Control Builder and
DBAdmin tasks
Is a purely SQL server
database

4/13/2012
Honeywell
ERDB Location

4/13/2012
Honeywell
ERDB Files
ERDB database file
QVCS database
Warning!!!
Even though the database files
have an .mdf extension, they are not
Microsoft Access database files.
Attempting to open these files with any
program may corrupt the entire database.

4/13/2012
15
Program Files > Honeywell > Experion PKS > Engineering Tools > system > ER
Honeywell
Redundant ERDB Servers
ERDB_A - Secondary
ERDB_B - Primary
Replication Status:
No-Sync
Sync
Sync-fail
Synching

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 1: The ERDB
Which statement about the engineering repository database (ERDB) is
false?
A) It can be redundant
B) It contains logic CMs/SCMs
from C200 controllers
C) It is created through Control Builder
D) Its .mdf files can be opened with
any database program
Incorrect.
Correct! The
Thefalse
falsestatement
statementisis"Its
"Its.mdf
.mdffiles
filescan
canbe
be
Your
answer:
The
correct
is:
opened
withanswer
any database
program ."Attempting to open
You
must
answer
thecorrupt
question
before
the
.mdf
files
may
the
entire
database.
You
did You
not -answered
answer
this
question
completely
Incorrect
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
to continue
this
correctly!
Correct
continuing to continue
Submit
Clear

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
Introduction to the ERDB

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Opening DBAdmin for the ERDB

DBAdmin (ERDB) is opened through Configuration Studio
10

4/13/2012
15
Opening and Navigating the DBAdmin Tool for the ERDB
Honeywell
DBAdmin Window Panes
Tree pane
View pane
11

4/13/2012
Honeywell
DBAdmin Functions for the ERDB
The result is nine

different choices for the
content of the view pane
Click the PLUS sign ( + ) to expand

DbAdmin and Experion Node
12

4/13/2012
Honeywell

ERDB Host Information
General information about the server appears in the view pane
13

4/13/2012
Honeywell
A lock dialog box will appear when you attempt to open a locked CM in
Control Builder after an abnormal application termination.
14

4/13/2012
15
Use the Tools menu to refresh status
Honeywell

ERDB Active Locks allows you to open a locked CM
CMs in Control Builder that are locked appear in the view pane
Use the Tools menu to clear all locks
15

4/13/2012
Honeywell

CAB Active Locks also allows you to open a locked CM
16

4/13/2012
Honeywell
17

4/13/2012
Honeywell
ERDB Admin Tasks for Redundant Servers

The following tasks are only available for redundant servers
18

4/13/2012
15
ERDB Admin Tasks displays the ERDB administration tasks
Honeywell

Version control system (VCS) Admin Tasks
Synchronize VCS - Synchronizes the Qualification and Version Control System

database with the Engineering Repository database and clears any QVCS locks.
Backup VCS Database - Creates a backup copy of the current QVCS database as a
".bak" file under the user-specified name and in the user-selected directory location.
Restore VCS Database - Restores the user-selected backup QVCS database
(.bak) in the primary ERDB through the Restore From dialog box.
19

4/13/2012
Honeywell
DBAdmin Wireless specific Functions

Wireless Key Server and HART Parameter DB Admin tasks
20
10

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 2: DBAdmin Tool

The DBAdmin tool is:
A) Used for organizing excel
spreadsheets
B) A tool used by operators as
a search engine
C) A utility for maintaining the
ERDB
D) Use to modify tuning parameters
on PID control loops
Correct!
Incorrect.
The
The
DBAdmin
DBAdmin
tool
tool
is aisutility
a utility
for
Incorrect.
The DBAdmin
tool is a utility for
The
correct
answer
is:
Your
answer:
for
maintaining
maintaining
the
the
ERDB.
ERDB.
The
The
ERDB
ERDB
maintaining the ERDB. The ERDB Administrative
Administrative
tasks
are
carried before
out
You must answer
the
question
tasks
out
using
the
DBAdmin
tool.
Incorrect
Correct
-answer
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
to
tocontinue
continue
You
did are
not carried
thisthis
question
completely
You
answered
correctly!
using
thecontinuing
DBAdmin
tool.
21
Clear

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Summary
The engineering repository database (ERDB):
Contains control strategies for the C200, C200E and C300 controllers
Is created through Control Builder
located at Program Files>Honeywell>Experion PKS>Engineering
IsTools>system>ER
Is administered through DBAdmin, a Configuration Studio utility
22
11

4/13/2012
15
Submit
Honeywell
Conclusion
Completion
Certificate

23

4/13/2012
Honeywell
24
12

4/13/2012
Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control

Builder

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
In this lesson you will learn the purpose and use of the checkpoint
function in Control Builder.
you will know how to:
Locate the checkpoint file
Save a checkpoint file
automatically or manually
Restore a checkpoint file
Checkpoints

4/13/2012
16
Checkpoints
Honeywell
Introduction
The Checkpoint Function:
Allows you to save and restore operational and configuration data
associated with a control strategy
C200/C200E, C300, ACE, series CI/O & PM I/O (when used with C300)
LIOM
OPC gateway on ACE
Helps minimize downtime caused by a process or hardware anomaly
Checkpoints

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
Locating the Checkpoint File

Saving Checkpoint Files
Restoring Checkpoint Files
Checkpoint Support
Checkpoints

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Checkpoint File Location

The checkpoint file is created on the local server path
Folders are created for each node
In Checkpoint and in CheckpointBase
Folders under Checkpoint contain the actual

checkpoint files
Latest (most recent) checkpoint is stored directly
in the node folder (ex: SIM_C300)
Manual checkpoints are stored in the folder
named Manual
User created tasks (manual or auto) save
checkpoints in folders whose name is the same
as the name of the task (ex: CheckpointAll)
Folders under CheckpointBase contain

configuration information, and file management
information

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Checkpoint Base Folder
Attribute and Snapshot

file which contains the
configuration information,
and file management
information
Separate folders
for the controllers
Checkpoints

4/13/2012
16
Checkpoints
Honeywell
Checkpoint Folder
Each .cp (checkpoint) file contains all files of the CheckpointBase folder
in a compressed format supplemented with the saved real-time data for
that instance.
Sub directories are created for Automatic and Manual scheduled task
checkpointing and Manual Save operation.
Contains the checkpoint

files which are saved
manually
Contain the checkpoint

files which are saved by
user created tasks
Automatic or Manual
Latest checkpoint file of

the Controller named
SCE59 using the Syntax
ControllerName_Latest.cp
Checkpoints

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 1: Checkpoint File Location

Where is the Checkpoint File stored?
A) C:\Documents and Settings\All
Users\ApplicationData\Honeywell\Checkpoint
B) C:\ProgramData\Honeywell\ExperionPKS
C) C:\ProgramData\Honeywell\ExperionPKS\Data
D) C:\ProgramData\Honeywell\Experion
PKS\Checkpoint\Att
Yourcorrect
The
answer:
answer is:
No.
The
correct
answer
is
No.
The
The the
correct
correct
answer
answer
is
is
You mustYes!
answer
question
before
C:\Documents
and
Settings\All
Users\Application
You
Incorrect
Correct
did
You
not
-answer
answered
-Click
Click
anywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
C:\Documents
and
Settings\All
Users\Application
continuing
Data\Honeywell\Experion
PKS\Checkpoint
Data\Honeywell\Experion PKS\Checkpoint
Click anywhere
anywhere to
to continue
continue
Click
Submit
Checkpoints
Clear

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics

Checkpoint Support

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Automatic Checkpointing
Controller > Checkpoint > Schedule Checkpoint Task
Select to schedule checkpoint
Checkpoints
10

4/13/2012
16
Checkpoints
Honeywell
Checkpoint Task Manual
Name of the task
Select Manual
Select Controller(s)
Assign Controller(s)
Add comments
if desired
Click
Checkpoints
11

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Checkpoint Task Automatic Schedule
Select automatic
Select the date
and time for the
first checkpoint
Select interval
Checkpoints
12

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Add number of version to

be retained
NOTE: The number of versions is grayed

out in this case because the QVCS option
was included with this system.
QVCS permits only one version to be retained.
Add comment
Click
13

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Checkpoint Scheduler
Start
Stop
Define Task
Refresh Contents
Delete Task
Edit Task
Checkpoints
14

4/13/2012
16
Checkpoints
Honeywell
Manual Checkpointing
Select Save Checkpoint

Manually
Must be initiated from

the Monitoring tab.
Checkpoints
15

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Manual Checkpointing By Node
Lists the nodes for

which checkpoint is to
be saved
Lists the Nodes

available - but
not selected to be
saved
The file name is

automatically generated
based on the:
1. Node To be Saved
2. Date & Time.
File Name and

Comments of the
checkpoint file which
is to be created
If multiple nodes are

selected, the port
changes to File Path
and points to the
Checkpoint folder.
Checkpoints
16

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Manual Checkpointing By Task
Lists the nodes to be

saved as defined by
the selected task (or
first task listed if none
are selected as here)
Lists all Checkpoint

Scheduler tasks which
have type=Manual
File Name (or Path)

and Comments of the
checkpoint file which
is to be created
Comments entered
when the task was
defined
17

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 2: Saving a Checkpoint File

Which statement about saving a checkpoint file is false?
A) If your system has the QVCS option, you will only
be able to save 1 version of the checkpoint file
automatically; otherwise, you can specify the
number of versions to save
B) The checkpoint scheduler shows a list of the
automatic and manual checkpoints that have been
saved
C) You can save a checkpoint file manually for only one
project node
D) When you save a checkpoint file automatically you
must specify the start date, start time and interval
Yourcorrect
The
answer:
answer is:
YouCorrect!
must
answer
the
questionis
No.
No. The
The
The
false
false
false
statement
statement
statement
isbefore
is
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
"You
"You can
can save
save aacontinuing
checkpoint
checkpoint file
file manually
manually
for
for only
only one
one project
project node."
node."
Click
Click anywhere
anywhere to
to continue.
continue.
Checkpoints
Submit
18
Clear

4/13/2012
16
Checkpoints
Honeywell
Topics

Checkpoint Support
Checkpoints
19

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Restore from Checkpoint

Displays a list of ALL nodes
and shows which node(s) are
selected for restore
Location where the

checkpoint file for the
node is saved
Used to select the

Restore scope (only
available for C300)
List of files available

for restore
Checkpoints
20
10

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Files to Restore
Multiple parent
Nodes selected
Hardware children in
Multiple parent
Hardware children in
Single parent
Single Parent
Node selected
Available for selection

Unavailable for selection
21

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
Checkpoint Support
Checkpoints
22
11

4/13/2012
16
Checkpoints
Checkpoint support for C300, Series C I/O, & PM I/O
Honeywell
C300 target and save granularity

C300 CEE with Series A modules supported on C300
Series C I/O
PMIO supported on C300
Checkpoints
23

4/13/2012
Honeywell
C300 Restore
Restore from single C300 Checkpoint file
C300 selected for restore

with Restore Selected
Node & its associated
hardware option selected
Checkpoints
24
12

4/13/2012
Honeywell
C300 and Series A IO Modules Restore
C300 selected for restore

with Restore selected
Node option selected
25

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Series C IO and PM IO Restore

One IOM or IOP selected
More than one IOM or IOP selected
One or more SeriesC IOMs

and/or one or more PM
IOPs selected for restore
Checkpoints
26
13

4/13/2012
16
Checkpoints
Honeywell
C200 and Series A IO Modules Restore

C200 Save
Series A I/O
PM IO
C200
Series A I/O
C200_latest.cp or previously saved

compatible file
PM IO
C200 selected for

restore. Restore scope
option is not available
for selection
Checkpoints
27

4/13/2012
Honeywell
LIOM Checkpoint Support

LIOM Controller
Redundant or Non-Redundant configuration
LIOM Block, the LIOM CEE, 621 IOMs, and its contained CMs
Save / restore
Latest.cp
LIOM
Checkpoints
621 IOM
621 IOM
621 IOM
621 IOM
During restore, the

Restore scope option
will not be available for
selection
28
14

4/13/2012
Honeywell
OPC Gateway Checkpoint Support
The OPC Gateway is a CPM-like Function Block that resides on an ACE

Node and provides configuration parameters necessary for OPC
connections from ACE CEEs.
If the ACE Node that hosts the OPC gateway should fail, the OPC
Gateway Checkpoint file can be used to restore these configuration
parameters.
OPC gateway
Checkpoints
29
OPC Gateway latest.cp

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 3: Checkpoint Functions

Which of the following statements are true about Checkpoints?
A) C300 checkpoints are stored in a single file
B) PM and Series C IOM can be restored individually,
when connected to C300
C) C200 checkpoints if used, restores the C200 and all
IOMs
D) Series A I/O connected to C300 cannot be restored
individually
E) All of the above
Yourcorrect
The
answer:
answer is:
Yes!
No. All
All of
of the
the above
above statements
statements are
are true
true
You must answer
the question before
about
Checkpoints.
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Submit
Checkpoints
30
15
Clear

4/13/2012
16
Restore
ACE
Detail Display
Honeywell
The System Status Display supports direct navigation to the detail

display for a selected node
Checkpoint save and restore operations from the checkpoint TAB in the
detail display
Checkpoints
31

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Save Failed Status

Checkpoint save failed status
Checkpoints
Alarm is generated for Checkpoint save failed (System Status Display)
32
16

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Checkpoint File Needs the ERDB

A checkpoint file works together with the ERDB to restore data
The checkpoint file by itself cannot be used to restore data
A checkpoint file (.CP) can only be restored when EXACTLY the same
version of the ERDB exists on the server as when the checkpoint was
taken
Example:
Time 1:
Time 2:
Time 3:
Time 4:
A new CM is downloaded (and a checkpoint is taken)

A manual checkpoint is taken
An automatic checkpoint is taken
A CM is modified and downloaded (and a checkpoint is taken)
Only the checkpoint made at Time 4 is available to restore this controller
Checkpoint files and the ERDB should be backed up together
33

4/13/2012
Downloading Causes a Checkpoint Status of Incomplete
Honeywell
When downloading modules (CMs, SCMs, etc.), a checkpoint is taken

Controller data is not uploaded for the modules being downloaded
Checkpoint Entirety = Incomplete
Shown in Restore from Checkpoint dialog
Checkpoint Status =
Shown on the detail display of the controller (checkpoint operations tab)
Details of the Incomplete state show which modules are incomplete

Display the Restore from Checkpoint dialog
Select the checkpoint whose Entirety = Incomplete
Click the Details button
If this CP is used to restore, only configuration checkpoint data (CCD)

will be restored for modules which have an incomplete status
Operational checkpoint data (OCD) will not be restored
Performing a separate checkpoint after the download will create a

complete checkpoint
Checkpoints
34
17

4/13/2012
16
Checkpoints
Honeywell
Summary
The Checkpoint function in Control Builder:
Saves and restores operational and configuration data

Speeds recovery from process or hardware anomalies
Can be done manually or automatically at set intervals
Checkpoints
35

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Conclusion
Completion
Certificate
Proceed to the Open and Operate Control Builder lab exercise.

Checkpoints
36
18

4/13/2012
Topic: Checkpoints
Contents
Perform Checkpoint Save ......................................................................................................................3
16
Perform Checkpoint Restore .................................................................................................................7
4/13/2012


4/13/2012
Checkpoints

Practice
Introduction
In this lab, you will learn the Checkpoint save operation
Prerequisites
SIM_C300 / SCE59 must be configured and loaded
16
4/13/2012

Checkpoints
Step
Action
Save Checkpoint Manually

1
On the Monitoring tab, right-click on the controller (SCE59 or SIM_C300) and select
Checkpoint > Save Checkpoint manually

4/13/2012
Checkpoints
Step
Action
Click Save to save the checkpoint file.
On the Save Checkpoint message window click OK.
16
4/13/2012

Checkpoints
Step
4
Action
On the Save Checkpoint Manually window click Close.
ATTENTION
The status of the checkpoint save can be confirmed
from the Event Summary page in Station as shown
below

4/13/2012
Checkpoints

Practice
Introduction
In this lab, you will learn the Checkpoint Restore operation
Checkpoint restore from Control Builder
Checkpoint restore from Station
Prerequisites
SIM_C300 / SCE59 must be configured and loaded
Note:
16
1. On completion of this lab, the SIM_C300 / C200E, and the associated I/O and strategies will
be restored.
4/13/2012

Checkpoints
Step
Action
Restore From Checkpoint

1
To change the status of the controller to Fail, open the Services window and restart the
Experion CDA-SP service.
ATTENTION
To open Services window, click StartRun and type
Services.msc and click OK
To restart the Experion CDA-SP service, right click on
the service and select Restart
Open Control Builder, if not already open. The status of SIM_C300 / SCE59 has
changed to idle and the CEE and I/O status changed to fail.

4/13/2012
Checkpoints
Step
4/13/2012
Action
Right-click on SIM_C300 / SCE59 in Monitoring tab. Select Checkpoint > Restore

from Checkpoint.
Verify that the Latest checkpoint status is Complete (in the Entirely column).
Select the Latest Checkpoint file from the list and click Restore.
Click Continue in the Restore from Checkpoint message window

16
Checkpoints
Step
Action
You should get a message indicating that the Restore completed successfully
Close both Restore from Checkpoint windows.
On to the Monitoring tab, check that the status of the controller and all the other items
under it appear in healthy status (green or blue).
10
Change the state of the CEE to WARMSTART.
11
Verify that all of the IO modules and Control Modules are active.
Restore Checkpoint From Detail Display
10
12
Repeat Step 1 to change the status of SIM_C300 / SCE59 to Fail.
13
Open the Station application.
14
Open the Detail Display for SIM_C300 / SCE59.
15
Click Checkpoint Operations tab in the detail display

4/13/2012
Checkpoints
Step
4/13/2012
Action
16
Change the Security Level to mngr. Click Restore from checkpoint.
17
Repeat earlier steps to restore the checkpoint of SIM_C300 / SCE59

16
11
Checkpoints
Step
18
12
Action
Open the detail display of SIM_CEEC300 / CEESCEFB61 and change the state of CEE
to WARMSTART

4/13/2012
Checkpoints
Step
Action
19
Go back to Control Builder Monitoring tab and verify that the status of SIM_C300 /
SCE59 controller and its I/Os are healthy. Activate the I/O modules and Control Modules
if not active.
16
ATTENTION
Checkpoint Save and Restore for Series C I/O, and
PMIO when used with C300, is supported from both
Control Builder and Station point Detail Displays
The screen might look different, if you are using SIMC300
4/13/2012

13
Checkpoints
14

4/13/2012
Describe PV Tracking and Initialization

Fundamentals
PID Control Module
Describe PV Tracking and Initialization Fundamentals

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Overview
Topics
PV Tracking
Mode behavior after IOL / IOP communication error
PID Control Module

4/13/2012
17
Initialization
Honeywell
Introduction
PV Tracking sets the SP equal to the PV when automatic control is

disabled (e.g. cascade is broken or the mode is Manual)
Setpoint (SP) tracks Process Value (PV) to avoid output bumps when
automatic control is re-established
Setpoint Limits are still enforced when automatic control is disabled and
PV tracking is enabled
If the PV is greater than SPHI, then the SP will be set equal to SPHI
If the PV is less than SPLO, then the SP will be set equal to SPLO
PID Control Module

4/13/2012
Honeywell
PV Tracking
The PV tracking option is typically configured for PID blocks in a

cascade configuration
Allows the PID block to resume control with no error after initialization or
when it is taken out of Manual mode
PV tracking option sets SP equal to PV when the cascade is broken due to
function block initialization, an operator action, or a program action (such as
setting the mode to Manual)
The PV Tracking option is enabled on the SetPoint Tab of a PID block
PV Tracking
PV Tracking when
block is Initializing
and mode is Auto
PID Control Module

4/13/2012
Honeywell
PV Tracking Options
If the first PV tracking option is enabled (and PV Tracking in Auto/Init is

not enabled), the function block will set the SP equal to the PV (subject
to SP limits) when the PID loop is set to Manual mode.
Note 1: PV tracking will not occur on recovery from a bad PV
Note 2: PV tracking will not occur if a block is in the Auto mode. If a PID
is in Auto mode, it means the SP value is normally stored by the user; if
PV tracking was available for Auto mode, the user SP would be lost
The first PV Tracking option will not work when the block is Initializing and
the mode is Auto
PV Tracking in Auto Initialize mode

When checked, PV Track in Auto/Init is enabled and provides PV Tracking
when the block is in Auto mode and it is undergoing initialization (INITMAN
is On)
PID Control Module

4/13/2012
Honeywell
PV Tracking
17
After enabling the PV Tracking option
SP is equal to PV when mode is

in MAN
PID Control Module

4/13/2012
Honeywell
PV Tracking in Auto/Init
When the mode is changed from CAS in a secondary controller,

INITMAN is turned ON in the primary controller
If the option Enable PV Tracking in Auto/Init is checked, the SP will track
the PV if INITMAN is ON, even if the mode of the primary controller is
Auto
SP tracks PV when
block is in an Initialize
state and in Auto mode
Mode is
AUTO
Block is in
Initialize State
PID Control Module

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Initialization Propagation
Initialization propagation
Occurs when control blocks check the downstream blocks for broken loop
In case of a broken loop, each block will initialize itself and provide an
initialization request and initialization value to its primary (upstream) block
Initialization starts at the final control element and propagates upstream
In a Cascade control loop
Secondary controller block initializes itself and sends an initialization request

to Primary controller when its MODE is changed from CAS
Initialization does not occur when Secondary controller mode is changed
from AUTO/MAN to CAS
Initialization requests are brought in from downstream blocks using the

implicit BACKCALC connection for each output
Downstream block may propagate one shot initialization requests to an
upstream block
Occurs when a block is activated or returning from bad control
PID Control Module

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Initialization (Cascade Control Loop)
When the mode of a secondary controller is changed from CAS,

INITMAN is turn ON in the primary controller
INITMAN parameter indicates the initialization status
Primary Controller
Secondary Controller
INITMAN is ON
for Primary
Controller
PID Control Module

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Initialization Parameters
When INITMAN is ON
17
Function block is in Initialization Manual

Either a cascade is broken (i.e., secondary controller mode is not Cascade),
or initialization is requested by a secondary downstream block
INITMAN is available in following blocks

All RegCtl blocks, DevCtl, Pulse Count Control, Pulse Length Control,
HTmotor, LTmotor, Solenoid, ValveDamper
Secondary Initialization Option

When enabled, a Regulatory Control function block ignores initialization
requests from the secondary
There is one SECINITOPT parameter for each secondary
Number of secondary connection depends on the function block type
PID Control Module
10

4/13/2012
Enable Bad Output Connection Option (BADOCOPTENB)
Honeywell
When communication to the Input Output Processor (IOP) is lost:

Mode is set to MAN
Mode attribute is set to OPERATOR
Initialization (this block & upstream)
Available in all regulatory control blocks

Applicable for the following I/O:
PM I/O
Series C I/O
Series A and H (except Fieldbus, Profibus, and DeviceNet on Series A I/O)
Disabled by default
PID Control Module
11

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Bad Output Connection Option (BADOCOPT)

BADOCOPT = NaN
Initialization request (this block & upstream) occurs immediately

No mode shed occurs
BADOCOPT = 0 sec (same as BADOCOPTENB = Disabled)

Mode & ModeAttr = MAN & OPERATOR immediately
User must restore mode after the communication with the I/O is restored
BADOCOPT = 1 to 60 sec

Mode & ModeAttr = MAN & OPERATOR after BADOCOPT seconds
Or during the next CM execution after BADOCOPT seconds
Communication restored within BADOCOPT seconds:
Normal operation is automatically restored without user intervention
Communication NOT restored within BADOCOPT seconds:
User must restore mode after the communication with the I/O is restored
Bad Output Connection Option:
Nan, 0, 1-60
PID Control Module
12

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Bad Output Connection Option (BADOCOPT) Diagrams
BADOCOPT
Lose communication to IOP
Communication restored
Time
= NaN
Init. Request
No Mode Shed
BADOCOPT
= 0 sec (same
Normal operation restored automatically
Time
Init. Request
Mode Shed
as BADOCOPTENB
= Disabled)
User must restore mode
BADOCOPT
= 1 to 60 sec
BADOCOPT Seconds
Time
Init. Request
Mode shed
User must restore mode
Normal operation restored automatically

PID Control Module
13

4/13/2012
Honeywell
RegCtl Block Detail Display
17
Bad Output Connection Options (BADOCOPT) is available on Main tab

of detail display
PID Control Module
14

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Uncommanded Mode Change Alarm
Alarm indicates a mode change due to the Bad Output Connection

Option
Only available when BADOCOPTENB is enabled
Alarm returns to normal when the user restores (changes to) any mode
PID Control Module
15

4/13/2012
Honeywell
What Causes an I/O Communication Failure?

The following result in an I/O communication failure:
Removing the physical card from the rack

Loss of communication on the I/O link
Power cycle of the remote chassis which has an AO or DO card
The diagnostic failure of an individual slot
Failure of the I/O processor
Removing the local or remote CNI card or removing the ControlNet cable or
FTE cable connecting to the IOLIM
Items which do NOT cause the RegCtl block to shed mode:

Activating or inactivating an IOM function block
Activating or inactivating a CEE that contains an IOM block
Activating or inactivating a CM which has an AO or DO channel associated
with an IOM function block
PID Control Module
16

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Summary
PV Tracking
PV Tracking (when enabled) locks the SP to the PV -- the SP remains equal to the PV
(subject to SP limits) as long as the mode is Manual
PV Tracking in Auto/Init -- when the mode of a secondary controller is not in CAS, the
parameter INITMAN is turned ON in the primary controller. If the option Enable PV
Tracking in Auto/Init is checked, the SP will track the PV even if the mode of the
primary controller is Auto.
Initialization
Mode Behavior after IOL or IOP communication error
Initialization occurs in a cascade loop when the mode of a secondary controller is not
in CAS, which causes the INITMAN parameter to turn ON in the primary controller. In
a single loop, initialization can be caused by a problem with a secondary downstream
block. Any block that can be initialized has an associated BACKCALC variable.
Initialization requests from a points secondary or downstream block are brought in
through the implicit BACKCALC connection for each output.
Eliminates user intervention to restore regulatory control block mode, when
communication failure is restored very quickly
Provides a new parameter option (BADOCOPT) in regulatory control block to allow
users to select the mode behavior
Provides Access Lock to configuration parameters to prevent unauthorized user
access to the functionality
PID Control Module
17

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Conclusion
17
Completion
Certificate
Proceed to the Configure a PID Control Module lab exercise and

the lab exercises that follow it
PID Control Module
18

4/13/2012

Topic: PID Control Module

Contents
Configure a PID Control Module ............................................................................................................3
17
Calculate Performance Statistics of the Configuration Performed (C200 & C300) .............................37
4/13/2012


4/13/2012
PID Control Module


Practice
Objective
Configure a Control Module
Use the naming conventions for the Control Module and function blocks within the control
module.
Configure a Control Module with a single PID loop
Prerequisites
Experion PKS Server or Client machine loaded with Experion PKS Engineering Tools
Debutanizer_123 graphic loaded on the Server (This will be required at a later time to check
the control strategy.)
Control Builder running with the Project and Monitoring tree windows open
SIM-C200E/C200E, or SIM-C300/C300 Controller and IOMs configured
Excel Data Exchange open and loaded with the simulation spread sheet
17
4/13/2012

PID Control Module

Introduction
The Heavy Feed Flow FC01 is built in this lab. This PID loop requires bumpless Auto Manual
transfer with alarms, groups, and historization enabled.
The PID loop will be built, loaded and activated. The remaining Control Modules, of a similar type,
are imported into the project.
To create a control strategy, a Control Module 11_FC01 must be built and function blocks inserted
and connected. Once the Control Modules are built or imported, you can test them with the
simulation.
In this lab, you will build a control module for a simple PID loop 11_FC01 for the heavy feed to the
debutanizer tower T-100.

4/13/2012
PID Control Module

Create a Control Module (CM)
Step
1
Action
Project
Tree
window
Monitoring
Tree
window
17
Library
Tree
window
4/13/2012

PID Control Module

Step
Action
Select File > New > Control Module.
Double-click the blank chart background.

4/13/2012
PID Control Module

Step
4
Action
On the Main properties tab enter the following:
Name:
11_FC01
Item Name:
11_FC01_item
Parent Asset:
Analyser_C11
Description:
Heavy Feed To Debutanizer (Maximum 120 characters)
Click the OK Button
Save and close 11_FC01
ATTENTION
17
Control Builder numbers all new CMs sequentially.

You can use any 16-character unique name for the
CM in Project.
4/13/2012

PID Control Module

Step
Action
For this Lab, use the specified CM names, because this allows you to test the CMs with
the pre-configured Excel spreadsheet, used for simulation.
CM 11_FC01 is added to the Unassigned node in Project window
ATTENTION
Your Project window may differ. Verify that 11_FC01 is
in the Unassigned node.

4/13/2012
PID Control Module

Step
6
Configure the Parameters for 11_FC01.
If the Main property page is not open, right click 11_FC01
Enter the following parameter details in the Main tab.
Engr Units:
m3/hr (Maximum 16 characters allowed)
Accept the defaults for any remaining parameters on the Main tab
17
Action
ATTENTION
The name of every CM must be unique server wide.
4/13/2012

PID Control Module

Step
8
Action
Click the Server Displays tab.
Enter the following Display details:
Point Detail Display:
sysDtlPIDA
Click the OK button.
ATTENTION
The Group detail display for 11_FC01 in Station will be
directly picked from the type of Point detail display
specified.
You can directly add a CM, to a Trend and Group by
entering trend/group numbers and the pen/position in
Trends and Groups windows, here or after building the
control strategy in the CM.
10

4/13/2012
PID Control Module

Step
Assign the CM to the controller CEESCEFB61 (For SIM C200E) or SIM_CEEC300

(For SIM C300)
(Assign) button on the toolbar,

With the CM 11_FC01 selected, click the
to open the Execution Environment Assignment dialog.
Select 11_FC01 in the CMs/SCMs tab in Available Modules list box
Select CEESCEFB61 or SIM_CEEC300 in the Assign To list box
Click the Assign button
11_FC01 is added to Assigned Modules list box
Click the Close button
17
Action
11_FC01 is now assigned to CEESCEFB61 or SIM_CEEC300, as indicated below
For SIM-C200E
4/13/2012
For SIM C300

11
PID Control Module


After creating a CM, you must design the control strategy by adding relevant Input/Output blocks
and control blocks such as PIDs, device control or logic blocks.
The IOMs configured in the Configure C200E Hardware and Series A IOM/Configure C300
Hardware and Series C IOM lab are used here.
Step
Action
Double-click 11_FC01 in the Project window to open the chart view, and then maximize
the view.
Add Function Blocks to the CM
From the Library tab, expand the IOCHANNEL (For Series A I/O) or
Series_C_IO AI-HL (For Series C I/O)
Select AICHANNEL
For Series A I/O
12
For Series C I/O

4/13/2012
PID Control Module

Step
Action
Drag AICHANNEL into the 11_FC01 Project chart view.
Drag the following Function Blocks from their respective block Libraries and add to the
CM.
Block Family
Block
DATAACQ
DATAACQ
REGCTL
PID
IOCHANNEL (For Series A I/O) or

SERIES_C_IO AO (For Series C I/O)
AOCHANNEL
ATTENTION
4/13/2012

17
Add the blocks in the order specified above. For more

information on adding function blocks to a CM, refer to
the Knowledge Builder along the path
Users Guide > Creating a Control Module >
Creating an Instance of a Basic Function Block
13
PID Control Module

Step
5
Action
After adding all the blocks, arrange them as shown below.
For SIM-C300
For SIM-C200E
6
Configure AIChannel parameters:
Double-click the AICHANNEL block to open the AI parameter configuration

form.
Enter the Channel Name as FI.
For Series C I/O
For Series A I/O
TIP (Only for Series C IO Channels)

Channel PV Range parameters can be configured in
Series C AI Channel block
Therefore, PV ranges for Analog Inputs must be
configured for both the Series C AI Channel block and
the DACA block
7
For C300s ONLY:

Change the ranges of the FI block as follows:
PV Extended High Range 600.9
14
PV High Range
600
PV Low Range
PV Extended Low Range
-6.9

4/13/2012
PID Control Module

Step
8
Action
Assign the AI Channel to an AI Module.
For C200E:
Step
1
Action
Refer to Appendix 1 C200E I/O list assignments at the
end of Appendix for the following information on
11_FC01.FI:
Module Name:
Channel Number:
In the properties of the AI channel (FI block), use the pulldown list to select the module name.
Select the channel number.
Click the OK button to close FI properties.
For C300:
Step
1
Action
Refer to Appendix 1 C300 I/O list assignments at the
11_FC01.FI:
Module Name:
17
Channel Number:
4/13/2012
Click the OK button to close FI properties.
Right-click the AI channel (FI block) and select Function

Block Assign.
In the Function Block Assignment Dialog, select the

appropriate channel (use the Module Name (IOM Name),
and the Channel Number from above), and click the Assign
button.

15
PID Control Module

Step
9
Action
Configure a Data Acquisition Block. Double-click the Data Acquisition Block, to open
the configuration form, and enter the following:
Name:
DACA
Description:
Heavy Feed to Debutanizer
Engr Units:
m3/hr
PVEU Range Hi: 600
PVEU Range Lo: 0
600.9
PV Extended Lo Limit:
-6.9
Clamping Option: ENABLE
Accept the defaults for any remaining parameters on this tab.
ATTENTION
You must name this block DACA so that the
Honeywell supplied Analog Point Details display
functions properly when called from Station
16

4/13/2012
PID Control Module
Step
Action
10
Select the Show Parameter Names checkbox located at the lower left corner. Note that
the parameter names now appear in place of the parameter descriptions.
17
ATTENTION
This displays the parameter names instead of
parameter descriptions.
11
4/13/2012
Uncheck the Show Parameter Names checkbox.

17
PID Control Module

Step
12
Action
To Configure Alarms, select the Alarms tab.
Enter the following:
PV High:
500
Priority: HIGH
PV Low:
Priority: Low
Accept the defaults for all remaining parameters.
13
18
Click OK.

4/13/2012
PID Control Module

Step
14
Action
To Configure a PID Block:
Double click PIDA.
Name:
Description:
Engineering Units:
PIDA
Heavy Feed to Debutanizer
m3/hr
PVEU Range Hi:

600
PVEU Range Low:
0
Select the Enable Secondary Initialization Option checkbox.
17
Normal Mode:
AUTO
Normal Mode Attribute:
OPERATOR
Accept the defaults for all remaining parameters on this tab.
ATTENTION
This block must be named PIDA for the Honeywell supplied
standard PID Point Detail Display to function properly.
4/13/2012

19
PID Control Module

Step
15
Action
Click the Algorithm tab in the PID configuration form and enter the following
Control Equation type:
Integral Time (T1):
Linear Gain Options:
Overall Gain:
EQB
0.2
LIN
0.40
ATTENTION
The Algorithm form allows you to configure PID control
equation types, associated PID equation parameters
and gain options for the PID block.
16
Click the SetPoint Tab and enter the following:

High Limit:
600
Low Limit:
0
Ensure Enable PV Tracking is selected.
20

4/13/2012
PID Control Module

Step
17
Action
Click the Alarms tab of PID and enter the following:
Type: OP High
Trip Point: 95
17
Priority: LOW
4/13/2012

21
PID Control Module

Step
18
Action
To add or remove Block Pins in a Functional Block :
Click on the Block Pins tab.
In the Selected Parameters portion of the window, for the PV parameter, change the
location to Left by:
Click on the TOP value on the PV parameter Location column.
Select LEFT from the drop down combo box.
22

4/13/2012
PID Control Module

Step
Action
19
As a result of the previous change in pin location, the PV pin shifted to the left side of the
PID block faceplate, as indicated below.
Click OK.
20
Configure the AO Block.

Double-click the AOChannelA Block and enter the following:
FV
17
Channel Name:
4/13/2012

23
PID Control Module

Step
21
Action
Assign the AO block to an AO channel.
For C200E:
Step
1
Action
11_FC01.FV:
Module Name:
Channel Number:
In the properties of the AO channel (FV block), use the pulldown list to select the module name.
Click the OK button to close FV properties.
For C300:
Step
1
Action
Refer to Appendix 1 C300 I/O list assignments at the
11_FC01.FV:
Module Name:
Channel Number:
24
Click the OK button to close FV properties.
Right-click the AO channel (FV block) and select Function

Block Assign.

button.

4/13/2012
PID Control Module

Connect Function Blocks

After adding the Function Blocks, wire them together to form a Control Strategy. You can wire
Blocks together anytime you choose, before or after configuring block parameters.
Step
From the Main Menu, Select Chart > Insert > Wire, OR Click the
toolbar.
button in the
The cursor changes to a PLUS (+) sign inside the Project chart window
Click the PV pin displayed in the AICHANNEL (FI) block and then click the P1 pin
in the DATAACQ (DACA) block
These function blocks are now connected
17
Action
4/13/2012

25
PID Control Module

Step
Action
Repeat the above steps to connect PV pin of DATAACQ (DACA) to the PV of PIDA.
Connect the PIDA OP pin to the OP pin of AO.
26
Your CM should be similar to the one shown below.
Select File > Save.

4/13/2012
PID Control Module

Step
5
Action
Configure History Collection, Trends and Groups.
Double-click in the white space of the chart view of 11_FC01 to open its configuration
form. Select the Server History tab.
In the History Configuration section, in the Parameter column, row 1, click the
Selection) button to open the Point Selection form.
(Point
Select the row having Point name 11_FC01 and Block Name PIDA, as shown in the
screen capture.
Select OP for the Parameter.
4/13/2012
17
Click OK to close the Point selection form.
11_FC01.PIDA.OP appears in the History Configuration table.
Click to select the FAST (Fast History) and STD (Standard History) options
11_FC01.PIDA.OP will now be historized

27
PID Control Module

Step
Action
Repeat the above steps to configure History Collection for 11_FC01.PIDA.PV in row 2 of
the Parameter column.
Add Point Parameters to Trends.

Click the Server Displays tab in the configuration form.
In the Trends section, in row 1, specify Trend # 1 as the Trend number.
In row 1, Pen column, click to select 1 from the drop-down menu.
In row 1, Enter 11_FC01.PIDA.PV as the Trend Parameter.
You can also select the parameter with the help of Point selection list, as shown in
an earlier step.
In the Groups section, row 1, specify Group # 11, Position # 1 and Group Parameter
11_FC01.PIDA.PV.
Click OK.
28

4/13/2012
PID Control Module

Step
Action
Click File > Save.
10
Close the 11_FC01 Project chart window.
This CM is located under CEESCEFB61 or SIM_CEEC300, which means it is

assigned to that execution environment
The symbol
controller
indicates that the CM has not yet been downloaded to the
The color gray of the connection icon indicates the CM is in Project mode.
ATTENTION
17
The screen capture might look different if you are

using SIM-C300
4/13/2012

29
PID Control Module

Step
11
12
30
Action
Download this CM.
Select 11_FC01
Click the
Click Continue on the Load window showing the warning
Select the Automatically change checkbox.

This ensures that the post load state is automatically set as ACTIVE
on the toolbar
Click OK.
A Load dialog box appears and closes on a successful download
In Project, notice that there is no
symbol in front of 11_FC01

4/13/2012
PID Control Module

Step
13
Action
Click the Monitoring tab to verify that 11_FC01 is active (green).
If the CM is active (green) skip the next step
If the CM is inactive (blue) perform the next step

ATTENTION
17
The screen capture might look different if you are using SIM-C300
4/13/2012

31
PID Control Module

Step
14
Action
Activate the CM (right-click 11_FC01 and select Activate) or select 11_FC01 and click
the
(Toggle State) button from the toolbar, to open the following.
Click Yes.
Notice that the 11_FC01 changes to green indicating it is now active

Monitoring tree status information is indicated by different symbols and colors,
as shown below:
CPM/SCE Symbols
1
32
3 4
7 8
Grey - As seen in project tree.
Grey Project tree
Grey - Loaded not monitored
Red - Communication failure
Yellow - Not used
Green - Active
Red - Failed
Yellow - Not Loaded
Blue Loaded

4/13/2012
PID Control Module

Step
Action
CEE/ CEESCE Symbols
1
Grey - As seen in project tree
Blue - Inactive
Green - Active
Red - Configuration Error

CM Symbols
1
Grey - As seen in project tree
Blue - Inactive
Green Active
Open Station, access and refresh the Debutanizer_123 graphic.
Change the 11_FC01 controller to AUTO mode
Click the SP value and enter 400 in the 11_FC01 faceplate.
17
15
ATTENTION
Open the Tie_Back_New Excel spreadsheet to observe the values for PV
and OP.
If the PV value for the point is not updating then restart the Tie_Back_New
Excel spreadsheet. This spreadsheet is used for simulation purposes.
4/13/2012

33
PID Control Module

Step
16
Action
To watch the trend in Station:
Click the
button in Station.
Enter 1 in command line. Change the trend interval, if necessary.

Zoom the line trend to get a closer display.
17
34
To see the CM in the Group display:
Click
Type 11 and press the Enter key.
button on Station.

4/13/2012
PID Control Module

Step
18
Action
From the Group Display, change the MD to MAN.
Change the OP to 30.
19
The PV will change because the OP changed. The SP follows the PV because PV
tracking is enabled
This tests your CM 11_FC01
In Control Builder, import (with CEE assignment) 11_FC02, 11_FC28 and 11_PC15 from
the following location:
17

Ixport\Student_DB\Series_A (or _C).
ATTENTION
If needed, follow the steps in the Import/Export Lab for
importing the above CMs.
If you are Using SIMC200E/C200E the path for Database
is
C:\ Users\Public\Public Documents\
Honeywell\Experion PKS\Ixport\Student_DB\Series_A
If you are Using SIMC300/C300, the path for Database is
C:\ Users\Public\Public Documents\
Honeywell\Experion PKS\Ixport\Student_DB\Series_C
20
4/13/2012
From Project, download (with activation) the CMs imported in the previous step.

35
PID Control Module

Step
Action
21
Verify that the three CMs are active (green) in the Monitoring tab.
22
Open Station and access the Debutanizer_123 graphic.
ATTENTION
Verify that the imported CMs have values. (If
necessary, place the imported loops in AUTO mode
and provide suitable SP values to see a PV response.)
36

4/13/2012
PID Control Module

Calculate Performance Statistics of the Configuration Performed (C200 & C300)
Calculate Performance Statistics of the Configuration Performed (C200

& C300)
Practice
Objective
To calculate the Processing Units and Memory units for given blocks for C200E, and C300.
Prerequisites
Knowledge of Memory Units and Process Units in C200E, and C300.
Introduction
This exercise will allow you to determine about Memory Units and Process Units used in
C200E, and C300.
17
4/13/2012

37
PID Control Module

Calculate Performance Statistics of the Configuration Performed (C200 & C300)
Procedure
Control Module Calculation
38
Step
Action
Calculate MU and PU for C200E, and C300.
If CM is build using 1AI, 1DACA, 1PID, and 1AO, 6 Logic FBs, total Memory Units
consume is______?
If CM is build using 1AI, 1DACA FB, Total Memory Units Consume is ______?
Calculate Processing Units (PU) for a typical Regulatory control CM with Execution
Period of .5 Sec _____?
Calculate Processing Units (PU) for a typical Analog Data Acquisition CM with Execution
Calculate Processing Units (PU) for 20 Analog Data Acquisition CM with Execution
Calculate Processing Units (PU) for 40 Regulatory control CM with Execution Period of
.5 Sec _____?
Where do you verify the Memory Units (MU) consumption in C300? _______
Calculate Processing Units (PU) for a typical Device control CM with Execution Period of
.1 Sec _____?
10
Calculate Processing Units (PU) for 50 Device control CM with Execution Period of .1
Sec _____?
11
Calculate Processing Units (PU) for 4 SCM with Execution Period of .1 Sec _____?
12
Calculate Memory Units (MU) for 40 Regulatory control CM _____?
13
Calculate Memory Units (MU) for 5 Auxiliary Function CM _____?
14
Calculate Memory Units (MU) for 10 Analog Data Acquisition CM _____?
15
Calculate Memory Units (MU) for 100 Device control CM _____?
16
Calculate Memory Units (MU) for 10 Logic control CM _____?

4/13/2012
Topic: PID with Split Range Control Module

Contents
18
Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs ...................................................................3
4/13/2012


4/13/2012

Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs

Practice
Objective
Configure a Split Range Control Module.
Configure an AUTOMANUAL and FANOUT block.
Prerequisites
Knowledge of Configuration Studio.
Experion PKS Server or client machine with Experion PKS Engineering Tools loaded.
The Debutanizer_123 graphics loaded on the Server. (This will be required at a later time to
check the control strategy.)
Control Builder running with one or two tree windows open.
SIM-C200E/C200E or SIM-C300/C300 Controller and IOMs configured.
Excel Data Exchange open with the simulation spread sheet loaded.
18
4/13/2012


Introduction
A reflux drum D-100 has a split range pressure controller 11_PC16. It controls the pressure on D100 by split range action on two valves, PV16A and PV16B, where PV16A is reverse acting and
PV16B is direct acting.
The following table illustrates how valves PC16A and PC16B open with the split range signal.
Valve PC16A is the valve on the line bypassing the debutanizer overhead condenser E-110. Valve
PC16B is on the line connecting D-100 to the compressor interstage drum, which provides a back
pressure of 240 kPag (35 psig). The flare has a backpressure of 14 kPag (2.0 psig).
Signal from 11_PC16
Valve
Condition
PC16A
Fully Open
50
PC16A
Closed
50
PC16B
Closed
100
PC16B
Fully Open
You will first import 11_HC41 (D-100 Overhead to Flare) and 11_HC44 (D-100 Bypass from
Compressor Interstage Drum), which are hand-control valves (Analog Output points).
The 11_PC16 control module is then built, and you can test the logic with simulation.
CM Name
Action to be taken
11_HC41 and 11_HC44
Import the CMs from existing database.
11_PC16 Split Range PID Control

Module
Configure PID block, Auto Manual (AUTOMAN)

block and FANOUT block.
Perform the following procedures in Control Builder.

4/13/2012

Procedure
Configure Split Range Control Loop
Step
1
Action
Import valves.
From Project, Import (with CEE assignment) the hand control valves 11_HC41 and
11_HC44 from the following location:
C:\ Users\Public\Public Documents \Honeywell\Experion PKS\
ATTENTION
18
If needed, follow the steps in the Import/Export Lab for

importing the above CMs.
4/13/2012


Step
2
Action
Build a new CM.
Drag a Control Module from the Library tab to the CEE in the Project window.
Drag here
In the Name New Function Block(s) window, enter:

Destination Tag Name: 11_PC16
Destination Item Name: 11_PC16_item
Click Finish
This adds 11_PC16 in the assigned tree in the Project Tree window.

4/13/2012

Step
4
Action
Expand the tree and double-click 11_PC16 to open the chart view.
Double-click the white space to open the Parameter Configuration form.
Enter the following details in the Main tab:
Parent Asset:
Tank_C11
Description:
Tank Pressure Controller
Engr Units:
KPaG
Accept the defaults for the remaining parameters on this tab.

5
Click the Server Displays tab and enter the following Display details:
sysDtlPIDA
Click OK.
ATTENTION
The Group detail display for 11_PC16 in Station will be
selected based on the type of Point detail display
specified
Design a control strategy by adding function blocks in the following sequence:

Block Family
Block Type
Block Name
Layout Key
IOCHANNEL (Series A) or
SERIES_C_IO AI-HL (Series C)
AICHANNEL
AICHANNELA
(A)
DATAACQ
DATAACQ
DATAACQA
(B)
REGCTL
PID
PIDA
(C)
REGCTL
FANOUT
FANOUTA
(D)
REGCTL
AUTOMAN
AUTOMANA
(E)
IOCHANNEL (Series A) or
AOCHANNEL
AOCHANNELA
(F)
AOCHANNEL
AOCHANNEL _1 (G)
SERIES_C_IO AO (Series C)
IOCHANNEL or
Letters in the layout key column correspond to the following diagram.
18
4/13/2012


Step
7
Action
After adding the blocks, arrange them as follows:
E
D
B
C
F
ATTENTION
using Series C I/O

4/13/2012

Step
Action
A
AICHANNELA is the pressure input channel.

Configuration details will be provided in the following steps.
DATAACQA block provides the signal conditioning for the input signal.
PIDA the PID controller for taking the control action.

FANOUTA block is a single X1 input and up to 8 outputs (Regulatory Control

block). The block applies a user-specified gain and bias along with a
calculated floating bias for each of up to 8 initialized outputs to guarantee that
each output is "bumpless" following initialization or mode changes.
1) In this CM, we are using the FANOUT block to send the same input
(11_PC16.PIDA.OP) to two outputs valves; PV16A and PV16B.
AUTOMANA: The (Auto Manual) block applies a user-specified gain and bias
along with a calculated floating bias to the output to guarantee that the output
is "bumpless" following initialization or mode changes.
2) In this CM, we are using AUTOMANA to reverse the output to the
PV16A which is a reverse acting valve.
AOCHANNELA is the output signal to valve PV16A.

AOCHANNELA_1 is the output signal to valve PV16B.

Configure the AI Channel (A).

Double-click the AICHANNELA block to open the AI parameter configuration form.
Enter following details:
PI
18
Channel Name:
4/13/2012


Step
9
Action
For C200E:
Step
1
Action
11_PC16.PI:
Module Name:
Channel Number:
In the properties of the AI channel (PI block), use the pulldown list to select the module name.
Click the OK button to close PI properties.
For C300:
Step
1
Action
Refer to Appendix 1 C300 I/O list assignments at the end
of Appendix for the following information on 11_PC16.PI:
Module Name:
Channel Number:
10
Click the OK button to close PI properties.
Right-click the AI channel (PI block) and select Function

Block Assign.

button.

4/13/2012

Step
10
11
Action
For C300 only, set the range of 11_PC16.PI as follows:
PV Extended Hi Range
1800
PV High Range
1750
PV Low Range
Configure the Data Acquisition Block (B).

Double-click the Data Acquisition Block to open the configuration form.
Name:
DACA
Description:
D-100 Pressure Controller
Engr Units:
kPag
PVEU Range Hi:
1750
PVEU Range Lo:
1800
PV Extended Lo Limits:
Accept the defaults for the remaining parameters.
18
Click OK.
4/13/2012

11

Step
12
Action
Configure the PID Block (C).
Double-click PIDA.
Name:
PIDA
Description:
D-100 Pressure controller
Engineering Units:
kPag
PVEU Range Hi:
1750
PVEU Range Low:
700
Enable Secondary
Initialization Option checkbox:
Select this option
Normal Mode and Mode:
AUTO
Normal Mode Attribute and Mode Attribute:
OPERATOR
Accept the defaults for all remaining values on this tab.
12

4/13/2012

Step
13
Action
Click the Algorithm tab in the PID configuration form.
Control Equation Type:
EQB
Control Action:
Direct
Integral Time (T1):
.2
LIN
Linear Gain Options :

.5
Overall Gain:
14
SP
700
High Limit:
1750
Low Limit:
700
Click the Alarms tab and enter the following details.

OP High Trip Point:
90
Priority: High
OP Low Trip Point:
Priority: Low
18
15
Click the SetPoint Tab and enter following details:
4/13/2012

13

Step
Action
16
Click OK.
17
Configure FANOUT Block (D):

Double-click on the FANOUTA block and enter following parameters:
Name:
FANOUTA
Description:
Split range Selection
Engineering Units:
kPag
High Limit:
100
Low Limit:
CAS
Normal Mode Attribute and Mode Attribute:
Operator
14

4/13/2012

Step
18
Action
Click the Block Pins tab.
Change the Location of the X1 pin to LEFT
Change the Location of the OP[1] pin to RIGHT
18
Change the Location of the OP[2] pin to RIGHT
4/13/2012

15

Step
19
Action
Click the Common Output tab.
In Output Limits section, enter the following values:
High Limit (%) : 100
Low Limit (%) : 0
16

4/13/2012

Step
20
Action
Click the Individual Output tab.
Output #1 and Output #2 Gain:
Output Bias for Output #2:
100
Ensure that the Enable Secondary Initialization Option checkboxes for Output #1 and
Output #2 are selected.
Deselect the Enable Secondary Initialization Option checkboxes for all other Outputs.
TIP
Each output of the FANOUT block is calculated per the
following equation:
CV(n) = X1*K(n) + [OPBIAS(n).FIX +
OPBIAS(n).FLOAT]
Where
X1 = input value
18
K(n) = gain of output CV(n) (user specified)

(n) = Output channel (number 1 to 8)
OPBIAS(n).FIX = fixed bias for output CV(n)
(user specified)
OPBIAS(n).FLOAT = floating bias for output
CV(n) (calculated)
Click OK to close the FANOUT block.
4/13/2012

17

Step
21
Action
Configure AUTOMANA block (E):
Double-click the AUTOMANA block and enter the following:
Name:
AUTOMANA
Description:
Split Range for PV16A
Engineering Units:
kPag
CAS
OPERATOR
Mode Attribute:
OPERATOR
Accept the defaults for all other parameters on this tab.
18

4/13/2012

Step
22
Action
Click the Output tab.
Enter the following details:
Output Limits section:
High Limit (%) :
100
Low Limit (%) :
Gain and Bias section:

Output Bias:
100
Gain(K):
-1 (Note: you will get an error until the low limit is changed)
Gain High Limit:
10
Gain Low Limit:
-5
18
Accept the defaults for all other parameters on this tab.
4/13/2012

19

Step
23
Action
Click on the Block Pins tab.
Change the Location X1 pin to LEFT.
Change the Location OP pin to RIGHT.
Click OK.
20

4/13/2012

Step
24
Action
Configure one of the AO Blocks (F):
Double-click the AOChannelA block and enter the following:
PVA
Name:
25
Click on the Block Pins Tab.
18
Change the Location OP pin to LEFT.
4/13/2012

21

Step
26
Action
Assign the AO Channel to an AO Module.
For C200E:
Step
1
Action
11_PC16.PVA:
Module Name:
Channel Number:
Click on the Main Tab.
In the properties of the AO channel (PVA block), use the

pull-down list to select the module name.
Click the OK button to close PVA properties.
For C300:
Step
1
Action
of Appendix for the following information on 11_PC16.PVA:
Module Name:
Channel Number:
22
Click the OK button to close PVA properties.
Right-click the AO channel (PVA block) and select Function

Block Assign.

button.

4/13/2012

Step
27
Action
Configure the other AO Block (G)
Double-click the AOChannelA_1 block and enter the following:
PVB
Name:
28
Click on the Block Pins Tab.
18
Change the Location OP pin to LEFT.
4/13/2012

23

Step
29
Action
Assign the AO Channel to an AO Module.
For C200E:
Step
1
Action
11_PC16.PVB:
Module Name:
Channel Number:
Click on the Main Tab.
In the properties of the AO channel (PVB block), use the

pull-down list to select the module name.
Click the OK button to close PVB properties.
For C300:
Step
5
Action
of Appendix for the following information on 11_PC16.PVB:
Module Name:
Channel Number:
24
Click the OK button to close PVB properties.
Right-click the AO channel (PVB block) and select Function

Block Assign.

button.

4/13/2012

Step
30
Action
Wire the connections as shown below :
If necessary, change the block pin positions from the Block Pin tab in the Configuration
detail form of each block.
ATTENTION
31
4/13/2012
18

using Series C I/O
Save the Project chart form.

25

Step
32
Action
Configure the History collection.
Double-click in a blank space of the 11_PC16 project chart to open the configuration
form.
Click the Server History Tab.
1.) Historize the following parameters as shown below:
11_PC16.PIDA.PV; 11_PC16.PIDA.OP; 11_PC16.PVA.OP & 11_PC16.PVB.OP
26

4/13/2012

Step
33
Action
Configure Trends and Groups.
Click Server Displays and add the following data:
Trend #
Pen # 3
Trend Parameter: 11_PC16.PIDA.PV
Group #
13
Pos # 3
Group Parameter: 11_PC16.PIDA.PV
Click OK.
35
Save and close the CM 11_PC16.

Select 11_PC16, 11_HC41, and 11_HC44 in the Project tree window and click the
button.
36
Click Continue in the Load Window.
37
Select the Automatically change . checkbox in the Load dialog box.
18
34
ATTENTION
The Post load state is selected as ACTIVE by default.
4/13/2012

27

Step
38
Action
Click OK to download.
ATTENTION
The download window closes automatically if the
configuration contains no warnings or errors.
39
Open the Debutanizer_123 graphic in Station.
40
Verify the 11_PC16 controller is in AUTO mode and enter a set point of 1170.
Select 11_HC41 and 11_HC44 and enter a 1 in the value input box.
ATTENTION
If the value of PV is not changing to the new SP, close the
Tie_Back_New Excel spreadsheet and re-open it.
Notice 11_PC16 SP is 1170 and the PV value is adjusting to the SP.
28

4/13/2012

Step
Go to Group 13 to view the details of 11_PC16:
18
41
Action
4/13/2012

29

Step
42
Action
Change the SP to 1180.
The controller takes the new SP value and increases the PV towards the SP as shown
below:
You can watch the change by going to Trend number 3 on Station.

43
30
Change the SP to 935 and let 11_PC16 control to the new SP.

4/13/2012

Step
44
Action
Open Control Builder in the Monitoring Mode.
Double-click 11_PC16 to open the chart view as shown below:
In the above example, PIDA OP is 51.73, that is, its between 50 and 100%.
Based on the logic, PVA is CLOSED (OP= 0)
PVB is OPENED (OP = 3.47)
18
ATTENTION
Values seen in this figure may differ from that seen on
your screen
4/13/2012

31

Step
45
Action
Change PIDA to MAN Mode and change OP to 50%.
PVA and PVB are both closed.
Change PIDA OP to 0%
PVA will OPEN 100%.
PVB is CLOSED.
Change PIDA OP as 100%
46
32
PVA will CLOSE.
PVB will OPEN 100%.
Change the PIDA mode back to AUTO.

4/13/2012
Topic: Cascade PID Control Module

Contents
19
Configure a Cascade PID Control Module ............................................................................................3
4/13/2012


4/13/2012


Practice
Objective
Configure a cascade controller for the T-100 bottom level control.
Prerequisites
Experion PKS Server or a Client machine with Experion PKS Engineering Tools loaded
The Debutanizer_123 graphic loaded on the Server (This is required at a later time to check
the control strategy.)
Control Builder running with one or two Project/Monitor tree windows open
SIM-C200E/C200E, or SIM-C300/C300 Controller and IOMs configured
Excel Data Exchange open with the simulation spread sheet loaded
19
4/13/2012


Introduction
The first Cascade loop built is 11_LC14, the T-100 bottom level control. Although the loop has two
secondaries, 11_FC17 and 11_FC18, in this lab the cascade is built with just 11_FC17. 11_ FC18 is
configured in the next lab.
The P&ID shows that this loop has an interlock with the bottom safety valve and is the primary to
both outlet streams (11_FC17 and 11_FC18).
LSD15 is driven by interlock logic. The interlock (11_LSD15) will be imported into the project.
The cascade loop, with 11_LC14 as primary and 11_FC17 as secondary, will be built, and
downloaded in this lab. However, the functionality will be tested after the next lab when 11_FC18
is added to project. The loops require a bumpless transfer from MAN to AUTO to CAS.
The following CMs will be configured:

CM Name
Action to be taken
11_LC14 & 11_FC17
Configure as a simple cascade loop.
11_LSD15
Imported from:
Experion PKS\IXPORT\Student_DB\Series_A (or
_C)
Modify 11_LC14
Add logic to check when level goes above 5%.

4/13/2012

Procedure
Step
Action
Open Control Builder from Configuration Studio, if not already open.
Open the Project tree window in the upper left hand corner and the Library tree window
in the lower left hand corner.
19
4/13/2012


Step
3
Action
Build a new CM.
Drag a Control Module from the Library tab to the CEE in the Project window
Drag here
ATTENTION
This creates a new Control Module and also assigns the CM
to the CEE.

4/13/2012

Step
4
Action
Enter 11_LC14 in the Destination Tagnames textbox and 11_LC14_Item in the
Destination Item Names textbox.
19
Click Finish.
4/13/2012


Step
5
Action
Configure the parameters for 11_LC14.
Open 11_LC14 in Chart View.
Double-click the chart view to open the configuration form.
Enter the following details under the Main tab.
Name:
11_LC14
Item Name:
11_LC14_item
Parent Asset:
Level_C11
Description
T-100 Debutanizer Bottom Lvl Controller
Engr Units:
Click the Server Displays tab and enter the following display details:
sysDtlPIDA
Click OK.
ATTENTION
The Group detail display for 11_LC14 in Station will be directly
picked from the type of Point detail display specified.

4/13/2012


After creating the CM, design a control strategy by adding relevant Input/Output blocks and Control
blocks (like PID, device control, or logic blocks).
The IOMs configured in the Configure C200E Hardware and Series A IOM / Configure C300 Hardware and
Series C IOM lab are used here.
Step
Action
Add the following function blocks from the Library tab of Control Builder according to the
sequence shown below.
Block
Family Block
IOCHANNEL or
SERIES_C_IO AI-HL AICHANNELA (A)
DATAACQ
DATAACQ
(B)
REGCTL
PID
(C)
CM 11_LC14 should resemble the following diagram:
19
ATTENTION
The screen capture might look different if you are using Series C I/O
4/13/2012


Step
2
Action
Configure the AI Channel.
Double-click the AI Channel block to open the configuration form
LI
Name:
3
Assign the AI Channel to the AI Module.

For C200E:
Step
1
Action
11_LC14.LI:
Module Name:
Channel Number:
In the properties of the AI channel (LI block), use the pulldown list to select the module name.
Click the OK button to close LI properties.
For C300:
Step
1
Action
of Appendix for the following information on 11_LC14.LI:
Module Name:
Channel Number:
10
Click the OK button to close LI properties.
Right-click the AI channel (LI block) and select Function

Block Assign.

button.

4/13/2012

Step
4
Action
Configure a Data Acquisition Block (B).
Double-click the Data Acquisition Block to open the configuration form.
Name:
DACA
Description:
T-100 Debutanizer Bottom Level
Engr Units:
PV Character
LINEAR
PVEU Range Hi:
100
PVEU Range Lo:
102.9
PV Extended Lo Limit:
-2.9
Clamping Option:
ENABLE
19
4/13/2012

11

Step
5
Action
Configure Alarms for the DACA Block.
Click the Alarms tab.
PV High Trip Point:
98
Priority: HIGH
PV Low Trip Point:
Priority: LOW
Accept the defaults for any remaining parameters.

Click OK.
12

4/13/2012

Step
6
Action
Configure a PID Block (C).
Double-click PIDA.
Name:
PIDA
Description:
T-100 Debutanizer Bottom Level
Engineering Units:
PVEU Range Hi:
100
PVEU Range Low:
Enable Secondary
Initialization Option checkbox:
Check
Normal Mode:
AUTO
OPERATOR
19
4/13/2012

13

Step
7
Action
Click the Algorithm tab in the PID configuration form
Enter the following details :
EQB
Control Action:
DIRECT
Integral Time (T1):
0.4
LIN
Overall Gain:
0.4
Click the SetPoint tab.

Enter the following details :
14
High Limit:
100
Low Limit:

4/13/2012

Step
9
Action
OP High Trip Point:
98
Priority:
HIGH
OP Low Trip Point:
Priority:
LOW
10
Click the Output tab

In the Control Variable section enter the following:
CVEU Range Hi:
385
CVEU Range Low:
For a primary loop the CVEU limits are the range limits of the secondary
controller PV.
19
Click OK.
4/13/2012

15

Step
11
Action
Arrange the function blocks as shown.
If necessary, change the block pin positions from the Block Pin tab in the Configuration
detail form of each block.
Connect the block pins as shown.
Save and Close 11_LC14.
ATTENTION
The screen capture might look different if you are using Series C I/O
12
Configure 11_FC17.
The following procedure configures 11_FC17 by copying then modifying 11_LC14.
Right-click 11_LC14 in Project tree.
Select the Copy option.
Enter:
11_FC17
Destination Item Names: 11_FC17_item
Click Next (or Finish).
16

4/13/2012

Step
13
Action
A message opens indicating that the channel assignment will not be retained.
(You may or may not get this dialog box.)
Click Finish.
ATTENTION
Copying a CM retains all the blocks and connections except channel
assignments.
14
Assign 11_FC17 to CEESCEFB61 (or SIM_CEEC300).

Hint: Use the
(Assign) button
15
Double-click 11_FC17 under CEESCEFB61 (For SIM-C200E) or SIM_CEEC300 (For

SIM-C300) to open the chart view.
16
Double-click the AICHANNEL (LI) block.

FT
Name:
17
For C300s ONLY:

Change the ranges of the FT block as follows:
PV Extended High Range 390
385
PV Low Range
-9.6
19
PV High Range
4/13/2012

17

Step
18
Action
For C200E:
Step
1
Action
11_FC17.FT:
Module Name:
Channel Number:
In the properties of the AI channel (FT block), use the pulldown list to select the module name.
Click the OK button to close FT properties.
For C300:
Step
1
Action
of Appendix for the following information on 11_FC17.FT:
Module Name:
Channel Number:
18
Click the OK button to close FT properties.
Right-click the AI channel (FT block) and select Function

Block Assign.

button.

4/13/2012

Step
19
Action
Configure the DACA Block.
Double-click the DACA block.
Enter following:
Name:
DACA
Description:
T-100 Bottom to Storage Tank
Engr Units:
m3/hr
PV Character:
None
PVEU RangeHi:
385
PVEU Range Lo:
PV Extended Limits Hi:
390
PV Extended Limits Lo:
-9.6
Clamping Option:
ENABLE
19
4/13/2012

19

Step
20
Action
Change the alarm setting as given below :
PV High Trip Point: 375
Priority: LOW
Click OK.
20

4/13/2012

Step
21
Action
Configure a PID function block.
Double-click PIDA.
Name:
PIDA
Description:
T-100 Bottom to Storage Tank Flow
Engineering Units:
m3/hr
PVEU Range Hi:
385
PVEU Range Low:
Enable Secondary Initialization

Option checkbox:
Check
CAS
NONE
Mode Attribute :
OPERATOR
19
4/13/2012

21

Step
22
Action
Click the Algorithm tab in the PID confiuration form.
23
EQB
Control Action:
REVERSE
Integral Time (T1):
0.8
LIN
Overall gain:
0.22
Click the SetPoint tab.

24
High Limit:
385
Low Limit:

OP High:
98
OP Low:
Leave the priority settings unchanged.

Click OK.
22

4/13/2012

Step
25
Action
ADD an AO Channel from the Library tab
IOCHANNEL > AOCHANNEL (Series A) or
Double-click AOCHANNELA.
FY
19
Channel Name:
4/13/2012

23

Step
26
Action
Assign the AO block to an AO channel.
For C200E:
Step
1
Action
11_FC17.FY:
Module Name:
Channel Number:
In the properties of the AO channel (FY block), use the pulldown list to select the module name.
Click the OK button to close FY properties.
For C300:
Step
1
Action
of Appendix for the following information on 11_FC17.FY:
Module Name:
Channel Number:
24
Click the OK button to close FY properties.
Right-click the AO channel (FY block) and select Function

Block Assign.

button.

4/13/2012

Step
27
28
Action
Wire 11_FC17.PIDA.OP to 11_FC17.FY.OP.
Select Chart > Insert > Parameter Connector or click the
button on the toolbar.
Add 11_LC14.PIDA.OP to 11_FC17.PIDA.SP with a parameter connection as shown

below.
For detailed instructions, go to Knowledge Builder:
Experion R400 > Configuration > Control Building Users Guide > Control Builder
Operations >Creating a control module>Connecting and Disconnecting Blocks >
Connecting Blocks with Parameter Connector Option.
This connection configures the 11_FC17 controller as a secondary controller

receiving the set point from the primary controller, 11_LC14. That is why the normal
mode of the 11_FC17 PID block is defined as cascade
19
ATTENTION
using Series C I/O
4/13/2012

25

Step
Action
29
Save 11_FC17.
30
Configure History collection.

Double-click in the blank space of the 11_FC17 Project chart window to open the
configuration form.
Click the Server History tab.
Historize the following parameters :
11_FC17.PIDA.PV
11_FC17.PIDA.OP
Enable the checkboxes FAST and STD history for the point parameters.
26

4/13/2012

Step
31
Action
Configure the following:
Trend # 4, Pen 4, Add parameter 11_FC17.PIDA.PV
Group # 11, Pos # 4, Add parameter 11_FC17.PIDA.OP
Click OK.
Save and Close 11_FC17.
19
32
4/13/2012

27

Add Logic to 11_LC14 to check if the level is greater than 5%

Logic blocks are added to 11_LC14 to check if the level in T-100 is greater than 5%.
Step
Action
Open 11_LC14 in chart view.
Add the following function blocks from the Library tab of Control Builder according to the
following sequence:
Block Family
Block
LOGIC
GE
(D)
UTILITY
NUMERIC
(E)
(D) = GE: This Greater than or Equal to block checks if the designated input (IN[1]) is
greater than or equal to a second input (IN[2])
Use the GE to check if the T-100 level is greater than 5% by checking the
level with a fixed value of 5 given in the numeric block
The output of GE is further used in the interlock logic of 11_LSD15, which is

imported later
(E) = NUMERIC: This NUMERIC block stores up to 8 bytes of floating point values
within a defined upper and lower limit for use in a control strategy. We will use the
numeric to hold a fixed value for the GE block to use as an input
Configure the GE block.

Double-click the GE function block.
Verify the parameters as shown below. Accept the defaults for any remaining
parameters.
Click OK.
28

4/13/2012

Step
4
Action
Double-click the NUMERICA function block.
Name:
LL_Comparator
Actual Value:
19
Click OK.
4/13/2012

29

Step
5
Action
Arrange the parameter connector wire, 11_LC14.DACA.PV, to IN[1] in the GEA block
Arrange the PV pin wire of the NUMERICA block to the IN[2] of the GEA Block.
30
When 11_LC14.DACA.PV is >= 5, the OUT pin of GEA block is set ON. This pin is
used in the logic of 11_LSD15 to reset an Open/Closed flag
Save the CM.

4/13/2012

Step
7
Action
Configure History Collection.
Double-click a blank space in the 11_LC14 Project chart window, to open the
configuration form.
Click the Server History Tab.
Historize the following parameters:
11_LC14.PIDA.PV
11_LC14.PIDA.OP
11_LC14.GEA.OUT

Trends section
Trend # 1, Pen 3, Add parameter 11_LC14.PIDA.PV
Groups section
Group # 11, Pos # 3, Add parameter 11_LC14.PIDA.OP
19
Click OK.
4/13/2012

31

Step
Action
Save and Close 11_LC14.
10
Import (with CEE assignment) CM 11_LSD15 from:

C:\ Users\Public\Public Documents\Honeywell\Experion PKS
\IXPORT\Student_DB\Series_A (or _C)
ATTENTION
In the next lab, you will import a calculation Control Module that
will provide additional process connections and the simulation
required for 11_LC14.
If you are Using SIMC200E/C200E the path for Database is
C:\ Users\Public\Public Documents\Honeywell\
Experion PKS\IXPORT\Student_DB\Series_A
If you are Using SIMC300/C300 the path for Database is
Experion PKS\IXPORT\Student_DB\Series_C
11
Open the Project tree, select 11_FC17, 11_LC14, and 11_LSD15 with the <CTRL> key
and click
32
in the toolbar to download the three CMs.
Click Continue in the Load window
Select the Automatically change. checkbox and click OK.
After downloading, select the Monitoring tab and verify all the CMs are active
(green)

4/13/2012

Step
12
Action
Open the Debutanizer_123 graphic in Station and observe the T-100 bottom level
points.
Using the Open HV39 combo box, select ON. This will allow the 11_LSD15 valve to
open when the level is greater than 5%.
19
13
Change the mode of 11_LC14 to Normal and then observe the changing PV
4/13/2012

33

Step
14
Action
Change the 11_FC17 flow controller to MAN mode and double-click the SP value of
11_LC14 to open the Point Detail page.
Observe that the Primary Controller 11_LC14 has now changed to INIT (the indication
appears next to the OP value, as shown below). Whenever the Secondary Controller is
not in Cascade Mode, initialization will be indicated as shown on the Primary Controller.
34

4/13/2012
Topic: Cascade PID with Two Secondaries

Contents
4/13/2012

20
Configure a Cascade PID CM with Two Secondaries ...........................................................................3

4/13/2012

Configure a Cascade PID CM with Two Secondaries

Practice
Objective
Configure a Cascade Loop with one primary and two secondaries for T-100 bottom level
control
Configure a FANOUT block to connect the primary controllers output to the setpoint of
two secondary controllers
Configure an Auxcalc function block to calculate the flow at the outlet of T-100
Experion PKS Server or a client machine with Experion PKS Engineering Tools loaded
Debutanizer_123 graphic loaded on the Server (This is required at a later time to check the
control strategy.)
SIM-C200E/C200E or SIM-C300/C300 Controller and IOMs configured
Excel Data Exchange open with the simulation spreadsheet loaded
4/13/2012

20
Prerequisites

Introduction
In this lab, the 11_FC18 loop is added as a secondary to the 11_LC14 loop built in the previous lab.
Similar considerations of operation apply; the loops require bumpless transfer from MAN to AUTO
or CAS.
In addition, the ratio of the flow of 11_FC17 and 11_FC18 is 70:30

The Control Module built in the previous lab will be modified, downloaded, and tested
The remaining Control Modules will then be imported into Project, downloaded and activated
The following CMs will be configured:
CM Name
Action to be taken
11_LC14
Modify this CM to add a FANOUT block, used to connect the

output to two secondary controllers and maintain a fixed flow
ratio between the two controller outputs.
11_FC17
Connect parameter 11_LC14.FANOUTA.OP(1) to

11_FC17.PIDA.SP.
11_FC18
Copy and modify 11_FC17 as 11_FC18 and connect

11_LC14.FANOUTA.OP(2) to 11_FC18.PIDA.SP.
Add an Auxcalc block for adding the flow through 11_FC17 and
11_FC18.
11_AC12; 11_FC15;
11_FC19; 11_FC20;
11_LC16; 11_TC10
Import these CMs from:

Experion PKS\IXPORT\Student_DB\Series_A (or _C)

4/13/2012


Step
Action
Open Control Builder from Configuration Studio, if not already open.
Double-click CM 11_FC17, to open the chart view in the Project window.
Delete the the wiring which connects 11_LC14.PIDA.OP (Parameter Connector) to

11_FC17.PIDA.SP.
11_FC17 will be as follows:
ATTENTION
This is to facilitate the connection of the FANOUT
block to the 11_LC14.PIDA.OP.
4/13/2012

20
The AI and AO channel block might look different if

you are using Series C I/O

Step
Action
From the Project tab, double-click 11_LC14 to open the Chart view.
Select the Library Tree window.
Add the following block to CM 11_LC14.
Block Family
Block
REGCTL
FANOUT
Double-click the FANOUTA block.

Name:
FANOUTA
Description:
T-100 Debutanizer bottoms
High Limit:
385
Normal Mode:
CAS
Mode:
CAS
Mode Attribute:
OPERATOR

4/13/2012

Step
9
Action
Click the Individual Output tab.
Output #1 Gain:
0.7 (Op1 will be 70% of the input signal.)
Output #2 Gain:
0.3 (Op2 will be 30% of the input signal.)
Verify the Enable Secondary Initialization Option checkboxes are selected for Output
#1 and Output #2.
Clear the checkboxes for all other outputs.
Click OK.
ATTENTION
4/13/2012

20
Output Gain values are not accessible through

graphics. If they need an online change, use the
Monitoring mode in Control Builder. This is explained
later in this module.

Step
10
Action
Wire 11_LC14.PIDA.OP to 11_LC14.FANOUTA.X1.
CM 11_LC14 should appear similar to the one shown below
Change the Block pin positions, if required
ATTENTION
In this picture the GEA and Numeric block are not shown.
11
Save and Close the CM.
12
Double-click 11_FC17 to open the Chart view.

4/13/2012

Step
4/13/2012
Action
13
Wire parameter 11_LC14.FANOUTA.OP[1] to 11_FC17.PIDA.SP with the parameter

connector, as shown below:
14
15
Right-click 11_FC17 in the Project tab and select copy.
Enter the Destination Tagname 11_FC18 and Destination Item Names

11_FC18_Item
Click the Next button.
Copying retains all the function blocks and parameters except the Input and
Output channel assignments (you may get a dialog box indicating the NonRetained items).
If the following error appears, Click Close.

20

Step
16
Action
Assign 11_FC18 to CEESCEFB61 (or SIM_CEEC300).
ATTENTION
When copying a CM, the new CM gets put in Unassigned.
17
Open chart view for 11_FC18.
18
Configure the AIChannel block.

Double-click the AIChannel named FT
Channel Name:
19
FI
Refer to the appropriate (C200E or C300) table at the end of Appendix to determine the
correct module and channel for 11_FC18.FI.
For C200E:
Assign 11_FC18.FI to the appropriate module and channel.
Close the properties of the FI block.
For C300:
Close the properties of the FI block.
Assign 11_FC18.FI to the appropriate module and channel.
20
Configure the AOChannel block.

Double-click the AOChannel named FY
Channel Name:
21
FV
correct module and channel for 11_FC18.FV.
For C200E:
Assign 11_FC18.FV to the appropriate module and channel.
Close the properties of the FV block.
For C300:
Close the properties of the FV block.
Assign 11_FC18.FV to the appropriate module and channel.
10

4/13/2012

Step
22
Action
Modify the PID block.
In the Algorithm tab, change T1 to 0.9 and the Overall Gain to 0.2
Click OK.
23
24
25
Wire the parameter 11_LC14.FANOUTA.OP [2] to 11_FC18.PIDA.SP with a parameter

connector, as shown below.
Click
icon to Save 11_FC18 CM.
Add an AUXCALC block to 11_FC18.
4/13/2012
Block Family
Block
AUXILIARY
AUXCALC

11
20
Select the Library tab and add the following function block.

Step
26
Action
Double-click the AUXCALCA block.
Name:
FLOW_CALC
Description:
T-100 Bottom Flow
Engr Units:
m3/hr
Assignable Outputs PV Selection : C[1]

12

4/13/2012

Step
27
Action
Add new pins to the FLOW_CALC block.
Click the Block Pins tab.
Select P from the Parameters window.
Select the Pin Position as Input.
Select the Array Indices as 1 for P[1] and then Add parameter P[1], as shown below.
Select the Array Indices as 2 for P[2] and then Add parameter P[2], as shown below.
Change the Location of the Pins, as shown in the display.
Click OK.
ATTENTION
4/13/2012

13
20
The AUXCALC block evaluates user-defined expressions

and conditions for calculations. You can write up to eight
expressions. Each expression can contain any valid
combination of inputs, operators and functions, and may
perform arithmetic or logic operations. Optionally, the
AUXCALC can accept up to six inputs. In this lab, the
block provides a total flow value.

Step
28
Action
Add the following parameter connectors to the Flow_Calc block.
11_FC17.DACA.PV to P[1] pin.
11_FC18.DACA.PV to P[2] pin.
ATTENTION
The AUXCALC block has access to all parameters for all
points, so the above two parameters were not needed as
inputs to the AUXCALC Block. The parameters could have
been referenced directly by the expression. The inputs
were added only so they would be visible from the chart.
14

4/13/2012

Step
29
Action
Add expressions to the block.
Double-click Flow_CALC.
Select the EXPRN #1 tab.
Enter the following expression, using the Points button, to open the Point Selection
dialog:
11_FC17.DACA.PV + 11_FC18.DACA.PV
Click OK.
4/13/2012
Save and Close the CM.

15
20
30

Step
Action
31
Download and activate 11_FC17, 11_FC18 and 11_LC14.
32
In the Monitoring tab, open chart view for 11_LC14.
33
Double click on the FANOUTA block to open the parameter configuration form and verify
that the gain values under the Individual Output tab are as shown:
Output#1 = 0.7
Output#2 = 0.3
If not, change the values as above.
Click OK.
16

4/13/2012

Step
34
Action
Open the Debutanizer_123 graphic on the Station. If it is already open, refresh the
display by clicking the Reload Page
button at the top of the Station application
window.
Find the T-100 bottom level control loop and valves.
Set the 11_LC14 controller to NORMAL mode.
Set 11_LC14 SP = 60. After stabilizing (about 5 minutes), 11_LC14 is controlling

the level of T-100.
In the above example, the SP of 11_FC17 is 119.78 and the SP value of 11_FC18 is
51.33.
119.78 + 51.33 = 171.11
119.78 / 171.11 = 0.7
51.33 / 171.11 = 0.3
Click the SP value of 11_LC14 to call up the faceplate.

Double click on 11_LC14 faceplate to open the detail display.
Click on the Chart tab to see the CM logic.
Observe the PIDA.OP value.
ATTENTION
The Tie_Back_New excel sheet should be open to observe the values
for PV, SP.
4/13/2012

17
20
If the values are not updating then restart the Tie_Back_New excel
sheet. This sheet is used for simulation purposes.

Step
35
36
18
Action
The 11_LC14.PIDA.OP is divided in a ratio of 70:30 between OP[1] and OP[2] of the
FANOUT block
In the display shown below, the Output of 11_LC14.PIDA.OP is 44.4559 and OP[1]
is 31.1204 and OP[2] is 13.3368
In either Station (detail display) or Control Builder Monitoring tab, open the chart
view for 11_FC17 and observe the SP as shown below:
In the above example, the SP is 119.7865, which is 70% of the required flow
169.0143

4/13/2012

Step
37
38
4/13/2012
Action
Similarly, observe the details of the 11_FC18 controller as shown below
In this example, the SP is 51.3326, which is approximately 30% of the required flow
169.0143
Change the SP of 11_LC14 to 62 and observe the effects on the three controllers as
shown below.

19
20

Step
39
Action
Import (with CEE assignment), download, and activate the following CMs:
11_AC12
11_FC15
11_FC19
11_FC20
11_LC16
11_TC10
These CMs are the remaining pre-built Cascade Loops shown on the
Debutanizer_123 graphic. They can be imported from the following location:
ATTENTION
Follow the procedures in the Import/Export Lab, if you
need a refresher.
If you are Using SIMC200E/C200E the path for Database
is
Experion PKS\IXPORT\Student_DB\Series_A
Experion PKS\IXPORT\Student_DB\Series_C
20

4/13/2012
21
Describe Output Reversal and Red Tag

Indication Options
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.Describe Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication Options
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Big Picture CTLACTN and OPTDIR
PV
ATO
(Fail Closed)
SP
CtlActn
CV
OP
OPFinal
OptDir
ATC
(Fail Open)
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Big Picture - OUTIND
PV
ATO
(Fail Closed)
SP
CtlActn
OP
CV
OPFinal
OptDir
OutInd
ATC
(Fail Open)
OP
DirectDispInd
OP = 100%
ReverseDispInd
OP = 100%
OP = 0%
OP = 0%
Direct
OP = 100%
CV = 100%
CV = 0%
Reverse
OP = 100%
OP = 0%
CV = 0%
CV = 100%
OP = 0%
Operator
SCM
Output Parameter Selections Depend On
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Process
Ex: controlling level by controlling feed flow or drain flow?
Type of final control element

Ex: ATO or ATC? What position is safe?
Desired representation of valve on screen

Ex: Valve OPEN shown as 0% or 100% ?
4/13/2012
21
Honeywell
Introduction
OUTIND parameter for RegCtl blocks
OP indication can be visible on detail display pages and on faceplates
OP Indication
4/13/2012
Honeywell
OUTIND Values
The following table shows the possible values of OUTIND
Direct
No value reversal; No display indicators
Reverse
Value reversal; No display indicators
DirectDispInd
No value reversal; Shows display indicators with 0% as closed

and 100% as open
ReverseDispInd
No value reversal; Shows reverse display indicators with 0% as

open and 100% as closed
4/13/2012
Honeywell
DirectDispInd
OUTIND = DIRECTDISPIND
DirectDispInd
No value reversal
Display indicators shown
100% indicates Open (Hollow)
0% indicates Closed (Filled)
Example:
PID OUTIND: DirectDispInd

AO Channel OPTDIR: Direct
PID OP 100% (20 mA) valve Open
PID OP 0% (4 mA) valve Closed
Unpowered state of AO results in 0 mA
and the valve will be Closed
4/13/2012
Honeywell
ReverseDispInd
OUTIND = REVERSEDISPIND
ReverseDispInd
No value reversal on bar

Display indicators shown
100% indicates Closed (Filled)
0% indicates Open (Hollow)
Example:
PID OUTIND: ReverseDispInd

AO Channel OPTDIR: Direct
PID OP 100% (20 mA) valve Closed
PID OP 0% (4 mA) valve Open
Unpowered state of AO results in 0 mA
and the valve will be Open
4/13/2012
21
Honeywell
Affected Regulatory Control Blocks

OUTIND is specific to the blocks shown
Blocks affected
AUTOMAN, FANOUT, ENHREGCALC, OVRDSEL, PID, PIDPL, PIDER,

PIDFF, RAMPSOAK, RATIOBIAS, RATIOCTL, REGCALC
Reverse OUTIND option

is NOT supported by
RAMPSOAK, PIDER
OUTIND has no affect on a blocks control operation

CTLACTN: Control Action still specifies the output direction of a PID
function block
OPDIR: Defines the output action to be applied to the conversion of OP to
OPFINAL
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Affected Parameters
OUTIND = Reverse
OUTIND = Reverse,
affects OP-related
parameters
OP, OPEU, OPHILM, OPEXHILM, OPLOLM, OPEXLOLM, OPHIALM.TP,

OPLOALM.TP, OPHIALM.PR, OPLOALM.PR, OPHIALM.FL, OPEXHIFL,
OPLOALM.FL, OPEXLOFL, OPHIFL, OPLOFL, OPHIALM.SV, OPLOALM.SV,
OPHIALM.TM, OPHIALM.DB, OPHIALM.DBU, OPLOALM.TM,
OPLOALM.DB and OPLOALM.DBU
Reversal supported for

additional parameters
SAFEOP, OPROCPOSFL, OPROCNNEGFL

STARTVAL (Only when STARTOPT is FixedOp)
STOPVAL (Only when STOPOPT is FixedOp)
HOLDVAL (Only when HOLDOPT is FixedOp)
Parameters NOT affected when OUTIND = Reverse

Anti-Reset Windup Status on Output (ARWOP)
Windup parameters (ARWNET/ARWNETIN/ARWOPIN)
10
4/13/2012
Honeywell
OP Limits - Direct
OP Indication: Direct
When OUTIND = Direct
OPHILM = 102.00
OPEXHILM = 102.90
OPLOLM = -3.00
OPEXLOLM = -5.90
4/13/2012
11
Honeywell
OP Limits - Reverse
OP Indication: Reverse
When OUTIND = Reverse
OPEXHILM = 100.00 Actual OPEXLOLM

OPHILM = 100.00 Actual OPLOLM
OPLOLM = 100.00 Actual OPHILM
OPEXLOLM = 100.00 Actual OPEXHILM
[100.00
[100.00
[100.00
[100.00
(-5.90) = 105.90]
(-3.00) = 103.00]
(102.00) = -2.00]
(102.90) = -2.90]
12
4/13/2012
21
Honeywell
OP Alarm Limits - Direct
OP Indication: Direct
When OUTIND = Direct

OPHIALM.TP = 98.00
OPLOALM.TP = 12.00
OPHIALM.PR = LOW
OPLOALM.PR = HIGH
4/13/2012
13
Honeywell
OP Alarm Limits - Reverse
OP Indication: Reverse
When OUTIND = Reverse

OPHIALM.TP = 100.00 Actual OPLOALM.TP [100.00 12.00 = 88.00]
OPLOALM.TP = 100.00 Actual OPHIALM.TP
[100.00 98.00 = 2.00]
14
4/13/2012
Other Parameters Affected When OUTIND=Reverse
Honeywell
Parameter
Value when OUTIND = Reverse
OPHIFL & OPLOFL
Reverse of actual OPHIFL & OPLOFL
OPHIALM.PR; OPHIALM.SV
Reverse of actual OPHIALM.PR; OPHIALM.SV
OPLOALM.PR; OPLOALM.SV
Reverse of actual OPLOALM.PR; OPLOALM.SV
OPHIALM.FL
Reverse of actual OPHIALM.FL
OPLOALM.FL
Reverse of actual OPLOALM.FL
OPHIALM.DB/DBU/TM
Reverse of actual OPHIALM.DB/DBU/TM
OPLOALM.DB/DBU/TM
Reverse of actual OPLOALM.DB/DBU/TM
OPROCPOSFL
Reverse of Actual OPROCPOSFL
OPROCNNEGFL
Reverse of Actual OPROCNNEGFL
100 Actual STOPVAL
100 Actual STARTVAL
15
Honeywell
Experion OP Alarms
OUTIND = Direct
OUTIND = Reverse
4/13/2012
Alarm Summary shows the limit and value that were reversed
OP values are reversed when displayed
Values of high alarms and low alarms are swapped
16
4/13/2012
21
Applications Affected When OUTIND = Reverse
Honeywell
The following applications are affected when OUTIND = Reverse
Sequential Control Modules (SCMs)

Custom Algorithm Blocks (CAB)
HMIWeb Displays
Server Scripts
The following applications need modification since they obtain the

reversed or swapped OP values when OUTIND = Reverse
SCMs, CAB programs, Schematics, and Scripts obtain data from the CEE
Applications and Schematics that use the OP alarming parameters
Application interfaces using Control Environment OP alarm dead-band and
timer values
Peer-to-peer communication
Applications and schematics that only use ARWOP do not need to be

modified
4/13/2012
17
RedTag
Honeywell
RedTag:
Set from the Point Detail Display
Shows that the function block is
out of service
Indicates that the FB or
associated control strategy
needs repair or maintenance
Requires
ENGR access
Freezes the output and mode

from Operator access
RedTag
indication on
faceplate
Callout Message zone displays

FB is Red Tagged if user tries
to change the output
Supported in CEE and EHG
18
4/13/2012
Primary Indication of RedTag on Secondary
Honeywell
If Primary loop is cascaded and the Secondary loop is RedTagged, the

Primary loop indicates a Red Lock Symbol with a Plus Sign
Indicates that the secondary loop is Out of service
4/13/2012
19
Honeywell
OperatorTag
OperatorTag:
Allows an Operator to indicate

that the loop is under repair or
having maintenance performed
Does not freeze the output or
mode from Operator action
Gives a description of up to 15
characters while loop is tagged
Is indicated by a graphical
symbol adjacent to OP
Supported in CEE
OperatorTag
description
20
10
4/13/2012
21
Honeywell
Summary
OP indication can be visible on detail displays and faceplates
OUTIND (Output Indication) added to Regulatory Control Points to indicate

valve direction. Specifies how the OP parameter is accessed and whether
display indications will be shown on the blocks faceplate (DirectDispInd)
OUTIND can reverse the OP related values read and displayed when set
to Reverse (ReverseDispInd)
RedTag functionality is supported in EHG and CEE blocks

RedTag indication is shown when the function block is out of service and
freezes the output and mode from Operator access
OperatorTag functionality is supported in CEE blocks

Operator Tag can be set by an operator to indicate there is maintenance
on-going for a loop but does not freeze the output or mode
21
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Conclusion
Describe Output Reversal and RedTag

Indication Options
Completion
Certificate
Proceed to the Configure a Control Loop for RedTag Indication

lab exercise
22
11
4/13/2012

21
Topic: Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication

Contents
Configure a Control Loop for OP Reversal Indications .........................................................................3
Configure a Control Loop for Red Tag Indication ................................................................................11
4/13/2012


4/13/2012
21

Configure a Control Loop for OP Reversal Indications

Practice
The Purpose of this Lab is to see the results of configuring the Output Indication (OUTIND)
parameter for RegCtl Blocks.
Prerequisites
Experion engineering and Server Node.
FTE Topology
SIM-C200E/C200E or SIM-C300/C300 Controller and IOMs configured
Experion PKS Software Package.
Introduction
An Output Indication (OUTIND) parameter is added in RegCtl for indicating faceplate Display as
Direct, Reverse or not indicated in any Special manner. It provides consistency with reverse output
parameter
4/13/2012


Procedure
Create configuration for Reverse Input
Step
1
Action
In order for this lab to work, the Tie_Back_New.xls file will need to be modified as
follows:
The cell which reads (gets) 11_FC02.PIDA.OP (Cell D9) needs to be modified to get
FV.OPFINAL (It currently gets OP) as shown below:
=getpointvalarray(1,G4,B9,"FV.OPFINAL","V")
Open Control Builder (if it is not already open).
From the Project tab, open chart view for 11_FC02.
Double click on the PIDA block to open the properties window. Go to the Output Tab
and enter the Output Limits as shown below:
Go to Alarms tab, note the OP High Trip Point and Priority.

Trip Point
Priority
OP High:
Go to Monitoring Parameters tab, add OUTIND as a monitoring parameter.
Click OK to close the PIDA Properties window.
Download 11_FC02. In the load window, be sure to check the box to automatically
activate the control module.

4/13/2012
21

Step
4/13/2012
Action
10
After downloading, click the Monitoring tab and verify that 11_FC02 appears green. If
you are using Series C I/O, ensure the I/O channels are also active.
11
Open Station if not already opened. Go to the Detail Display of 11_FC02.
12
Change the station security level to MNGR.
13
Change the mode to AUTO, and change the SP to 9.3.


Step
Action
14
Go to the PV & OP tab and verify that the Output configuration values match the values
shown here.
15
Go to the Alarms tab and verify that the Trip Point and Priority configuration values
match the values shown here.

4/13/2012
21

Step
Action
16
Go to the Chart tab. On the PIDA block, double-click on OUTIND and change the value
to REVERSE.
4/13/2012


Step
Action
17
Go back to the PV & OP tab and observe that the Output configuration values have been
reversed as shown here.
ATTENTION
The Output Limits are different for Direct and Reverse.
However, if OUTIND = DIRECTIND or OUTIND =
REVERSEIND, then the Output limits will remain the
same as when OUTIND = Direct.
In other words, the Output Limits do not change when
OUTIND = Direct, DirectInd, or ReverseInd. The
Output Limits only change when OUTIND = Reverse.
18
From Control Builder Monitoring tab (chart view), or from the detail display of 11_FC02
(chart tab), change 11_FC02.OUTIND = Direct.
19
Observe that the point has no OP alarm. Make note of the following:
OP High:
OP:
OP Low:
20
From Control Builder Monitoring tab (chart view), or from the detail display of 11_FC02
(chart tab), change 11_FC02.OUTIND = Reverse.
21
Observe that the point still has no OP alarm. When the OP is reversed, the OP alarm
limits are also reversed. If the OP alarm limits were not reversed, the point would have
gone into alarm. Make note of the following:
OP High:
OP:
OP Low:

4/13/2012
21

Step
Action
22
Change 11_FC02.OUTIND = Direct.
23
With 11_FC02 in Auto, change the SP to 50 to generate an OP High Alarm. Do not

acknowledge the alarm, but observe the alarm indication in the Alarm Summary. Make
note of the following:
Condition:
Trip Value:
Live Value:
24
Change 11_FC02.OUTIND = Reverse.
25
Observe the change in condition on the Alarm Summary page. Make note of the
following for the new alarm:
Condition:
Trip Value:
Live Value:
Also make note of the following for the previous alarm:
Status of the OP High Alarm:
ATTENTION
The OP High Alarm is still shown (because it had not been
acknowledged), but is shown as returned to normal.
An OP Low Alarm is generated with a new Trip Value, and a
new Live Value.
4/13/2012
26
Acknowledge all alarms.
27
Change the 11_FC02.SP = 30 to remove all alarms.


Step
Action
28
ATTENTION
The screen captures below are for demonstration only.
Notice the graphical indications on the faceplate when OUTIND = DIRECTIND or
OUTIND = REVERSEIND.
Reverse OUTIND
Direct OUTIND
29
Change OUTIND back to Direct before starting next lab.
30
In Control Builder, on the Project tab, for 11_F02.PIDA, restore the output limits as
shown below:
OPHILM
= 105
OPLOLM
= -5
OPEXHILM = 106.9
OPEXLOLM= -6.9
31
10
Save and download 11_FC02 (with activation).

4/13/2012
21


Experion Software Installation Server
The Purpose of this lesson is to see the affects of enabling Red Tag and Operator Tag. After you
complete this lesson you will be able to check:
Red Tag and Operator Tag
Prerequisites
Experion Server running
Control Builder database loaded and running
4/13/2012

11

Procedure
Perform Task in Station
12
Step
Action
In Station, invoke the detail display of 11_FC02.
Change the mode of 11_FC02 to MAN.
Change the station security level to MNGR

4/13/2012
21

Step
4
Action
On the Main tab, check the RedTag Checkbox.
ATTENTION
When the RedTag option is enabled, a red color lock
will appear to the right of the OP.
4/13/2012

13

Step
5
Action
Try to change both the Output and the Mode. Observe the information displayed in the
tool tip.
ATTENTION
The tool tip indicates that the function block is Red
Tagged. Therefore, the operator can not make
changes to OP or MODE
6
14
Uncheck the RedTag Checkbox.

4/13/2012
21

Step
7
Action
Check the OperatorTag checkbox to enable Operator Tag.
Enter Operator Tag Description as Maintenance and press Enter.
ATTENTION
The OperatorTag option allows an operator to tag the block for operator
maintenance or a similar condition
Enabling the OperatorTag option does not lock the point's OP and MODE
parameters
4/13/2012

15

16
Step
Action
When the OperatorTag option is enabled, a flag will appear to the right of the OP.
Move the mouse over the flag which is shown to the right of the OP, and read the tool tip.
10
Clear the Operator Tag checkbox.

4/13/2012
22
Describe Templates and the Substitute Name

List

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Big Picture Device Control Point
Output Truth Table and State Names
Input Truth Table and State Names

State
State Name
DI
State
State Name
DO
State 1
START
State 1
START
State 0
STOP
State 0
STOP
DI
DO

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Some Device Control Block Configuration

See Appendix (last book) for more details
Up to 3 States
Up to 4 Inputs
Up to 3 Outputs

4/13/2012
Simple Device Control Block with One Input, One Output
Honeywell

4/13/2012
Interlock Strategies are implemented using Permissives, Override Interlocks,

and the Safety Interlock
Permissive P(0-2)
There is a Permissive for each state
Normally ON
Operator can select the state if its
Permissive is asserted (ON)
Can be Bypassed
P(1)
ON
Override Interlock OI(0-2)

There is an Override Interlock for each state
Normally OFF
When an Override Interlock is asserted (ON)
the Output is forced to its state
Can be Bypassed
P(0)
ON
OI(1)
OFF
OI(0)
OFF
SI
OFF
Safety Interlock SI
Normally OFF
Sets the Output to the Safe State when asserted (ON)
Cannot be Bypassed
Honeywell
Device Control Block with Logic

4/13/2012

4/13/2012
22
Honeywell
Device Control with Permissives and Interlocks
Honeywell
Project Parameters and Add Block Pins

Project Parameters
Select parameters of each block which will be available outside of the

template (ex: FAN_LOGIC.GEA.IN[2] )
Give each projected parameter a name (ex: Temp_Num)
This will be accessed by FAN_LOGIC.Temp_Num
Add Block Pins for the

projected parameters
FAN_LOGIC
Temp_Num

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Instantiate the Template (Create Instances)

HS_A
FAN_LOGIC
HS_B
HS_H

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Instance of
the template
HS_A

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
In this lesson you will learn how to use
templates and the substitute name list
to streamline the production of control
modules.
At the conclusion of this lesson, you
will know how to:
Build control modules using templates
Load and verify templates
Build control modules using the
substitute name list
10

4/13/2012
22
Control Module with Template Added
Honeywell
Topics
Building Control Modules Using Templates

Loading and Verifying a Template
Building Control Modules Using a Substitute Name List
11

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
Templates are control modules created in Control Builder
Once created, templates may be used to build multiple copies of desired

control strategies
Templates allow for change to propagate from parent to child
Templates can contain other templates, up to five levels
Template
GEA
Temp_Num
IN[2]
12

4/13/2012
In the Library tab, under System,

right-click Control Module
Select Make Template
13

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Build the Control Strategy

Build the control strategy and configure parameters
14

4/13/2012
22
Honeywell
Make a Template
Honeywell
Identify Projected Parameters

Define custom parameters for your control module
Connect your custom parameters to exposed pins
Template
Temp_Num
GEA
IN[2]
15

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Add Block Pins For Projected Parameters
Add a block pin for each

projected parameter which will
be wired
Template
Temp_Num
GEA
IN[2]
16

4/13/2012
Instantiate makes a useable version of the template for project

Make Template makes a new template in the library (child of the
original)
The name this template

will have in project
17

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Insert a Template
Insert the template into a CM
18

4/13/2012
22
Honeywell
Use Template
Honeywell
Complete CM with Template

Complete the CM with a template
Template
19

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 1: Template Use

Templates are best used:
A) For control modules containing one function block
B) For complex graphics
C) Where a complex control strategy is used in multiple
control modules
D) As a tool to prioritize the alarm sequence
Template
GEA
Temp_Num
IN[2]
The correct
Your
answer:
answer is:
Incorrect.
Correct!
Templates
Templates
arebest
bestused
usedbefore
where
whereaacomplex
complexcontrol
control
You must
answerare
the
question
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
strategy is
used in multiple control modules.
continuing
Submit
20
10
Clear

4/13/2012

21

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Templates in the Monitoring tab

Containment view / Assignment view
Templates
shown at root
Templates shown
as contained
22
11

4/13/2012
22
Honeywell
Topics
Honeywell
Chart View of a CM with a Template
Green indicates that the template is active

Blue indicates that the template is inactive
Red indicates that the template has failed
23

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Template in Chart View
Double-click the template in the

Monitoring Tab
24
12

4/13/2012
Which statement about templates is false?

A) A blue border on the bottom and right hand side of
an instance of a template in the Control Builder chart
view tells you the instance is active
B) In Control Builder containment view, a template
appears as a function block in the control module
C) In the Control Builder assignment view, a template
appears as a control module in the CEE simulation
Correct!
Incorrect.
A blue
A blue
border
border
on the
on the
bottom
bottom
andand
the the
rightright
hand
side
hand
ofside
an instance
of an instance
of a template
of a template
in the Control
in the Control
Builder
The
Your
correct
answer:
answer
is:
chart
Builder
view
chart
tells
view
youtells
thatyou
the that
instance
the instance
is inactive
is inactive
and not
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
and
active.
not
active.
continuing
Submit
25
Clear

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
26
13

4/13/2012
22
Honeywell
Question 2: Loading and Verifying Templates
Honeywell
Build Templates using Substitute Name List
Create the substitute names

Connect them to function block types
27

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Use the parameter connection tool

Select the substitute name as a connection
28
14

4/13/2012
The substituted names can be resolved to a function block parameter

when the template is instantiated.
Resolved
29

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 3: Substitute Name List

You may create templates to be:
A) Instantiated as stand-alone
control modules using your
substitute name list
B) Embedded control modules
using projected parameters and
block pins
C) All of the above
Yes!
No. The
The correct
correct answer
answer is
is "All
"All of
of the
the above".
above". You
You may
may
create
templates
The
correct
answerto
is:be instantiated as stand -alone
control
modules
or
embedded
control
modules
using
Your
YouIncorrect
Correct
did
answer:
You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Click
anywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
projected
parameters.
continuing
Submit
30
15
Clear

4/13/2012
22
Honeywell
Honeywell
Summary
When using templates, remember:
Templates are built in Control Builder.

created, templates may be used to build multiple copies of desired
Once
control strategies.
Templates allow for change to propagate from parent to child.
may create templates to be instantiated as stand-alone control modules
You
using your substitute name list or embedded control modules using
projected parameters and block pins.
31

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Conclusion
Completion
Certificate
Proceed to the Configure a Device Control Module with Logic and

Configure a Device Control Module with Interlock lab exercises
32
16

4/13/2012
22
Topic: Device Control Module

Contents
Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic ...................................................................................3
Configure a Device Control Module - with Interlock ............................................................................39
4/13/2012


4/13/2012


22
Objective
Configure a Device Control Module for Fans on the Heat Exchanger E-110 of the
Debutanizer Model
Configure basic Logic Blocks: NOT, AND, GE (Greater than or equal to)
Prerequisites
Experion PKS Server or a client machine with Experion PKS Engineering Tools loaded
Debutanizer graphic (debutanizer_123.htm) loaded on the Server. (This is required at a later

time to check the control strategy built in this lab.)
SCE Controller and IOMs configured
Configure Data Acquisition Control Module and configure PID Control Module labs are
completed
4/13/2012


Introduction
The control logic for switching the fans on Condenser E-110 is developed in this lab.
Operationally, the cooling fans are turned on in case the top temperature of 11_TI25 is greater than
a specified value. The Operator initiates the start command and each additional fan starts as the
temperature increases. When the temperature reaches 260 Deg C then 11_TI25 resets and the fans
turn OFF automatically.
The module will be built, loaded and tested
The implementation is as follows:
The DEVCTL (Device Control) block is a multi-input, multi-output function that provides an
interface to discrete devices such as motors, solenoid valves, and motor-operated valves. This block
provides built-in structures for handling interlocks and supports the display of interlock conditions
in group, detail, and graphic displays.
In this lab, Device Control points are used to control the cooling fans of the heat exchanger
E-110. When the temperature of T-100 overhead (11_TI25) goes above 55 Deg C, then FAN A
(11_HS14A) is started.
Similarly, FAN B (11_HS14B) is started only if the temperature goes above 60 Deg C and the other
fans are started sequentially according to the temperature of the tower top (11_TI25).

4/13/2012

Procedure
4/13/2012
22
Create a Template
Step
Action
Launch Control Builder from Configuration Studio, if not already open.
Create a Template.
Click the + icon adjacent to System in the library
Right click CONTROLMODULE
Select Make Template


Step
3
Action
Configure CM Parameters.
Double-click the blank space in the chart view of the new Template form.
Enter FAN_LOGIC in the Name field.
Enter FAN_LOGIC_ITEM in the Item Name field.
Enter FAN TEMP CONTROL in the Description field.
Enter FANS_C11 in the Parent Asset field (use browser to select parent asset).

4/13/2012

Step
4
Action
22
Enter the following display details:

sysDtldevctlA
ATTENTION
The Group Detail Display will be selected based on the
type of Point Detail Display specified.
These are the standard Honeywell Device Control
Point Detail and Group Detail Displays.
4/13/2012
Click OK.


Adding Function Blocks to a Template
Step
1
Action
In the chart view of FAN_LOGIC, add Function Blocks from the respective Library
families, according to the sequence below and the diagram displayed in step 2.
Block Family
Block
LOGIC
GE
(A)
LOGIC
NOT
(B)
LOGIC
AND
(C)
DEVCTL
DEVCTL
(D)
ATTENTION
When the blocks are inserted according to the above
sequence, each one is assigned an execution order
(ORDERINCM) automatically, increasing in multiples
of 10. ORDERINCM determines the relative execution
order of blocks within the CM in ascending order. This
parameter can be changed as required. This field can
accept any number from 0 to 65535.

4/13/2012

Step
2
Action
After adding all the blocks, arrange them as shown.
22
The explanation of each block is given below.
(A) GEA:
This block compares the Value in a Numeric Block (NUMERICA, added later) with the
actual temperature (PV of) 11_TI25.
(C) ANDA:
This block is a gate that provides the Start command to FANA if:
1. The temperature is greater than 55 Deg C and
2. The Operator has entered the start command.
(B) NOTA:
This block is a gate that inverts the signal from the ANDA gate and sends the signal to
the input OI(0) of the DEVCTLA block. This is the stop command for FAN A.
(D) DEVCTLA:
This block is the Device Control Block that provides the operator interface to the digital
I/Os.
4/13/2012


Step
3
Action
Configure the Device Control Block.
Double click the Device Control Block (DEVCTLA.)
Name:
DEVCTLA
Description:
Fan A Start in E-110
Enter the Block Sizing parameters in the Main tab as follows:

Number Of Inputs:
Number Of Outputs:
Number Of States:
Enter the State Names as follows:

State 1 Name:
START
State 0 Name:
STOP
10

4/13/2012

Step
5
4/13/2012
Action
On the Inputs tab, enter following details:
Number of Digital Inputs:
1 (default)
Input 1 unchecked Box :
STOP
Input 1 checked Box:
START
A selected checkbox means Input 1 is in an ON condition
Input 1 is the feedback from the field device (FANA)
The above entries (illustrated below) indicate that when the device is in the Start
State, Input 1 is ON
When the Device is in the Stop State, Input 1 is OFF

22
11

Step
6
Action
On the Output tab, enter the following data:
Number of Digital Outputs:
1 (default)
Output State checkboxes:

State 1
State 0
START:
STOP:
Selected
Not Selected
Select the Seal In Option.
See Online help (with option selected press F1 key) for Seal In Option details.
12

4/13/2012

Step
7
Action
On the Alarms tab, enter following data:
Time to
STOP
4/13/2012
Time to
START
Priority
Severity
Command Disagree
10
10
LOW
Command Fail
HIGH

22
13

Step
8
Action
On the Block Pins tab:
Remove the SI pin.
Select SI in the Selected Parameters Table, click the Remove button
Add pins OI[0] and OI[1] as inputs on the left.
Select Input and Left / Right
Click the Add button
Click OK.
14
Connect 11_TI25.DACA.PV to the IN[1] pin of the GEA block with a parameter
connector, as shown below.

4/13/2012

Step
10
Action
Arrange the Blocks and connect them as shown below.
22
ATTENTION
Change the pin positions as shown in the above figure using the
Block Pins tabs of each function block configuration form.
11
Save FAN_LOGIC.
12
Open the properties of FAN_LOGIC by double-clicking the blank space of the chart.
Select the Projected Parameters tab.
In the first Parameter Name location type Temp_Num.
In the Origin column, click the point selection () buton and in the Point Selection
dialog, select FAN_LOGIC.GEA.IN[2].
Click Insert Row to add a new row.
4/13/2012

15

16
Step
Action
13
Using the procedure in the previous step, insert new rows and complete connections as
indicated in the table below:
Parameter Name
Origin
Fan_Switch
FAN_LOGIC.ANDA.IN[2]
D_In
FAN_LOGIC.DEVCTLA.DI[1]
D_Out
FAN_LOGIC.DEVCTLA.DO[1]
14
Add pins and configure the Block Pins as shown below:
15
Click OK to close the parameters of Fan_Logic.
16
Save and Close FAN_LOGIC.

4/13/2012

Step
1
22
Create a Device Control Module

Action
Create new Control Module and configure CM parameters
Create a new Control Module.
Double-click the blank space in the chart view
Enter the following details
Name:
11_HS14A
Item Name:
11_HS14A_item
Description
E-110A FAN
Parent Asset
FANS_C11
4/13/2012
Click OK to close the properties of the new Control Module.
Save the CM and close the chart window.
Assign the CM 11_HS14A to your CEE (CEESCEFB61 or SIM_CEEC300).

17

Step
5
Action
Open CM 11_HS14A in chart view and add the function blocks from the respective
library families, according to the table below:
Block Family
Block
Sequence
C200E:
DICHANNEL
(A)
UTILITY
NUMERIC
(B)
UTILITY
FLAG
(C)
C200E:
DOCHANNEL
(D)
IOCHANNEL
C300:
SERIES_C_IO DI-HV
IOCHANNEL
C300:
SERIES_C_IO DO-24B
18

4/13/2012

Step
6
Action
After adding the blocks, arrange them as shown.
22
C
D
ATTENTION
The DI and DO channel in the screen capture might
look different if you are using Series C I/O
4/13/2012

19

Step
7
Action
In the Library tree, click on the + icon adjacent to USER to expand the tree.
Right click on FAN_LOGIC.
Select Instantiate.
20
Change the Destination Tag Name to HS_A and the Destination Item Name to
HS_A_item.
Click Finish.
10
Assign the HS_A to your CEE (CEESCEFB61 or SIM_CEEC300).

4/13/2012

Step
11
4/13/2012
Action
Drag HS_A from the project tab into the 11_HS14A chart.

22
21

Step
12
Action
Double-click the DICHANNEL to open the DI parameter configuration form.
Enter the following data:
Channel Name
13
HI (the letter I)
correct module and channel for 11_HS14A.HI.
For C200E:
Assign 11_HS14A.HI to the appropriate module and channel.
Close the properties of the HI block.
For C300:
Assign 11_HS14A.HI to the appropriate module and channel.
14
Double-click the DOCHANNEL to open the DO parameter configuration form.

Channel Name:
15
HS
correct module and channel for 11_HS14A.HS.
For C200E:
Assign 11_HS14A.HS to the appropriate module and channel.
Close the properties of the HS block.
For C300:
Assign 11_HS14A.HS to the appropriate module and channel.
22

4/13/2012

Step
16
Action
Double-click the NUMERICA block.
22

NUMERICA
Name:
PV High Limit: 95
PV Low Limit:
45
Actual Value:
55

Click OK.
17
Double-click the FLAGA block.

Name:
FLAGA
Description:
Operator cmd to turn ON/OFF Fan
Accept the default for any remaining parameters.

Click OK.
4/13/2012

23

Step
18
Action
Arrange and wire the blocks as shown below.
Change block pin locations, as necessary.
Save and Close 11_HS14A.
24

4/13/2012

Step
1
22
Copy Control Modules with Templates

Action
Right-click 11_HS14A in project view.
Select Copy.
4/13/2012

25

Step
Action
Change the CM Destination Tag Name to 11_HS14B and the Destination Item Name to
11_HS14B_Item.
Change the Template Destination Tag Name to HS_B and the destination Item Name to
HS_B_item.
Click Next.
26

4/13/2012

Step
Action
22
3
ATTENTION
This step is necessary only for C200E.
Click Next.
4/13/2012

27

Step
4
Action
Leave the Before and After entries as 11_TI25.DACA. (The GEA blocks of ALL
Device Control CMs will be comparing to the same temperature.)
Click Finish.
28

4/13/2012
Step
Action
Select 11_HS14B and HS_B in the Unassigned section of Project Tree and Assign both
tags to your CEE (CEESCEFB61 or SIM_CEEC300).
Double-click and open 11_HS14B in chart view.
correct module and channel for 11_HS14B.HI.
22
For C200E:
Display the properties of the HI block (double click on it).
Assign 11_HS14B.HI to the appropriate module and channel.
For C300:
Assign 11_HS14B.HI to the appropriate module and channel.
4/13/2012

29

Step
Action
correct module and channel for 11_HS14B.HS.
For C200E:
Display the properties of the HS block (double click on it).
Assign 11_HS14B.HS to the appropriate module and channel.
For C300:
Assign 11_HS14B.HS to the appropriate module and channel.
Double-click NUMERICA to open the parameter configuration form.

Ensure the following values are specified:
PV High Limit: 95
PV Low Limit:
45
Actual Value:
60
(note: this is 5 more than the actual value for 11_HS14A)

Click OK
10
30
Save and Close the Chart view.

4/13/2012

Step
11
Action
Build six more CMs 11_HS14C through 11_HS14H. Following the same procedure you
just used to build 11_HS14B and the configuration information in the tables below.
22
Templates Tag Names And Item Names

CM
Destination
Tag Name
CM Destination
Item Name
Template
Destination
Tag Name
Template
Destination
Item Name
11_HS14C
11_HS14C_item
HS_C
HS_C_item
11_HS14D
11_HS14D_item
HS_D
HS_D_item
11_HS14E
11_HS14E_item
HS_E
HS_E_item
11_HS14F
11_HS14F_item
HS_F
HS_F_item
11_HS14G
11_HS14G_item
HS_G
HS_G_item
11-HS14H
11_HS14H_item
HS_H
HS_H_item
NUMERICA Configuration
CM Name
NUMERICA
PV HIGH
LIMIT
NUMERICA
PV LOW
LIMIT
NUMERICA
ACTUAL
VALUE
11_HS14C
95
45
65
11_HS14D
95
45
70
11_HS14E
100
70
75
11_HS14F
100
70
80
11_HS14G
100
70
85
11-HS14H
100
70
90
IO Module and Channel Assignment

ATTENTION
Refer to the appropriate (C200E or C300) table at the
end of Appendix to determine the correct module and
channel for each Control Module.
4/13/2012

31

Step
12
Action
From the Library tab, expand the User function block, then right-click the FAN_LOGIC
template.
Select Module Properties.
32

4/13/2012

Step
13
Action
Select the Block Preferences tab.
22
Click Block Faceplate Color button.

Pick your favorite color from the resulting palette.
Click OK.
Open a few of the new CMs in chart view in project tree (11_HS14A through 11_HS14H)
and check that the color change propagated from the parent FAN_LOGIC to the child
templates.
4/13/2012

33

Load and Validate Control Modules
34
Step
Action
Select and load CMs 11_HS14A though 11_HS14H and CMs HS_A through HS_H.
If the CMs were not activated when they were loaded (if the Automatically change
checkbox was not checked), activate the CMs from the Monitoring tab.

4/13/2012
Step
Action
In the Monitoring window right-click the white space in the background of the monitoring
tree.
22
Select Assignment View or Containment View to toggle between views.

Select the + sign next to one of the new CMs.
ATTENTION
In Containment view, the contained CM is found under
the Container CM. In Assignment view, the Template
appears as any other CM in the tree.
Assignment View:
4/13/2012

35

Step
4
36
Action
Containment View:
Open Station and recall/refresh the Debutanizer_123 graphic.

4/13/2012

Step
6
Action
Check the Fans status and the value of 11_TI25 as indicated below.
22
Click the Fan Control button to call the faceplate popup: The FANS are currently OFF.
4/13/2012
Use the Fan Control button to set all the fans to the ON state.
Wait until all fans turn off. This will happen just after the temperature
11_TI25 reaches 260 and is reset back to 0.0.
As the temperature of 11_TI25 rises, observe the logic allowing the

appropriate fans to turn on. See the following reference section.

37

Step
7
Action
Green indicates that the Fans are in the RUN state. Red indicates that the Fans are in
the STOP state.
Reference
Temperature value of 11_TI25 and the state of the Fans.
38
Temperature
11_TI25
FAN
A
FAN
B
FAN
C
FAN
D
FAN
E
FAN
F
FAN
G
FAN
H
55 to 60
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
60 to 65
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
65 to 70
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
70 to 75
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
75 to 80
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
80 to 85
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
85 to 90
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
90 to 95
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON

4/13/2012


22
Practice
Objective
Configuring a Device Control Module for reflux pumps P62 and P63, and feed pumps P68
and P69
Use the Permissive and Safety interlocks of the Device Control Block
Understand block name references in CM and SCM
Prerequisites
Experion PKS Server or Client machine with Experion PKS Engineering Tools
Debutanizer_123 graphic loaded on the Server. [This is required (at a later time) to check
the control strategy built in this lab.]
SCE Controller and IOMs configured
Configure Data Acquisition Control Module and configure PID Control Module labs are
completed
Excel Data Exchange open with the simulation spreadsheet loaded
4/13/2012

39

Introduction
In this lab, the control for a pair of pumps, P62 and P63, is developed.
The Operator provides a Start command for Pump P62
If P62 does not start within 20 seconds from the Start command, then P63 will start
At any time, only one pump can be running
This strategy will be built, loaded, and tested
Device Control modules for the other pumps are then imported into the project
The three interlocks used for Device Controls are listed below.
The same logic is repeated for the Feed pumps P68 (11_HS68) and P69 (11_HS69)
1. Process Permissive Interlock (PI[0..2]
2. Process Override Interlock (OI[0..2]
3. Safety Interlock (SI)
40
These interlocks are associated with Device Control Block status values; that is,
State 0 and 1 for 2-state devices and State 0, 1, and 2 for 3-state devices
The Safety Interlock has the highest Priority and CANNOT be bypassed, while Process
Permissive Interlocks have the lowest priority
Override Interlocks OI[0..2], when active, force the commanded output (OP) to the
respective state regardless of the condition of the Permissive Interlocks. The operator cannot
command OP to a different state when the Override Interlock is active.
When BYPPERM is ON, an operator is able to change the OP regardless of the state of the
Override interlocks (BYPASS = ON). This does not affect the Safety Override Interlock
(SI). An Operator cannot bypass the Safety Interlock to change the OP. When you reset
the BYPASS parameter to OFF, any existing Override Interlocks, OI[0..2], take effect
immediately. Note: The default is OFF (unchecked - we are not using the Bypass option
here.)

4/13/2012

Procedure
22
Create a Control Module

Step
Action
1
ATTENTION
The screen captures for this lab assume the use of
Series A IO. If you are using Series C IO, please be
aware that you will be using the PV parameter for all of
your Series C DI connections and NOT the PVFL
parameter.
Create new Control Module and configure CM parameters
Create a new Control Module.
Double-click the blank space in the chart view
Enter the following details in the Main Tab.
Tag Name:
11_HS62
Item Name:
11_HS62_Item
Parent Asset:
Pumps_C11
Description:
P-62 Debutanizer Reflux Pump
Accept the default for any remaining parameters on this tab.
4/13/2012

41

Step
2
Action
Enter the following Display details:
sysDtldevctla
Click OK
ATTENTION
The Point Detail display 11_HS62 in Station will have
a standard Honeywell Device Control Point faceplate.
Save and close 11_HS62.

Assign 11_HS62 to your CEE (CEESCEFB61 or SIM_CEEC300).
42

4/13/2012

22

The IOMs configured in the Configure C200E Hardware and Series A IOM/Configure C300
Hardware and Series C IOM lab are used here.
Step
Action
Double-click the CM 11_HS62 in the Project window to open the chart view.
In the chart view of 11_HS62, add Function Blocks from the respective Library families
according to the following sequence:
Block Family
Block
Sequence
C200E:
DICHANNEL
(A)
LOGIC
OR
(B)
UTILITY
FLAG
(C)
DEVCTL
DEVCTL
(D)
C200E:
DOCHANNEL
(E)
IOCHANNEL
C300:
SERIES_C_IO DI-HV
IOCHANNEL
C300:
SERIES_C_IO DO-24B
ATTENTION
For more information on how to add function blocks to
a CM, refer to the Knowledge Builder, Experion
R400 > Configuration > Control Building Users
Guide > Creating a Control Module > Creating and
saving a Control Module> Creating an instance of
a basic function block.
When you insert the blocks, one by one, according to
the above sequence, each one is assigned an
execution order (ORDERINCM) automatically,
increasing in multiples of 10. ORDERINCM determines
the relative execution order of the block within the CM
in ascending order. You can change this parameter, if
required. Enter a number from 0 to 65535 in this field.
4/13/2012

43

Step
3
Action
After adding all the blocks, arrange them as shown below.
The explanation for each block follows:
A
C
ATTENTION
The DI and DO channels in the screen capture might
look different if you are using Series C I/O
(A) DICHANNELA: This block provides feedback from the field for pump P62 indicating the
actual field state of P62 as follows:
DICHANNELA Status
P62 State
ON
START (i.e., Running)
OFF
STOP
(B) ORA allows either a signal from FLAGA or HS63 to force the pump off.
(C) FLAGA Used to give a manual Start command to the pump P62.
(D) DEVCTLA Device Control Block that provides the user-friendly interface to the digital I/Os.
(E) DOCHANNELA the actual signal to pump P62 in the field for the START/STOP command.
44

4/13/2012

Step
Action
Save 11_HS62.
Double-click the DICHANNEL to open the DI parameter configuration form.
22

Channel Name
6
HI (the letter I)
correct module and channel for 11_HS62.HI.
For C200E:
Assign 11_HS62.HI to the appropriate module and channel.
For C300:
Double-click the DOCHANNEL to open the DO parameter configuration form.

Channel Name:
HS
correct module and channel for 11_HS62.HS.
For C200E:
Assign 11_HS62.HS to the appropriate module and channel.
For C300:
4/13/2012

45

Step
9
Action
Configure the Device Control.
Double-click the Device Control Block.
Click the Main tab.
46
Name:
DEVCTLA
Description:
P-62 Debutanizer Reflux Pump

4/13/2012

Step
10
Action
Enter the Block Sizing parameters in the Main tab as:
Number Of Inputs:
Number Of Outputs:
Number Of States:
22
Enter the State names in the Main tab as:

State 1 Name:
START
State 0 Name:
STOP
4/13/2012

47

Step
11
Action
Click the Inputs tab.
12
Number of Digital Inputs:
1 (default)
Input 1 unselected checkbox:
STOP
Input 1 selected checkbox:
START
Click the Output tab.

Number of Digital Outputs:
Outputs State 1 checkbox:
Selected
Outputs State 0 checkbox:
Not Selected
Select the Seal In Option.
See online help for additional information on the Seal In Option
48

4/13/2012

Step
13
Action
22

Time to
STOP
Time to
START
Priority
Severity
Command Disagree
20
20
LOW
Command Fail
10
10
HIGH
4/13/2012
14
Click OK.
15
Click File > Save to save the CM 11_HS62.

49

Step
Action
16
Double-click the Device Control block and select the Block Pins tab and add pin OI[1]
as Input Left.
Click OK.
50

4/13/2012

Step
17
Action
Double-click the FLAG block.
22

Name:
FLAGA
Description:
Turn Reflux Pump ON
Click OK.
18
Double-click the ORA block.

Invert the input IN(2) by selecting the checkbox for item 2.
Click OK.
4/13/2012

51

Step
Action
19
ATTENTION
This step is optional. Use either the Full Name option,
or the Short Name option as desired.
Click Tools System Preferences. In the Relative Reference Display Option field,
select Short Name so the user does not have to enter more information than required.
Click OK.
The following message requesting to close all other (remotely opened) Control Builder
sessions appears.
Click OK on the message box.
52

4/13/2012

Step
20
Action
Arrange and connect the blocks as shown below:
22
ATTENTION
For details of each block connection, refer to the chart
in the next step.
A
D
C
E
4/13/2012

53

Step
21
Action
Connection Chart for 11_HS62
PIN
TO FUNCTION
BLOCK
PIN
PVFL
ORA
IN[2]
PVFL
DEVCTLA
OI[1]
IN[1]
(CONNECT
LATER)
OUT
DEVCTLA
SI
HI
PVFL (PV for C300)
DEVCTLA
DI[1]
DEVCTLA
DO[1]
HS
SO
FROM
FUNCTION
BLOCK
FLAGA
ORA
22
Save and close CM 11_HS62.
23
Copy 11_HS62 as 11_HS63.

11_HS63 will be present in the Unassigned section in the Project tree window. Assign
the CM to your CEE (CEESCEFB61 or SIM_CEEC300).
24
Open 11_HS63 in chart view.
11_HS63 contains the same blocks and wiring as 11_HS62. Only the HI
(DICHANNEL) and HS (DOCHANNEL) have no channel assigned
ATTENTION
The following steps will complete the configuration of 11_HS63.
Those steps will:
25
Assign HI (DICHANNEL) and HS (DOCHANNEL) to channels.
Modify the logic in 11_HS63 so that pump P63 will only start if
P62 fails to start within 20 sec after receiving the Start
command from the FLAGA block.
Because there can be only one FLAG block for the

START/STOP command on both pumps, the FLAGA block
must be deleted from 11_HS63.
To Delete the FLAGA block.

Select FLAGA.
Press the Delete button.
54
FLAGA and associated connections are deleted

4/13/2012

Step
26
Action
Drag and drop the following function blocks to 11_HS63.
Block Family
LOGIC
LOGIC
27
22
Block
ONDELAY
AND
Configure the ONDELAY gate.

Double-click the ONDELAYA Block.
Name:
ONDELAYA
Delay Time:
20 (Delay time is in seconds)

Click OK.
ATTENTION
The ONDELAY block delays the Start command to
Pump P63 by 20 seconds.
4/13/2012

55

Step
28
Action
Configure the ANDA gate.
This block sends the Start command, to pump P63 (delayed by 20 sec), if
pump P62 has not started
Double-click the ANDA function block.

Enter ANDA in the Name field.
Invert the input IN(2) by selecting the checkbox for item 2.
When finished, click OK to close the ANDA function block.
29
This option inverts the P62 Start signal. So if P62 has not started after 20 sec,
then only P63 will start
correct module and channel for 11_HS63.HI.
For C200E:
Display the properties of the HI block.
For C300:
56

4/13/2012
Step
Action
30
correct module and channel for 11_HS63.HS.
22
For C200E:
Display the properties of the HI block.
For C300:
31
Wire the blocks as follows:

Wire parameter 11_HS62.HI.PVFL (PV for C300) to the IN[2] pin of the ANDA block with
a parameter connector.
Wire the Out Pin of the ONDELAYA block to the IN[1] pin of the ANDA block.
Wire parameter 11_HS62.FLAGA.PVFL to the IN pin of the ONDELAYA block with a
parameter connector.
4/13/2012
The ANDA gate output is true if ANDA receives the TRUE signal at IN(1) and a
FALSE signal at IN(2) as IN(2) is inverted

57

Step
Action
32
Wire parameter 11_HS62.HI. PVFL (PV for C300) to the IN[1] pin of the ORA block with
a parameter connector.
Wire parameter 11_HS62.FLAGA.PVFL to the IN[2] pin of the ORA block with a
parameter connector.
Complete the remaining connections as shown below.
58
The ANDA gate sends the START command to the Pump through OI[1] only if
P62 does not start after 20 sec
33
34
Open CM 11_HS62 to configure the SI interlock (as shown in the following steps).

4/13/2012

Step
35
Action
22
Wire parameter 11_HS63.HI. PVFL (PV for C300) to the IN[1] of ORA.
36
37
From the Project Tree window, import (with CEE assignment) CMs 11_HS68 and
11_HS69. Import from:
ATTENTION
Follow the procedures in the Import/Export Lab, if you need a refresher.
If you are Using SIMC200E/C200E the path for Database is
IXPORT\Student_DB\Series_A
4/13/2012

59

Step
Action
38
Open the Project Tree window and verify that the Parent asset of 11_HS68 and
11_HS69 is Pumps_C11. If not, change it to Pumps_C11.
39
Download (with activation) 11_HS62, 11_HS63, 11_HS68, 11_HS69.
40
Use the Monitoring Tree window to verify all the CMs are active (green).
41
Open the Debutanizer_123 graphics on Station. If the graphics already loaded then
reload the page so that new points are recognized.
42
60
All four pumps are OFF (Red)
Select the ON command for the pumps in the combo box.
P62 and P68 are ON (green)
If P62 and P68 fail which they will after sometime (up to 60 seconds) because of
the simulation in Tie_Back_New, then P63 and P69 will be commanded to start
After P62 and P68 have been commanded to start, it will be at least 20 seconds
before P63 and P69 are commanded to start because of the OnDelay function
blocks in P63 and P69
Therefore, after P62 and P68 turn on, it can be from 20 to 80 seconds (plus
screen update) before P63 and P69 turn on.
This happens because P62 feedback indicates that DI(1) is not ON within 20 sec
after the Operator issues a start command

4/13/2012
23

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
In this lesson, you will learn about different Auxiliary Blocks
AUXCALC block
Counter Block

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Auxiliary Blocks
Auxiliary blocks perform mathematical functions

4/13/2012
Honeywell
AUXCALC Block
Previously, the AUXCALC block was used for performing more

complicated mathematical functions
The AUXCALC block has mathematical and logical capabilities
The AUXCALC block uses a lot of memory (2452 bytes according to the
CEE Detail page)
Simpler calculation blocks have been developed
Use less controller memory

Ensure optimum use of memory

4/13/2012
Honeywell
AUXCALC Block Constants

In R400, a Constants tab was added for calculator blocks
23
Can enable and enter values for up to 8 constants

Can define the access level required to change the constants
Can be used in expressions or as inputs or outputs
Constants used in
Expressions
Constants used as
inputs and outputs

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
In this lesson, you will learn about different Auxiliary Blocks
AUXCALC block
Counter Block

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Counter Block Overview

Provides a way to count events
Counts up based on CNTUPFL

Counts down based on CNTDNFL
Outputs are: Count and count limit reached flags
Count Limits determined by equation (Eq A to Eq H available)
Can be implemented in the following CEE environments

C200E, SIM-C200E, C300, SIM-C300, ACE, SIM-ACE

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Counter Block Functions
The counter can be reset to 0 (RESETFL), paused (PAUSEFL), or set to

a specific value (LOADFL, ININT32)
Output flags (QUFL, QDFL) are turned on or off based on:
Input (ININT32)
Count (OUTINT32)
Algorithm configured (Eq A to Eq H)
Ex: Eq A: QUFL is true if OUT IN; QDFL is true if OUT 0

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Count on Level vs. Count on Transition
If both CNTUPFL and CNTDNFL are ON

(or both transition to ON), or if both are
OFF (or both transition to OFF), then the
count does not change.
Count inputs are evaluated as edge-triggered quantities

Value increments / decrements if the input has changed from OFF to ON
t
Count on level flag (CNTVLVFL) checked

Count inputs are evaluated as level triggered quantities
Value increments / decrements on every execution cycle while the input is ON
t

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Counter Inputs
Accepts Integer 32, Float 64, and Boolean inputs
Selection of the input format is based on the Input Selection Specifier

(SELINT32FL) parameter
If checked, input format selected is INT32
If unchecked, input format selected is FLOAT64
If the selected input format is FLOAT64, the

Input Clamping Option (INCLAMPOPT)
determines if special handling is required
for out of range or invalid input values
10

4/13/2012
23
CNTUPFL causes the count to increment

CNTDNFL causes the count to decrement
Count on level flag (CNTVLVFL) unchecked
Honeywell
Float 64 Input Conversions
Value clamping, or substitution for invalid or out of range values

Value fetched or
attempted to store
INCLAMPOPT
IN.FLOAT64 value
Value for Counter Load

Operation
Value for Limit

Checking
Value > 2,147,483,647.0
TRUE
2,147,483,647.0
2,147,483,647
2,147,483,647
NaN. Comparison is always
FALSE
Truncated Integer value
Value > 2,147,483,647.0
FALSE
NaN
Value will not be loaded.

Previous Counter value is
retained
Value within
2,147,483,648.0 to
+2,147,483,647.0
TRUE / FALSE
Floating point value

truncated to integer
equivalent
Truncated Integer value
Value < 2,147,483,648.0
TRUE
2,147,483,648.0
2,147,483,648
2,147,483,648
FALSE
FALSE
Value < 2,147,483,648.0
FALSE
NaN

retained
NaN
TRUE / FALSE
NaN

retained
11

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Counter Equations
Equation
Counter
Overflow
Counter
Underflow
QUFL (TRUE)
QDFL(TRUE)
+2,147,483,647
- 2,147,483,647
OUT >= IN
OUT <= 0
+2,147,483,647
- 2,147,483,647
OUT >= IN
OUT =
-2,147,483,647
+2,147,483,647
OUT >= IN
OUT = 0
IN
OUT >= IN
OUT = 0
+2,147,483,647
- 2,147,483,647
OUT >= 0
OUT <= IN
+2,147,483,647
- 2,147,483,647
OUT =
+2,147,483,647
OUT <= IN
- 2,147,483,647
OUT = 0
OUT <= IN
-IN
OUT = 0
OUT = IN
12

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Summary
Function blocks provide a variety of configurable functions for

Auxiliary
conditioning, calculating, and compensating PV data in support of
Experion PKS R400, the Constant tab and Expression Description
Inparameters
are added to calculator blocks
can be used to provide most features available in PLC
Counters
counters
13

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Conclusion
Completion
Certificate

14

4/13/2012
23
Regulatory Control Functions
15

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
In this lesson, you will learn about
Overview of MATH function blocks
Rolling Average Function block
16

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Math Blocks
Math blocks perform simple mathematical
functions
23
Use these blocks rather than the AUXCALC

block when performing simple math
More efficient use of memory
AUXCALC block uses 2452 bytes
Math blocks use 50 600 (see next page)
Mathematical function blocks provided

under the MATH Library
17
Honeywell
Library of Math Blocks

Math blocks provide efficient usage of memory
Block Name
ADD (8 input connections)

4/13/2012
Function
Sum of n arguments
1 MU = 1000 bytes
Memory Used
Approximately 110 bytes
SUB (2 input connections)
Subtraction
MUL (8 input connections)
Product of n arguments
DIV (2 input connections)
Division
MOD (2 input connections)
(x MOD y)
ABS (1 input connection)
Absolute value
POW (2 input connections)
(x^y)
EXP (1 input connection)
e to the power of x
SQRT (1 input connection)
square root
LN (1 input connection)
Natural logarithm of a number (log to the base of e)
LOG (1 input connection)
Base 10 logarithm of a number
NEG (1 input connection)
-(x)
TRUNC (1 input connection)
Round down to nearest integer value
ROLLAVG
Rolling Average
ROUND (1 input connection)
Rounded up to nearest integer value
18

4/13/2012
Introduction of Rolling Average block
Honeywell
Calculates a rolling average of values collected over a specified period

of time
Similar to the Rolling Average Algorithm available in the AM (TPS)
Available in the C200E, C300, ACE (and their simulated environments)

ROLLAVG function block is added from the MATH Library in Control
Builder
19
Honeywell
Rolling Average Block Algorithm

4/13/2012
The Rolling Average Calculation
Collect samples in buffer at specific frequency

Save the samples to the buffer
Mark samples as OK (good) or Bad
Calculate the average of the collected samples
Output = Sum of all samples (Good values) in buffer
No. of good samples in buffer
20
10

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Frequency of Sample Collection

The frequency of sample collection
is defined by two configurable
parameters
23
ROLLFREQ
Defines the number
ROLLFRBASE
Defines the time base:
Seconds, minutes, or hours
Sample Period (Frequency)

Defined by ROLLFREQ and ROLLFRBASE
Example: if ROLLFREQ is 4, and ROLLFRBASE is seconds then
samples are collected every 4 seconds
Must be a multiple of the period of the containing CM
Example: if CM Period is 2 seconds, the sample frequency can be a
multiple of 2 i.e. 2, 4, 6, 8, and so on

4/13/2012
21
Load Time Error if Sample Period is Not a Multiple of CM
Honeywell
The collection frequency of the

ROLLAVG block must be a
multiple of the period of the
containing CM
If not, a load error will occur

The output (rolling average)
of the block will be NaN
Error message at time

of download
22
11

4/13/2012
Length of Time for Which Samples Will Be Collected
Honeywell
ROLLBUF: Defines the period for which samples will be collected

ROLLBFBASE: Defines the unit of time for the collection buffer
Length of time samples will be collected
Example: if ROLLBUF is 20 and ROLLBFBASE is seconds then samples
are collected for 20 seconds
23
Number of Samples Collected Buffer Size

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Rolling average size (ROLLAVGSZ)

The number of values that will be stored by the Rolling Average function
block
ROLLAVGSZ =
ROLLBUF
ROLLFREQ
The maximum size of the buffer is 3800 samples

When the buffer is full, the next sample will overwrite the oldest sample
in the buffer (FIFO)
24
12

4/13/2012
Rolling Average OK and BAD Value Count
Honeywell
ROLLAVGOK
The number of good samples in the buffer
Included when calculating rolling average
23
ROLLAVGBAD
The number of bad samples in the buffer
A bad sample is one whose value is NaN
Excluded when calculating the rolling average
25

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Example: Calculate Rolling Average
Consider the following values for calculating the rolling average
CM Period =
ROLLFREQ =
ROLLFRBASE =
ROLLBUF =
ROLLBFBASE =
2 seconds
6
seconds
24
seconds
Number of samples collected = 4

Values of samples collected: 4, 6, Nan, 8
Rolling Average (output) is 6
OUT = (4+6+8)/3=6
Block displays the good and bad values as

ROLLAVGBAD =
ROLLAVGOK =
1
3
26
13

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Example: Calculate Rolling Average

ROLLAVGOK = 7
ROLLAVGBAD = 3
Number of good samples

when calculating the rolling
average
Number of bad samples

excluded from calculating the
rolling average
Sum of all good samples

Number of good samples
4.5 4.6 4.5 4.9
NaN 4.6 NaN 4.7 4.8 NaN 4.5 4.6 4.5 4.5
ROLLAVGSZ = 10
ROLLAVG.OUT
= 4.6
4.5 4.6 4.5 4.9
Values stored in
buffer
Number of FLOAT64 values that will

be collected in the Average Rolling
function block
27

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Resetting the Rolling Average

ROLLAVGRST
Used to restart the rolling average
Can be done without inactivating the
CM
When ROLLAVGRST = ON
Sets all values = 0

Sets ROLLAVGOK = 0
Sets ROLLAVGBAD = 0
Turn the ROLLAVGRST to OFF
Restart sample collection
Restarts the calculation
Can be done by an engineer, SCM,

or CAB
28
14

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Conclusion
23
Completion
Certificate

29

4/13/2012
Honeywell
30
15

4/13/2012

Topic: Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks

Contents
Use Rolling Average Function Block .....................................................................................................3
23
Use Counter Function Block ................................................................................................................13
4/13/2012


4/13/2012

Configure Rolling Average block
Navigate through different parameters of Rolling Average block.
23
Objective
Prerequisites
Knowledge of Control Builder
Knowledge of navigating through Control Builder
Knowledge Builder access
C300/SIM-C300, C200E/SIM-C200E created and loaded in Control Builder.
TIP
The Rolling Average block cant be assigned to
C200/SIM-C200 CEE.
Introduction
4/13/2012
In this lab, you will learn the configuration and working of the Rolling Average block. The
Rolling Average block will calculate the rolling average of the Numeric output.


Complete the following steps in Control Builder
Step
Action
Click File > New > Control Module.
Double click on the chart to open properties window of control module.

On Main tab enter following:
Tag Name: CM_RollAvg
Item Name: CM_RollAvg_Item
Description: <Your choice>
Parent Asset: <Any Existing Asset>
Click OK.
Add a NUMERIC block from the UTILITY library to CM_RollAvg.
Add a ROLLAVG block from the MATH library to CM_RollAvg.
The CM will look as shown below:

4/13/2012

Step
7
Action
Double Click on ROLLAVGA block to open properties window.
Rollavg frequency -time span
Rollavg frequency -units of time
SECONDS
RollAvg collection -time span
40
RollAvg collection -units of time
SECONDS
23
On the Main tab, enter the following:
Click OK.
ATTENTION
Rollavg frequency -time span (ROLLFREQ) should be
a multiple of the CM period. In this case, the
execution period of the CM period was left at
DEFAULT which is 1 second (default = 1 second for a
50 ms CEE). 4 seconds (the ROLLFREQ) is a
multiple of 1 second (the CM period).
Rollavg collection -time span (ROLLBUF) is configured
to be 40 seconds. This will cause a buffer size of 10
(ROLLBUF/ROLLFREQ). Therefore, 10 samples will
be used to calculate the rolling average.
4/13/2012


Step
Action
Connect the function blocks as shown.
Save, close, and assign the CM to the CEE of SCE59 (or SIM_C300).

4/13/2012

Step
Action
10
Load and activate CM.
11
Open CM_RollAvg in the monitoring mode.
23
Observe that the ROLLAVGSZ (Roll average buffer size) parameter is 10 and the
ROLLAVGBAD parameter is incrementing.
ATTENTION
ROLLAVGBAD is the number of bad samples that
have been put into the rolling average buffer. This
number is incrementing because the input to the block
is NaN (Not a Number). The rolling average
calculation uses only good values. In this case, the
input has always been NaN (since the CM was
activated). Because there have not been any good
values at the input, there are no values contributing to
the rolling average, and so the output is also Nan.
4/13/2012


Step
Action
12
Enter a value in the NUMERIC block (into the Actual Value field).
In the example shown value entered is 896.
You can enter any value.
13
Observe as the rolling average block gets the good samples it starts calculating the
rolling average.

4/13/2012

Step
Action
14
Observe that ROLLAVGOK is incrementing and that ROLLAVGBAD starts

decrementing. After some time, the buffer will be filled with good values. When that
happens, ROLLAVGOK will be 10 and ROLLAVGBAD will be 0.
15
Enter different values into the NUMERIC and observe that the output of the ROLLAVG
block changes accordingly.
23
4/13/2012


Step
16
Action
Reset the rolling average by double-clicking on ROLLAVGRST and turning it ON.
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog.

17
10
Observe that the rolling average block restarts the calculation. Also ROLLAVGOK
becomes zero and starts incrementing to represent the number of good samples in the
buffer.

4/13/2012

Step
18
Action
Change the PV of the numeric block to NAN.
Observe that the output of the ROLLAVG block shows the average of only good values
received. NAN values are omitted from the calculations.
23
When the ROLLAVGBAD becomes equal to 10 the rolling average calculated becomes
equal to NAN.
ATTENTION
When ROLLAVGBAD becomes 10 it indicates that the
buffer has only NAN values and there is not a single
good value. Therefore, the rolling average becomes
equal to NAN.
19
Open the control module in project tab.

Remove the connection between the NUMERIC block and the ROLLAVG block.
20
Using a parameter connector, connect any 11_PC15.DACA.PV to the input of

ROLLAVG.
21
Save, Close, Load and Activate the CM.
22
Open the CM in monitoring mode.

Reset the ROLLAVG block.
4/13/2012

11

Step
23
Action
Observe the changes in the OUTPUT of ROLLAVG block.
In the example shown 11_TI21.DACA.PV is used.
ATTENTION
Make sure the TIE BACK excel sheet is running.
12

4/13/2012


Objective
The objective of this lab is to configure and use the Counter function block
Knowledge of Control Builder and navigating through Control Builder
Knowledge of configuring and loading the Control Modules
C300/SIM-C300, C200E/SIM-C200E is created and loaded
23
Prerequisites
TIP
The Counter block cant be assigned to C200/SIMC200 CEE.
Introduction
At the conclusion of this lab, you will be able to do the following:

o Configure a counter function block
o Use the CNTUPFL,CNTDNFL,RESETFL,PAUSEFL,LOADFL flags
4/13/2012

13

o
Complete the following steps in Control Builder.
Step
Action
Open Control Builder if it is not already opened.
Create a new Control Module with the following properties:

Tag Name: CM_Count
Item Name: CM_Count_Item
Description: CM for Counter
Parent Asset: <Any Existing Asset>
Click OK in the configuration properties and save the Control Module.
Save the Control Module and assign it to the CEE of SCE59 (or SIM-C300).
In the Library tree, expand the AUXILIARY library. Drag and drop a CTUD block onto the
CM.
Double Click the CTUD block to open the block properties.

From the Block Pins Tab, remove the INFLOAT64 pin and add the ININT32 pin as an input on
the left.
From the Utility library, Drag and Drop the following blocks onto CM_Count:
FLAGARRAY
NUMERIC
TYPECONVERT
Double Click on FLAGARRAY to open the block properties.

On the Main tab, change the Number of Flag Values to 5.
14
On the Block Pins Tab, add 5 PVFL pins as outputs on the right.

4/13/2012

Step
Action
Arrange and Connect the blocks as shown below:
10
Double click the CTUDA block to open its configuration properties.
23
4/13/2012

15

Step
11
Action
Enter the following in the configuration properties of the CTUD block:
Name: Counter
Description: Count Up or Down
Select the Count on Level Flag and Input Selection Specifier checkbox .
Leave other values to default and click OK.
TIP
If the Input Selection specifier is checked, then the
input format used in Counter block is INT32.
If the Count on Level Flag is selected, then the
counter increments or decrements the value as level
triggered quantities once every execution cycle.
16
12
Save and Close CM_Count.
13
Load and activate CM_Count.
14
In the Monitoring tab, open CM_Count.
15
Turn ON the PVFL[1] pin of the Flag array block which is connected to the CNTUPFL (Count
Up Flag) pin.

4/13/2012

Step
Action
16
Verify that the value of OUTINT32 is incremented once every execution cycle.
17
Turn on the PVFL[4] pin of the Flag Array block which is connected to PAUSEFL. Observe
OUTINT32 value is not getting incremented (or decremented ).
18
Turn off PVFL[4] pin of Flag Array block. Observe OUTINT32 value again starts incrementing.
19
Open the properties of the NUMERICA block. Enter 25 in the Actual Value column and press
enter. Click Yes in the Change Online Value dialog box.
20
Turn on PVFL[5] pin of the Flag Array block which is connected to LOADFL pin.
23
Verify that the value of OUTINT32 is changed to 25 and that QUFL is ON.
21
Turn off PVFL[5] pin of Flag Array block. Observe that OUTINT32 is incrementing and QUFL
is still ON.
22
Turn off PVFL[1] pin of Flag Array block.
23
Turn on the PVFL[2] pin of the Flag Array block which is connected to CNTDNFL. Observe
that OUTINT32 is getting decremented once every execution cycle.
Observe that QUFL is OFF.
4/13/2012

17

Step
Action
24
When OUTINT32 value reaches 0 QDFL is ON.
25
Observe that OUTINT32 is decrementing and that QDFL is still ON.
26
Turn off the PVFL[2] pin of the Flag Array block.
27
Turn ON the PVFL[3] pin of the Flag Array block which is connected to RESETFL pin. You
will observe that the value of OUTINT32 is set to 0.
28
Turn off the PVFL[3] pin .
29
Open the properties of the NUMERICA block and enter an actual value of 2147483645.
Leave the other values to Default and click OK.
18

4/13/2012

Step
Turn ON the PVFL[5] pin of the Flag Array block which is connected to the LOADFL pin.
Verify that the value of OUTINT32 was changed to 2147483645.
23
30
Action
Turn off the PVFL[5] pin.

31
Turn ON the PVFL[1] pin of the Flag Array block connected to CNTUPLVL. When the value of
the OUTINT32 crosses 2147483647, an overflow occurs and the counter value changes to
-2,147,483,648 and continues counting .
TIP
Based on the value of the Counter Equation
(CNTEQN) parameter, the Overflow and Underflow
action varies.
For Equation C, if the Counter overflows from
+2,147,483,647, OUTINT32 changes to 0
32
4/13/2012
Turn OFF the PVFL[1] pin of the Flag Array block.

19

Step
33
20
Action
Close the CM_Count control module.

4/13/2012
24
Database Search

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
Search engine is embedded in Configuration Studio
Search Utility is used to:
define the search criteria and initiate a search

search system databases, folders and files to determine where specific
strategies, templates, displays, and assets are used in the system
search for specific parameters that exist (defined) though they may not be
used
display detailed search results
save search criteria for future reference and use
Database Search

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Search Types
The Search Utility supports
two query options:
Where Used
Parameter Search
Search Utility provides the

ability to navigate between
these search options
Database Search

4/13/2012
Honeywell
System Search
The Search Utility can be launched at either the system level, or the
server level
When launched as a system task, the search will allow one or all DSA
servers in the system to be searched
When launched as a server task, the search will allow only the connected
server to be searched
Database Search

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Server Search
Search scope covers the entire Experion System
The Search Utility supports searching Assets/Alarm Groups
24
Search Utility, when launched as a Server task, will search the EMDB
(assets / alarm groups), but will search the folders (displays), QDB
(SCADA points), and ERDB (process points) only on the Server from
where it was launched
Database Search

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Where Used Search
Where Used search option will list all the information regarding the
usage of:
Control Strategies/Templates in the ERDB (project!)

HMIWeb Displays and shapes in the HMIWeb Display Builder files
Asset and Alarm Groups in the Enterprise Model Database (EMDB)
SCADA Points in the QDB
Database Search

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Where Used Search - User Interface

Search Query Pane
Search Results Pane
Status Bar
Database Search

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Search Query Pane Options

New - Clears the Search For and Look
In fields
Load - Loads saved search criteria
Save - Saves the search criteria as an XML file
Help - Launches a simpler version of
Knowledge Builder for search tips
Enter the objects name to search for
Refines a search by defining search
criteria (selecting specific data repositories and
file folders). Select double arrow for text input
boxes. A Browser Point Picker is available at
the right corner of all text input boxes
Launches a simpler version of Knowledge

Builder with tips on how to search
Switch to Parameter Search
Database Search

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Select Server Combobox
Select the name of the Server(s) that will be searched when a search
query is started
24
If the Search Utility is launched at the system level, the Select Server dropdown box will list all Servers that are configured in the Enterprise system
model
When the Search Utility is launched at the Server level, the Select Server
drop-down box will list only the Server that is currently connected to
Configuration Studio
Database Search

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Where Used Search Default

Where Used search opens All search options by default
Database Search
10

4/13/2012
Where Used Search Specific Search
Honeywell
An introductory Search Query

pane is accessed when the
Back button is selected in the
All Search window
It also appears when Where
Used link is selected in the
Parameter search query pane
Where Used search has four

search options:
Process Points
Display Shapes
Assets/Alarm Groups
All/Any
Database Search
11
Honeywell
Look In Options
Database Search

4/13/2012
12

4/13/2012
Honeywell
24
Look In Options for Where Used Search
Database Search
13

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Results Toolbar and Menu

Results Toolbar and Menu
Provide options to sort and filter search results
Simple text string search

on the search results
Specify the filter criteria

and click Filter to
view specific rows
Exports search results

(all/filtered) along with any
data in hidden columns into
.xml or .csv file formats
Print the Search results

in Report form
Select Columns in the

Results pane for clarity and
comparison
Database Search
14

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Where Used - Process Points

Searches for usage of a given Control
Strategy/Template/Objects defined in the
Engineering Repository Database (ERDB)
Searches Process Point references in
Display Files and Alarm groups
The instances of data objects that are
searched includes usage as:
a pin for a connection
a block reference
Instantiation, Derivation and Assignments of

function blocks and their parameters are
displayed in the results for a given strategy or
template when queried as Where Used
Database Search
15
Where Used Displays, Assets/Alarm Groups, All/Any

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Displays Shapes
Search for information on the usage of display shape references in Displays
and Shape files
Assets/Alarm Groups
Search for Asset and Alarm Group references defined in the Enterprise Model
Database (EMDB), ERDB, Display files and the Quick Builder file
All/Any
Search for data matching the text string specified in the Search For textbox
Database Search
16

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Parameter Search
Search for Strategies/Templates based on Parameter names and values
24
Searches the ERDB and gets the information for all the Parameters with the
specified search criteria
Database Search
17
Search Query Pane Parameter Search

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Similar to Where Used Search Query Pane

Has only Process Points listed since
parameter query only searches the ERDB
Advanced Option is used to add specific
search criteria which helps refine the search
Database Search
18

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Advanced Search Option
Used to define specific search

criteria (explained later)
Add the search criteria to

the Search Criteria List
Window at the bottom
Conditions used to combine

individual criteria to form a
complex search option
Used to move/delete/clear the

criteria in the Search Criteria
List Window
Search Criteria List Window
Database Search
19
Advanced Option Parameter Search

4/13/2012
Honeywell
Field Textbox:
Specifies a Parameter to be used by the search criteria
A Browser Point Picker button is available to provide a list of parameters
Condition Combobox:
Used to select specific conditions for the search criteria
Shows only valid options based on the parameter type (String, Boolean or
Other)
String --
Other -Boolean --
Database Search
20
10

4/13/2012
Advanced Option Parameter Search
Honeywell
Value Textbox:
24
Specify a valid value

Язык

Добро пожаловать в Scribd!

Student Course Book- Automation

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Дата загрузки

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Описание:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Student Course Book- Automation

Загружено:

Описание:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Похожие издания

Automation College

Copyright 2012 Honeywell Inc.

Honeywell International, Inc.

C200/C200E Controller Architecture

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2

Control Builder Introduction

C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts

C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts

Control Builder Import / Export Procedure

Controller Hardware Configuration

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2

Performance Calculations and Monitoring

Process Simulation for Lab Exercise

Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Data Acquisition Control Module

Productivity Tools in Control Builder

ERDB Administration and Other Tools

PID Control Module

PID with Split Range Control Module

Cascade PID Control Module

Cascade PID with Two Secondaries

Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication

Device Control Module

Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks

Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Identify the Debutanizer Lab Sequence

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation

Sequential Control Module - Lab

SCM Abnormal Handlers

Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Describe Search Functionality

Orientation and Course Introduction

Navigating the self-paced computer-based lessons

Orientation and Course Introduction

Purpose of This Course

Experion PKS Control Execution

Fault Tolerant Ethernet

Configure C200, C200E and C300

Build control strategies on the C200,

TPS, TDC2000, TDC3000

Orientation and Course Introduction

Who Should Attend

Experion System implementers who are responsible for designing and

Orientation and Course Introduction

What You Will Learn

the role of the major Experion PKS hardware and software

Configure control modules that incorporate data acquisition, regulatory

control and logic

Configure sequential control modules (SCMs) used to control process

sequences such as startup, shutdown and batch operations

Troubleshoot typical errors in configuration

The Experion PKS Control

The basic concepts and strategies

Fault Tolerant Ethernet

A hands-on workshop in which you

Orientation and Course Introduction

Orientation and Course Introduction